JP2019147018A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine with a contrivance for performance which promotes an operation of an operation part.SOLUTION: The game machine: acquires lottery information upon receipt of a game medium into a start port; executes a special pattern variation on the basis of the lottery information upon establishment of a special pattern variation start condition; executes a performance on the basis of the lottery information during a special pattern variation period; includes a plurality of operation parts operable by a player; and can execute a first performance prompting an operation of the first operation part and a second performance prompting an operation of the second operation part during one special pattern variation period, the first operation being displayed during one predetermined period, the second performance being displayed in a period which varies with the special pattern variation, and the operation mode of the first operation part prompted by the first performance being different from the operation mode of the second operation part prompted by the second performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 183

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that includes an operation unit that can be operated by a player, and that produces an effect in conjunction with an operation performed by the player on the operation unit.

In such a gaming machine, an image or the like that prompts operation of the operation unit is displayed in a variation effect that suggests an expected occurrence degree of an advantageous state in which the player is advantageous, and when the operation input of the operation unit is received, the effect is displayed. What is going on is proposed.

Japanese Patent Application No. 2009-113350

  However, there is room for further contrivance with respect to the effect that prompts the operation of the operation unit in the gaming machine in which the effect is advanced by operation of the operation unit.

  In view of the above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that is devised with respect to an effect that prompts the operation of the operation unit.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention adopts the following configuration. The gaming machine has a lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information when a game medium is received at a predetermined starting point, and a special symbol variation execution that executes a special symbol variation based on the lottery information when a special symbol variation start condition is established. A predetermined number of the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means and the effect execution means for executing the effect during the special symbol change period by the means, the special symbol change execution means based on the lottery information A holding means for storing and holding as a value, a game state control means for controlling any one of the normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and a plurality of players operable by the player And a second operation unit that is different from the first operation unit, and a first effect that prompts an operation of the first operation unit among the plurality of operation units in one special symbol variation period. A second effect that prompts an operation can be executed, and the first effect is displayed while a valid period of operation of the first operation unit is determined, and the second effect is The operation period of the operation of the second operation unit is not determined, and the operation mode of the first operation unit prompted by the first effect and the second effect are prompted. The second operation unit is different from the operation mode of the second operation unit, and the second effect is allowed to appear in a situation where the number of the storage units held by the holding unit is less than the upper limit value. It is an effect and is an effect that can appear before the first effect during the special symbol variation period in the advantageous gaming state.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game machine by which the device with respect to the production | presentation which prompts operation of an operation part was given can be provided.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right when the press operation part of a production | presentation operation unit is a raise position. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled each of the outer-frame left assembly and outer-frame right assembly of an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, and was seen from the front. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame 2, and was seen from front upper, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at (a) from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit from the back. (A) is a disassembled perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle unit in a door frame and was seen from the front, (b) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production | presentation operation unit in a plate unit from the advancing / retreating direction of the production | production operation part button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled for each main member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation ring and was seen from the upper front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation ring and was seen from the lower front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit of the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the front right. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as seen from the front and bottom. (A) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a lowered position, (b) It is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a push operation part is a raise position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between an effect operation ring and a rotation drive unit in the left view of an effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between an effect operation ring and an effect operation ring decoration board in the top view which looked at the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation part of the pressing operation part. It is a front view of a tray unit when pressing is performed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame shown with each decoration board. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner in a main body frame, (b) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner of a main body frame when a door frame is opened with respect to a main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher in a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit of a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit in a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. FIG. 6 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). . It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full sphere path | route unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from back lower. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the back. It is expanded side surface sectional drawing which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine cut | disconnected in the left-right direction center. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit from back. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the inside of the game area | region where the game ball in a game board distribute | circulates. It is a front view of the center actor and the front effect unit in the front unit of the game board. It is side surface sectional drawing which cut | disconnected the table | surface production | presentation unit in the left-right direction center with the center accessory, and was seen from the right. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the relationship between LED in a front effect unit and the reflective recessed part of a front light-guide plate. It is a front view which shows the light emission aspect of a front light-guide plate. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the front light guide plate of the front effect unit is caused to emit light. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the lower front center decorative body is caused to emit light in the lower movable effect unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the lower center elevating base is raised in the lower movable effect unit and the lower front center decorative body and the lower rear central decorative body are caused to emit light. Lower lower elevating base, lower left side elevating base and lower right side elevating base are raised in the lower movable production unit to light the lower front center ornament, lower rear center ornament, lower left side ornament, and lower right side ornament It is a front view of the game board shown in the state made to do. FIG. 109 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the game board is in the state of FIG. 108 and the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. The four rotating decorative bodies, left side rotational decorative body, left sub-side rotational decorative body, right side rotational decorative body, and right sub-side rotational decorative body in the lower movable effect unit are developed to schematically show the decorations of the decorative portions on each surface. It is explanatory drawing. It is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the kind (size) of the arrow light-emitted and displayed in a lower movable production | presentation unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the upper rear left decorative body and the upper rear right decorative body of the upper rear movable effect unit is lowered. It is explanatory drawing which shows schematically the drive mechanism of an upper rear movable production | presentation unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the clutch mechanism of an upper rear movable production | presentation unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit is lowered. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the upper front movable decoration body of an upper front movable production | presentation unit. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the main process performed by main control MPU, (b) is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the interruption process regularly performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting port passage process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting port passage process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hit | judging determination process performed by main control MPU. (A) is a winning determination table used for lottery processing for winning, (B) is a big hit symbol determination table used for lottery processing for big winning types, and (C) is a small winning type. It is a small hit symbol determination table used for the lottery process about. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot control process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit control process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol process process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passage process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal process performed by main control MPU. (A) is a universal figure determination table used for the lottery process for the normal map, and (B) is an open pattern table for the normal map used for the determination process for the open pattern for the normal map. is there. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol stop process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal electric accessory release process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub main process performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16mS steady process performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the effect control process performed by the periphery control MPU. (A) is a hold notice determination table used for determining a hold notice pattern at 1 o'clock on hold, (B) is a hold notice determination table used for determining a hold notice pattern at 2 o'clock, (C ) Is a hold notice determination table used for determining a hold notice pattern at 3 o'clock. (D) is a hold notice determination table used for determining a hold notice pattern at 4 o'clock on hold. It is a hold change effect determination table used for determination of a hold change effect pattern. It is an example of the effect display of the effect display apparatus at the time of execution of the hold movement change effect as the hold change effect. It is an example of the effect display of the effect display device at the time of execution of the hold change effect as the hold change effect. It is an example of the effect display of the effect display apparatus at the time of execution of a billiard hold change effect as a hold change effect. (A) is an over-winning effect determination table when the over-winning occurrence count = 1, 3, 5, 7 o'clock, and (B) is an over-winning effect determination table when the over-winning occurrence count = 2 o'clock, (C) is an over-winning effect determination table when the number of over-winning occurrences = 4 o'clock, (D) is an over-winning effect determination table when the over-winning occurrence frequency = 6 o'clock, and (E) is an over-winning effect determination table. It is an effect determination table at the time of over winning after the number of winning occurrences = 8. It is an example of the effect display of the effect display apparatus at the time of execution of a big hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the light emission display of a light-guide plate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the light emission display of a light-guide plate. It is a table which shows an example of a big hit probability and a small hit probability. It is a table which shows an example of the pattern of the opening time and closing time of a big winning opening selected in each round of big hit game or small hit game. (A) is a table showing an example of the time of a hit start effect (also called an opening effect), and (B) is a table showing an example of the time of a final hit effect (also called an ending effect). It is a table which shows an example of the operation | movement schedule of the big winning opening during a big hit game. It is a table which shows an example of the operation | movement schedule of the big winning opening in a small hit game. It is an enlarged front view which shows an example of the outline of a structure in a 1st big prize opening. It is a timing chart which shows the operation schedule of the movable body in the 1st big winning opening during the small hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of stock time production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of the effect at the time of acquiring a stock in stock time effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of the effect at the time of acquiring a stock in stock time effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of an effect when a stock cannot be acquired in a stock time effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of an effect when a stock cannot be acquired in a stock time effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of an effect when a stock cannot be acquired in a stock time effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of an effect when a stock cannot be acquired in a stock time effect. It is a table which shows an example of each change time of the 2nd special symbol change of the 1st to 5th after a time-short state starts. It is a table which shows an example of the change time of each 2nd special symbol change of the 6th-8th time after a time-short state starts. It is an example of a fluctuation pattern table selection table. It is an example of a stock time production block table. It is an example of a stock production specific table. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the time schedule at the time of winning a small hit by the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation corresponding to the winning in time reduction state, (B) is the 1st special symbol corresponding to the winning in time reduction state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the time schedule at the time of winning a jackpot by change. It is an example of a judgment production table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of final Janken production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect in a big hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect in a big hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect at the time of the completion | finish of the fluctuation | variation in which a hold charge effect is performed, when no hold of special figure 2 is accumulated. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation when the 2nd special figure 2 hold | maintains immediately before completion | finish of the fluctuation | variation in which a hold charge effect is performed. It is an example of a fixed display time selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a front instruction | indication effect. (A) is a front view showing an example of a simplified configuration of a pachinko machine equipped with a production operation lever, and (B) is a left side showing an example of a simplified configuration of a pachinko machine equipped with a production operation lever. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the judgment effect using a some operation part. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the judgment effect using a some operation part.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position as viewed from the right front. is there. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 12 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and was seen from the back.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is driven.

  The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, and a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as viewed from the front.

  Further, the door frame 2 is configured such that when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted in phase and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

  The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly viewed from the front side, stores the game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by the player for driving the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates the effect operation unit 301. Thus, the player can participate in the production, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for attaching the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be opened and closed, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and the game A ball launcher 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and a game board attached to the main body frame base 501 A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of, and includes an outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, a.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. In addition, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so as to be openable and closable, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a front component member 1000 A plate-like gaming panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and divides the rear end of the gaming area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower rear side of the gaming panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a periphery disposed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 A control unit 1500, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image; A table unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 includes various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emission effect according to the gaming state.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege (for the player by receiving or passing the game ball B) ( For example, a general winning port 2001, a first starting port 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting port 2004, a first major winning port 2005, and a second major winning port 2006 for giving a predetermined number of game balls B) It has. The obstacle nail is implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. A general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate part 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first large winning opening 2005 and a second large winning opening 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  A player can drive a game ball B into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B enters the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate unit 2003, the second starting port 2004, the first major winning port 2005, the second major winning port 2006, etc. in the gaming area 5a. The player can enter the operation of driving the handle 182 so as to be accepted or passed.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state changed by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, or the table effect unit 2600 and the lower movable effect. The player can be entertained by causing the unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like to perform a movable effect and a light emitting effect.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. 13 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view in which the outer frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in front view extends vertically.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 that connects the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

  In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward by phase inversion.

  In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be coaxially rotatable by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front after disassembly. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 respectively extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 support the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 so as to be rotatable coaxially with respect to the outer frame 2. It is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that opening and closing is possible.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 that is attached to the upper right side of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded material of aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flattened to the right in the rear portion of the left and right sides of the front and rear direction, and a right portion from a portion on the right side opposite to the concave portion 11a. A bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that penetrates the bulging portion 11b vertically. The outer frame left member 11 is enhanced in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

  The outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with an outer frame right member 21 of an outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat upper plate fixing portion 12b extending from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat horizontal lower fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 has the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c inserted into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and the front side Further, by screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in a state where the rear lower fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. It is attached to the outer frame left member 11. In addition, the upper left connecting member 12 causes the horizontal fixing portion 12a to abut the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left notch 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper and horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from the rear side portion of the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b And a flat plate-like contact portion 13d extending short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the abutting portion 13d on the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and abuts the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. The screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in a state where the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a is aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41 and allows the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the notch portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member that is attached to the upper left end of the outer frame right member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower left side lower end of the outer frame right member 21, an upper hook member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extrusion mold. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a that is recessed leftward in a flat shape in a rear portion of the right and left sides of the front and rear direction, and a left portion from a portion on the left side opposite to the concave portion 21a. A bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The outer frame right member 21 is increased in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

  The outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat upper plate fixing portion 22b extending from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat horizontal lower fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 has the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a abutted against the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and the front side Further, by screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a state where the rear lower fixing portion 22c is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The outer frame right member 21 is attached. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, thereby being attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending backward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion behind the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and a left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b A flat plate-like abutting portion 23d extending short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 abuts the rear surface of the abutting portion 23d on the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The screw is screwed into the upper lateral fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a being in contact with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the lower right connecting member 23 causes the horizontal fixing portion 23a to abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 24a. And a flat plate-like hooking piece 24b on which the outer upper frame flange 653 is hooked.

  The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 25a. A flat plate-like latching piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other in the left-right direction. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 includes notches 30a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively attached to the cutout portions 30a at both left and right ends.

  Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes an attachment step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end. The outer frame hinge assembly 50 described later is attached to the attachment step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and an outer frame lower member 41 extending left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 that is disposed in front of the member 41, extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41, and is open to the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and that extends to the left and right, and a ball engagement prevention formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame lower member 41 includes notches 41a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The left and right cutouts 41a are attached with the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 inserted respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

  Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and includes a recess 41b into which the lower part of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and extends from the position closer to the rear of the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. By this recess 41b, the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 is made as large as possible.

  The curtain plate front member 42 has a lateral length that is the same as the length of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular parallelepiped box shape whose depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 closes the opened rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, thereby cooperating with the curtain plate rear member 43 to be a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 is provided with a long hole-like opening 42a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends to the left and right in the front surface near the right end.

  The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with the front open. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a curtain plate front member 42 attached to the front surface to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate front member 42. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends in the left and right direction and protrudes upward at the center portion in the horizontal direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so that the upper end is positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a. The enclosure 624 is formed in communication with the internal space of 620a.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is configured such that the game ball B stays at a portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is placed between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. This is to prevent pinching.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later is confronted, and a mounting portion A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a, An upright wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the mounting portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion that protrudes forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d and that is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as it goes rearward. Part 44e.

  The 1st discharge port 44b is formed in the position which corresponds with the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 mentioned later. The 1st discharge port 44b and the 2nd discharge port 44c are formed in the magnitude | size which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40 a and are opened on the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  This ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. Intrusion of an unauthorized tool can be prevented by the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the placement portion 44a. Even if the tip of an unauthorized tool contacts the standing wall 44d and bends upward, it contacts the upper end protruding part 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall 44d and further intrudes. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placement portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped on the placement portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the placement portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44 a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Therefore, there arises a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placement portion 44a is transferred to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes the pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders attached to the front of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a across the grill member 46 and extending in the front-rear direction. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The pair of guide members 45 are configured such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having a low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 easy to slide to facilitate opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate inner space 40 a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 through the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders that are formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length. The port member 47 resonates and amplifies a bass sound emitted backward (inside the enclosure 624) from the main body frame speaker 622 based on the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, a rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass-reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43 a and the lower end of the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4. This prevents the sound in the speaker enclosure from leaking from between the connection tube 43a and the connection 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front top, and FIG. 21B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be rotatable. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. And a mounting screw 53 that attaches the locking member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is a flat plate extending horizontally, and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixed portion 51a. A flat front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the front and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and extending downward from an edge from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. And a flat end edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage lateral fixing portion 51d. The outer frame hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the body frame hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending in the front-rear direction, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending obliquely left front and an attachment hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is pivotally attached to the rear side of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the mounting screw 53.

  When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame hinge member 51, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the outer frame hinge member 51. The edge wall portion 51e extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52 c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 52 a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51 e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in the direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the attachment hole 52d. Accordingly, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

  The lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c Can pass through. Thereby, the hinge pin 512 on the body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the hinge pin 512 on the body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like raised portion 60b that rises upward from a rear portion of the left side of the horizontal portion 60a with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d having a size penetrating the horizontal portion 60a vertically and allowing only one game ball B to pass therethrough. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrower than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to the left position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. In the horizontal portion 60a, the discharge hole 60d is in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the upright portion 60b, and is formed to extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60d has substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball engagement prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60 a is mounted on the mounting portion 44 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Is fixed to the curtain plate rear member 43. Further, the upright portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in front of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60 c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be opened and closed.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60 d coincides with the first discharge port 44 b of the ball engagement prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 is gradually narrowed, so that the gap is rolled to the rear side with a wide interval, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 60d. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay on the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The door frame 3 is formed in a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached to the inside of the outer frame 2 via the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed from the front side. It has been. The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly viewed from the front side, stores the game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by the player for driving the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 is a quadrangular and frame-like door frame base unit 100 whose front view extends vertically, and is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and includes a game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that closes the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100 Is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200. Door frame left side unit 400 and the door attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit A right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a that is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose front view extends vertically, and penetrates forward and backward, and the front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle attachment member 102 attached below, the speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the vicinity of the right end in the rear view on the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101 The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105. Rear handle relay board 106, door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub relay board 105 that cover a part of door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side. A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and give rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

  The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202, and is delivered from the payout device 580. The game ball B is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. This is for playing games.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the left side of the front view is hinge-rotatable, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is closed so as to be openable and closable. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular and flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 for mounting the handle unit 180 attached to the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101, And a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and a handle rear relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 that is attached to the rear side and covers the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a case that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 180 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

  In addition, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangular shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape whose inner peripheral shape in the front view extends vertically. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are respectively close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner in front view on the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. Between the right side and the right side of the front, and is recessed from the rear to the front. The insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion recess 101c penetrates back and forth. A cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b pass through front and rear on the left side when viewed from the front, and pass forward through the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. And a ball feeding opening 101e to face the surface.

  Also, the door frame base 101 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the ball for the lower dish facing the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 to the front. A passage opening 101f, a bowl passage opening 101g for an upper dish that penetrates forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view, and faces the through-ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, A glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a plurality of vertically long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) and penetrate forward and backward. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, the plurality of slits 101i are located in the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the body frame 4 in the rear. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a through-hole 101j penetrating in the front-rear direction below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. The through-hole 101j is inserted through a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side, and passes through the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle attachment member 102 is for attaching the handle unit to the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tube portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from the rear end of the tube portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 102a, A plurality of (three in this example) protrusions 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire length in the axial direction of the tube portion 102a and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tube portion 102a; And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101b in the door frame base 101.

  The cylindrical portion 102 a is formed so that its inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three protrusions 102 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181 c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the cylindrical portion 102a only when the three protrusions 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be restricted with respect to the door frame base 101.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the inclined handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 because the axis of the cylinder portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b. The cylinder part 102a is inclined so that the axis of the cylinder part 102a extends to the right front, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101 i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear end of the cylindrical part of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thereby, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101 i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, it can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side) of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103 a is arranged on the left side of the front view of the door frame relay board cover 107, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board / door frame sub relay board / handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the post-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the post-handle relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and a connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And a part of (see FIG. 84) are connected.

  The door frame sub-relay substrate 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which a quadrangle extending left and right is combined on the right side of the front of the upper part of the quadrangle extending up and down. The frame main relay board 104 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left in the rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes a handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are configured so that the door frame base relay board 104 and a portion extending vertically from the door frame sub relay board 105 in the state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled are doors. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150.

  The post-handle relay substrate 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101 b below the ball feed opening 101 e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear handle relay board 106 is in a state where the rear side is covered by the rear handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the post-handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board (a part extending in the inverted L shape vertically) It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front and the left in front view opened. When assembled in the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the terminal from the left side and connected to these terminals.

  The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and is a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and give the door frame base unit 100 rigidity. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 has left and right left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112 that are spaced apart from each other and are connected to the left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 attached to the upper end from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 A cylinder mounting frame 115 that connects the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of the cylinder mounting frame 115 that are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 so as to be spaced apart from each other vertically. The hook member 116 is provided.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, these insertion holes are inserted through the ends of the door frame collars 652 of the locking unit 650. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends from side to side with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates forward and backward near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position where the upper frame ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101 and the through portion 114b coincide with the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is spaced apart from the left and right, and a pair of rear piece portions formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically in a front view and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. A pair of side piece portions extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front side and a flat plate-like front piece portion for connecting the sides of the front ends of the pair of front extension portions are provided. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape whose shape in plan view protrudes forward. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hook member 116 is attached to a portion of the insertion hole penetrating forward and backward on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112. These hook members 116 are hooked with door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hook member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are formed by stamping a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. The door frame base 101 is assembled so as to be positioned below the door window 101a.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passing port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. In addition, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The door frame hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a door frame hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a door frame hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like mounting piece 121a having a rectangular shape in front view, and a flat plate-like protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has an attachment piece 121 a attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is obtained by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below in the vicinity of the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. The part that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b and that extends horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame is rotatably inserted into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

  The eaves member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers a portion extending vertically between the upper hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward through the flange member 123.

  The door frame hinge assembly 120 is such that the door frame hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion at the lower end of the door frame hinge pin 122 is the lower protruding piece. By contacting the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

  When the part of the door frame hinge pin 120 that extends horizontally at the lower end of the door frame hinge assembly 120 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame hinge member 510 from below or pull it downward. it can. As a result, the upper left end of the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the upper end of the upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the main body frame hinge member 510. It can be supported as possible.

  Further, in the door frame hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thereby, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1h. Hinge member under door frame]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a rectangular flat plate-like mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. And a door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

  The attachment piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer periphery of the lower end is tapered chamfered. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is coaxial with the portion of the protruding piece 125b that extends vertically above the door frame hinge pin 122 of the door frame hinge assembly 120 in the assembled state in the door frame base unit 100. Installed.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be able to rotate by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can do.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locking. The cylinder lock 130 includes a columnar cylinder main body 131 extending in the front-rear direction, a key hole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder main body 131, and a rear side of the cylinder main body 131. And a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 has a rear end attached to the front piece through the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 from behind. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and moves from the rear end to the front side at a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches cut out. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of notches to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder main body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252 h of the dish unit main body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 34 and FIG. FIG. 34A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front of the ball feeding unit, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from behind. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and games stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be extracted to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball extraction button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with the door opened, and a game ball that has entered the front entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction in a box shape with the front end closed and the rear end of the front cover 141 closed. A rear cover 142 having a hitting ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and a front cover that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. The ball removal member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b on the rear side of the 141, and the game balls B on the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 one by one in the rear cover 14 , The ball feeding member 144 supported so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. A ball feeding solenoid 145.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in front view, and a ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball pulling member 143 described later extends from 141c to the front. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl ball is assembled. And it is formed so that the site | part opened to the back of the upstream end side of the ball extraction guide path 241c may be closed from the rear side.

  The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a that divides the entrance 141a and the ball discharge port 141b below the entrance 141a and has an upper surface that becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and a partition 143a Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in the shape of a letter from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction A pivot rod 143b that is pivotally supported by the pivot rod 143b, a rod-shaped actuation rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the pivot rod 143b, and a pivot rod 143b below the actuation rod 143c. A weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side of the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34A). The operating rod 143c is connected to the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper dish ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Abut the top surface.

  The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 144a and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143. A sphere holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotating shaft core side, and a rod-shaped flange portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 144b are provided. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° with the rotation axis as the center. In addition, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size that can hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis when the collar 144c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b of the partition portion 143a. It rotates between the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a and stays on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the side of the flange 144c closes the hitting ball supply port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

  The ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip which is swung in the vertical direction in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around the axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around the axis extending in the vertical direction.

  The ball feeding operation rod 146 includes an iron plate 146 a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward. It has been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and feeds the ball around the right end. It rotates so that the left end side close to the crank 147 moves upward. Thereafter, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, so that the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward with the right end portion as the center. And return to the initial state. As a result, the ball feeding operation rod 146 is swung vertically by the ball feeding solenoid 145 at the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147.

  The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 that moves up and down and engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the opposite side to the side and is pivotally supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped flange portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center.

  The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 is in a state where the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held. To turn. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 117) of the payout control board 633.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment that rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 that is pivotally supported or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removal member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that is operated by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200. Therefore, in the normal state, the partitioning part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned and partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and the ball extraction port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter.

  Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button of the dish unit downward, the upper dish ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission unit, and the operation rod 143c is moved along with the downward movement of the operation transmission unit. Will also move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball pulling member 143 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball discharge port 141b to partition. Is released. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball outlet guide path 241c of the unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball in the dish unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower dish 202 through the lower dish ball supply port 211c.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 242 formed with the action transmitting portion 242b with which the action rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 contacts is biased upward by the spring 243, so that the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball pulling member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B can be It is possible to prevent the 143a from bouncing back.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) that is recessed to the upper right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142. A tamper-proof member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment concave portion 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape with a front view extending left and right, and an upper piece 148a that is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center in a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. A lower piece portion 148b, and inclined portions 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the leading end side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other. . The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148 so that the right end in front view protrudes backward. The lower piece 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the tamper-proof member 148. Thus, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

  According to the fraud prevention member 148, the illegal game ball B with the string attached is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a and attached to the illegal game ball B. The momentum of the illegal game ball B fired (hit) by the ball launcher 540 when an illegal act is performed in which the illegal string is manipulated to allow the illegal game ball B to be taken in and out of the first starting port, etc. The string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then formed into a V shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed part of the game, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202, and is delivered from the payout device 580. The game ball B is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and a through ball passage 150a that communicates the normal guide path of the lower full ball path unit of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port of the dish unit; A full sphere receiving port 150b that opens rearward on the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a when viewed from the front and communicates with a full tank guide path of the lower full ball path unit of the main body frame 4 is provided. .

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is opened upward on the right side when viewed from the front of the full ball receiving port 150b, and did not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launching device of the main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving port 150c that receives a game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B that opens forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received in the full tank receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c. A ball discharge port 150d that discharges forward and communicates with the lower tray ball supply port of the tray unit is provided.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharge port 150d by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passage 150e having a possible size is provided.

  The penetrating sphere passage 150 a is formed across both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-like movable piece 153 attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 so that the lower end thereof is rotatable, and the movable piece 153. A full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

  When the inside of the lower plate 202 of the dish unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not released from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is somewhat in the storage passage 150e. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155 by the weight of the game balls B. Thus, the movable piece 153 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. Accordingly, since it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of the game balls B, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects the full tank, the payout of the game balls B beyond this is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, a staff member of the game hall, and the like so as to prompt the player to cancel the full tank 202.

  The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through ball passage 150a, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 (to be described later) of the main body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 150f with which the operation protrusion 613a of 613 can contact is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the discharge passage opening / closing door 613 contacts the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated so that the downstream end of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 29 and 30. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and is detachably mounted so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. The glass unit 160 allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to be viewed from the player side (front side) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The front of the region 5a is closed.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the outer periphery of the glass unit 161 is closed. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101 rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. An attachment member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of attachment pieces 161a extending outwardly from a position below the upper left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. A plate-like locking piece 161b. The attachment piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163 b of the glass unit attachment member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into a space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are respectively attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 97).

  The glass unit mounting member 163 is a disc-shaped base portion 163a that is rotatably attached to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes in a bar shape from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

  To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101 h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the glass unit 160 can be removed by a procedure reverse to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is restricted by the protruding portion 163b. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position so as to be above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction | limiting of the movement to the back of the glass frame 161 is not cancelled | released naturally, and the glass unit 160 does not remove | deviate from the door frame base 101 naturally.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear portion of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged with a flat plate-like main body portion 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-like rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171, and is separated from the left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 in a state of being attached to the door frame base unit 100. The main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 with the upper end assembled in the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front constituent member 1000 to be described later, a part of the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The pachinko machine 1 is assembled so as not to protrude into the game area 5a.

  The rear protrusion 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear protrusion 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear protrusion 172 protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. The rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed so as to be along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  Note that the rear protrusion 172 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not contact the rear protrusion 172 of the crime prevention cover 170, and the game area The game ball B is not hindered into the 5a.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body portion 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161) and protrudes backward from the lower side of the main body portion 171. The removed rear protrusion 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component member 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 38A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 38B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the back. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and the player can drive the game ball B in the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 when operated. Is.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the cylinder portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182. A disc-shaped cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181; a handle decoration board 184 attached to the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; and a front side of the handle decoration board 184 so as to cover And a handle cover 185 attached to the cover base 183.

  The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182 and a handle 182 attached to the front end, and is rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, a detection shaft 189a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner And a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). One end side is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

  The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186, and a distal end projecting outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 as viewed from the front. A single button 193 which is attached to the handle base 181 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending rearward and forward on the handle base 181 at the end side behind the inner base 186, and a single button attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single button 193 And an operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end 181b projecting radially from the front end of the base 181a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a in the handle mounting member 102. Accordingly, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three protrusions 102c, and the protrusions 102c are respectively inserted into the three groove portions 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 cannot be rotated relative to the handle mounting member 102.

  The handle 182 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d that protrude outward in the circumferential direction from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the center of rotation, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked A locking projection 182f.

  The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusion 182b, the third protrusion 182c, and the fourth protrusion 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a bulges so that the side surface in the clockwise direction of the front view of the portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulges outward, and the counter-rotation around the opposite side The side surface in the direction of is recessed (curled) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 182b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the first protrusion 182a that protrudes most in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and from the first protrusion 182a. Slightly low. The second protrusion 182b bulges so that the side face in the clockwise direction of the front projection of the second protrusion 182b bulges outward, and the side face in the counterclockwise direction that is the opposite side is curved inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

  The portion of the third protrusion 182c that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is away from the most protruded portion of the second protrusion 182b in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It protrudes at about half the height. The third protrusion 182c is inclined substantially linearly on the side surfaces on both sides, and more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction where the side surface in the clockwise direction is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d has a portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 away from the most protruded portion of the third protrusion 182c in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle with side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a that protrude rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a range of a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle cover 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and has translucency. The handle cover 185 includes a lens member that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The handle cover 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seating surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in plan view, and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 180 that is attached to the pachinko machine 1 is also inclined to the outside in a plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). Are attached and fixed to the door frame 3. Thereby, it is easy for a player to grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and it is possible to perform a turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor. When the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting from the player, and the player touches the handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects a player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled and the game ball B can be driven. That is, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 by some method without touching the handle 182. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be driven. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 182 in a different way from the original, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Further, when the player presses the single button 193 while the player rotates the handle 182, the single button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single button 193, and the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the handle unit 180. The driving of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle | steering-wheel 182, while launching of the game ball B can be stopped temporarily, by releasing the press operation of the single button 193, before operating the single button 193, The game ball B can be driven again into the game area 5a with the driving strength.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 rotates most in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Thus, when the game ball B is most strongly struck into the game area 5a (so-called “right-handed”), the fourth protrusion 182d is formed on the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, by changing the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in an easy state, It is possible to reduce a player's feeling of fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of pan unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the tray unit, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the back after being disassembled for each of the main members. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion below the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 200 is an upper dish 201 that stores a game ball B to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball that is disposed below the upper dish 201 and is supplied from the upper dish 201 or the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The dish unit 200 includes an upper dish 201, a dish base unit 210 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower dish 202 attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210. And a stage operation unit 300 that is attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and can be operated by the player.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped dish unit base 211 extending in the left and right direction, an upper dish body 212 having an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front of the dish unit base 211, and a right side of the upper dish body 212. A mounting base 213 that is attached to the front of the mounting base 213, a dish unit relay board 214 that is mounted to the right of the mounting base 213, and a ball lending operation unit 220 that is mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. A unit 230 before removing the upper bowl ball attached to the lower side of the mounting base 213 and a unit 240 after removing the upper bowl ball attached to the rear of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl ball are provided.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252, a lower dish ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, a dish upper left decoration unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit body 252, and left and right respectively. The dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 are provided below the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes, as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a press operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 accommodated in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 for rotatably attaching the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decoration board 352 for decorating the effect operation ring 330 with light, the decoration board cover 353 covering the upper side of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And.

  The entire plate unit 200 bulges forward, and the rendering operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 301 faces obliquely upward and forward in the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the rendering operation unit 300 on the upper surface. In addition, a ball lending operation unit 220 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and a lower plate 202 is disposed on the left side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Top plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. The upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212) has a portion of about 1/3 bulging forward from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction. As the upper plate 201 moves from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, the front end is retracted backward, and the depth of the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 46). For example). The upper plate 201 is inclined so that the entire bottom surface including the guide passage portion 201a is lower on the right end side, and the right end side in front view of the guide passage portion 201a is under the ball lending operation unit 220.

  When the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211e. It is inclined so as to become slightly lower toward the position below the outer diameter of B. Thereby, the game ball B released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper tray ball feeding port 211e.

  The guide passage 201a is provided with a metal grounding metal 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls) the game ball. Static electricity charged on B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by the lower plate body 251 and the plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in a container shape that can store the game balls B, and includes a lower tray ball hole 202a that penetrates the bottom wall in the vertical direction so that the game balls B can be discharged. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is closed by the lower dish ball removal unit 260 so as to be opened and closed.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape in plan view extending left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The lower dish 202 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower dish ball hole 202a. The lower dish ball extraction hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is positioned in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c and below the rendering operation unit 300 in a state assembled to the dish unit 200.

  The lower dish 202 can store the game ball B released forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c in a state in which the lower dish ball hole 202a is closed, and open the lower dish ball hole 202a. Can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower dish ball hole 202a is opened, the lower dish ball hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c, and therefore forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower dish ball hole 202a by movement of the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit as seen from the back after being broken down for every main member. is there. The dish base unit 210 is mounted below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the rendering operation unit 300 are mounted on the front surface.

  The dish base unit 210 is a flat dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front part of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper dish attached to the upper front part of the dish unit base 211 and having an upper dish 201. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 that is attached to the right of the upper dish main body 212 at the upper front of the dish unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and is attached to the right of the mounting base 213 on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The dish unit relay board 214 is provided.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the attachment base 213, and a unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the attachment base 213. , A unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 211 behind the unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (shallow open at the rear). It is formed in a box shape.

  The dish unit base 211 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and penetrates back and forth below the upper dish ball supply port 211a extending in a cylindrical shape to the rear and the upper dish ball supply port 211a. A speaker opening 211b having a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower dish ball supply opening 211c penetrating forward and backward in a lower left portion with respect to the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape; A notch 211d that is cut out in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right side wall of a portion that extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear in the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c And an upper tray ball feeding port 211e that extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper tray main body 212.

  The dish unit base 211 protrudes forward to the right of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and is placed on the left side of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e. Under the dish main body, it penetrates back and forth and passes through the slider insertion port 211g through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 in the unit 240 after the upper dish ball removal is inserted, and the front right and left in the lower right corner of the front view. The handle insertion port 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion through which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front and rear in the vicinity of the right corner when viewed from the front. And a mouth 211i.

  The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end opens on the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper tray ball of the door frame base 101. The opening 101g penetrates from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

  The lower tray ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3 and has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a cylindrical rear end that opens the lower tray ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B flowing in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrical portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 is moved to the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, After the dish ball removal, the ball 240 is discharged from the lower dish ball supply port 211c into the lower dish 202 through the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 and the notch 211d.

  The upper tray ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper tray ball in a state assembled to the tray base unit 210. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b after removing the upper plate ball.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger than the center of the left and right when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. The upper plate body 212 has a front end that is retracted rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is lowest. The upper plate body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

  The upper plate body 212 is attached so that a portion where the upper portion near the right end is closed in a state where the upper plate main body 212 is assembled to the plate unit 200 lies under the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate body 212 has an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the tray unit base 211 in a state of being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the tray unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with the top opened. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion port 213a penetrating up and down in the vicinity of the left end and a through port 213b penetrating up and down in the right corner of the rear end.

  The insertion opening 213a of the mounting base 213 is used to insert the front slider 232 of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl. Further, the through-hole 213b is for inserting a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104.

[3-5c-4. Plate unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorated board 278, the dish lower left decorated board 283, and the dish lower right decorated board 288. , And for relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211 f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 or cashes a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. Or a prepaid card, and a predetermined number of game balls B are lent out into the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is displayed, This is for subtracting and returning the game balls B from which the rented cash or prepaid card has been lent.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base part 221 attached to the upper side of the attachment base 213, an upper dish ball removal button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base part 221, and an upper dish ball on the upper surface of the base part 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 disposed on the right side of the unplug button 222, a translucent disk lending operation base 223, a ball lending button 224 disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation A return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display unit (not shown) disposed below the rear of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

  The upper dish ball removal button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by a player pressing. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light-emitting state.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card with cash or balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game balls B that have been rented are deducted and returned to the cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine. In the ball lending display section, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine is displayed. The ball lending display section displays an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing the upper bowl and after removing the upper bowl]
The pre-top bowl removal unit 230 and the post-top bowl removal unit 240 in the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46. When the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper plate 201. The game balls B stored inside are discharged to the lower plate 202.

  The unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball is attached to the lower side of the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The unit 240 after the top dish ball removal is attached to the rear side of the unit 230 before the top dish ball removal on the rear surface of the dish unit base 211.

  The unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and has a cylindrical front base 231 that extends vertically, and a front part that is inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached near the front of the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g on the front surface of the tray unit base 211. The front slider 232 extends vertically and has an upper end that is in contact with a lower end of the upper dish ball removal button 222 and a lower end of the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 after the upper dish ball removal unit 240. It is in contact with the top surface.

  The post-top ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper plate ball removal slider 242 that is slidably attached to the upper plate, a spring 243 that urges the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward, a rear cover 244 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 241; It has.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and opens forward, and is connected to the ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass and the ball receiving port 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a game on the rear surface of the rear base 241 from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b. A ball extraction guide path 241c that guides the sphere B downward and then guides it to the right in the rear view.

  The ball receiving port 241a is assembled to the plate base unit 210, and moves forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state assembled to the door frame 3. Accordingly, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

  The part extending to the left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241c protrudes to the right in the rear view, and inclines so that the right end side in the rear view is lower than the part where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached. It opens on the right side when viewed from the back. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241 c is closed by the rear cover 244. The ball extraction guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the upper portion of the portion extending vertically below the ball supply guide path 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball supply unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending in the left-right direction as viewed from the back is connected to the notch 211 d of the lower dish ball supply port 211 c in the dish unit base 211. Thereby, the game ball B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c through the ball outlet guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 242 is formed in a quadrangular shape in front view, and protrudes rearward from the operation receiving portion 242a protruding forward from the upper left corner and the rear surface on the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. An operation transmission unit 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  The upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the operation receiving portion 242a protrudes forward through the slider insertion port 211g of the tray unit base 211 from the rear side, and the operation receiving portion 242a. Is in contact with the lower end of the front slider 232 of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl. Further, in the state where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242 b protrudes rearward of the rear base 241, and the operation at the ball removal member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is on the upper surface. The collar 143c is in contact.

  The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper dish ball removal slider 242, and urges the upper dish ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the spring 243 and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

  In the pre-top ball removal unit 230 and the post-top ball removal unit 240, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the moving end upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 The upper pan ball removal button 222 is positioned upward at the moving end via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to partition the two.

  Accordingly, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 separates the entrance 141a and the ball withdrawal port 141b from the upper plate 201 and sends them to the ball reception port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper dish ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper dish ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 is rotated by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. Will be. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the notch 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lowered from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the tray 202, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the lower tray 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper dish ball removal button 222 is released, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper dish is moved via the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. While the ball removal button 222 is raised, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operation rod 143c that is in contact with the operation transmission portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to the original state.

  In this manner, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launcher 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. 47 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit as seen from the back. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the main body of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the main body of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the rear. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front portion of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish 202. The dish unit base covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. 211, a tray unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the lower plate body 211, a lower dish ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate body 251 The upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the dish, and the lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit of the dish unit main body 252 that are attached below the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the dish. 285.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower dish body 251 forms the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210. The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that extends left and right and is open at the top and rear. The lower plate body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower front portion of the plate unit base 211 so that the opened rear side is closed.

  The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape whose plan view extends to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball hole 202a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in plan view. The lower plate body 251 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball hole 202a. The lower dish ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball extraction unit 260 so that it can be opened and closed.

  The lower dish body 251 is in a state where the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the dish unit body 252 in a state where the lower dish body 251 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250. The bottom plate body is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface is positioned below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball discharge hole 202a has the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball | bowl B discharge | released ahead from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Plate unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape opened rearward.

  The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward and extends downward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the upper part, and a left side from the center in the left and right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b. .

  The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear opened, and the dish upper left decorative unit 270, the dish lower left decorative unit 280, the dish upper right decorative unit 275, and the dish lower right decorative unit are provided on the respective front surfaces. 285 is attached. The left upper side bulging portion 252a has a lower right end connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Moreover, the lower end of the right upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed with a lower dish opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging part 252a and the lower front decoration part 252b. The lower dish opening 252d has such a size that the player's fingers can be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower dish opening 252d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower dish body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging part 252a.

  In addition, the dish unit main body 252 includes a front notch 252e that is notched upward from the front lower end of the portion covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251 in the lower front decoration part 252b, and a lower dish main body 251 in the bottom plate part 252c. , And a bottom notch 252f that is notched at a portion below the bottom. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is inserted into the front cutout part 252e and the bottom cutout part 252f.

  Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b and is inserted into the handle insertion port 252g through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and the lower front surface above the handle insertion port 252g. An effect operating unit formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that passes through the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are the center in the left-right direction. And an effect operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width that is about 1/3 of the horizontal width of the dish unit main body 252.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled in the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . When assembled in the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces the front from the front notch 252 e and the lower dish ball removal unit 260 has a lower dish ball removal base 261. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed and the bottom surfaces are in the same plane.

[3-5d-3. Lower dish ball removal unit]
The lower dish ball removal unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and opens and closes the lower dish ball removal hole 202 a to store the game ball B in the lower dish 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower dish 202. It is for letting you do.

  The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251 and has a flat plate-like lower dish ball removal base 261 having a through-hole penetrating up and down at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower dish ball removal unit 260. A slider 262 slidably attached back and forth on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower dish ball removal button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, a spring 264 urging the slider 262 forward, A lower dish ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by the movement of the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower dish ball removing lid 265 through the slider 262 are provided.

  The lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom notch 252f of the dish unit main body 252, and is vertically moved to a position that coincides with the lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 (lower dish body 251). A penetrating through-hole is formed. The through hole of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed in the same size as the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to a portion of the lower dish ball removal base 261 leftward from the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable back and forth. The slider 262 includes a projecting pin that projects upward in a cylindrical shape.

  The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 261 at the left end side of the left side of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable about the vertically extending axis, and the right end side is attached to the slider 262. The right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is formed with a slit extending left and right into which a protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  When the lower dish ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal base 261 closes the bottom surface notch portion 252 f of the dish unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit main body 252. In the normal dish ball removal unit 260, the slider 262 is positioned at the moving end on the front side by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right edge side of the lower dish ball removal cover 265 is located immediately above the through hole. The through-hole (lower dish ball hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower dish ball extraction hole 202 a is closed by the lower dish ball extraction cover 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front cutout portion 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

  In a normal state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 is pressed rearward and moved backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower dish ball removal button 263. It becomes. As the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower dish ball removal cover 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower dish ball removal cover 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end side is rearward. It will turn in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 located immediately above the through hole moves backward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged to the lower side of the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

  When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower dish ball removal button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward by the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 is rotated rearward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is kept open, and the game balls B in the lower dish 202 are continuously placed. It can be discharged downward.

  To close the lower dish ball removal hole 202a from this state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b is pressed backward, the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. The When the lower dish ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 returns to the state where it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 rotates and the right end side is positioned immediately above the through hole, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal cover 265. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202.

[3-5d-4. Dish upper left decorative unit and Dish upper right decorative unit]
The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the dish unit 200.

  The dish upper left decorative unit 270 is a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish upper left decorative body 271, and the dish upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271, And a dish upper left decorative board 273 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper left decorative body 271 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, so that the half cylinder is twisted. Is formed. This dish upper left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

  The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the dish upper left decorative body 271 from the rear, and a through hole is formed at a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 are full color LEDs, and the dish upper left decorative body 271 can be decorated with light emission by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction of the dish upper left decorative body 271, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish upper left decorative board 273 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper left decorative body 271 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper right decorative unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276, A dish upper right decorative board 278 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, so that the semicylinder is twisted. Is formed. This dish upper right decorative body 276 is formed milky white.

  The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper right decorative board 278. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decorative board 278 are full color LEDs, and the dish upper right decorative body 276 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the dish upper right decorative body 276, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish upper right decorative board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5d-5. Dish lower left decorative unit and Dish lower right decorative unit]
The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252 so as to extend along the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. It is done. The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the dish unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

  The dish lower left decorative unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish lower left decorative body 281, and a dish lower left reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the dish lower left decorative body 281, And a dish lower left decorative board 283 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  The dish lower left decorative body 281 extends in a curved line so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging part 252a. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper right decorative body 276, with the central axis extending slightly diagonally to the upper left and rear at the left end and the center at the right end. The shaft extends left and right, and is formed in a shape such that the half cylinder is bent. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a left end formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc is changed so that the dish lower left decorative body 281 becomes thinner toward the left end side. The dish lower left decorative body 281 is milky white.

  The dish lower left reflector 282 is inserted into the dish lower left decorative body 281 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower left decorative substrate 283. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower left decorative board 283 are full color LEDs, and the dish lower left decorative body 281 can be decorated by emitting light.

  The dish lower left decoration unit 280 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is positioned below the left end of the dish upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end of the dish center lower decoration body 312 b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. In the dish lower left decorative unit 280, the left end of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the left end appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower left decorative unit 280 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the dish lower left decorative body 281, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish lower left decorative board 283 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish lower right decoration unit 285 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending right and left and has a translucent dish right lower decoration body 286, and a dish lower right decoration body 286 attached to the rear side of the dish lower right decoration body 286. A reflector 287 and a dish lower right decorative board 288 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof are provided.

  The dish lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging part 252a on the right side. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper right decorative body 276, with the central axis extending slightly diagonally to the upper right rear at the right end, The central axis extends to the left and right, and the semi-cylinder is bent. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a spherical right end. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the dish lower right decorative body 286 becomes thinner toward the right end side. The dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in milky white.

  The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the dish lower right decorative body 286 from the rear, and a through hole is formed at a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower right decorative substrate 288. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decorative board 288 are full color LEDs, and the dish lower right decorative body 286 can be decorated by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish lower right decoration unit 285 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Continuation with the right end of. In the dish lower right decorative unit 285, the right end of the dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the right end appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower right decorative unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the dish lower right decorative body 286, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish lower right decorative board 288 are caused to emit light, the dish lower right decorative body 286 is provided. It is possible to decorate the entire front surface of the lamp substantially uniformly and to make it appear that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall structure of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as viewed from the advance / retreat direction of the effect operation buttons. FIG. 52A is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit viewed from the back. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled as the main members. The production operation unit 300 is provided at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and participates in the production by the player operating when the player participation type production is executed. It is something that can be done. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player. The effect operation unit 301 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 with respect to the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is disposed in the ring. . The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303 a having a diameter slightly larger than half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, an outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303 a, and the rotation operation unit 302. It is comprised with the annular | circular shaped outer periphery press operation part 303b arrange | positioned between inner periphery.

  The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 accommodated in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the production operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 340. An operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the unit 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation unit base 320 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. The decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330 An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The production operation unit cover unit 310 of the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape whose upper and rear sides are open.

  The production operation unit cover unit 310 includes a semispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semicircular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, A dish center upper reflector 313 mounted from behind in the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. The dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 mounted from behind in the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the dish center lower reflector 315 are attached to the dish center lower reflector 315 and light forward. The dish center lower decoration board 316 with which a plurality of LEDs which can irradiate is mounted.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the back in the center in the front-rear direction. It is attached to 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that an axis perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed at the upper edge extending in a semicircular arc shape at the front part is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a at the lowest part when assembled in the dish unit 200.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward so that the shape in plan view is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and the unit front cover 312 is formed at the upper end of the front portion of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a dish center upper decorative body 312a that extends in a semicircular arc shape so that a semicircular arc that bulges forward is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a front lower portion of the dish center upper decorative body 312a. A dish center lower decorative body 312b extending in a semicircular arc shape so that the bulged semicircular arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312 b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

  The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 divide a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) into half and extend in a semicircular shape with the split surface toward the center. It is formed in a bent shape. The dish center lower decorative body 312b extends in a semicircular arc shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b is slightly thinner than the dish center upper decorative body 312a. It is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. In the state where the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. When assembled in the dish unit 200, the left and right ends of the dish center upper decorative body 312a are continuous with the right end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, respectively. The left and right ends of 312b are connected to the right end of the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the left edge of the dish lower right decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is milky white.

  The unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3. The distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about ½ of the full width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from the rear and attached. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking backward (inside). The dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center upper decorative body 312a can be decorated by emitting light.

  The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear and attached. The dish center lower reflector 315 blocks light from the LED mounted on the dish center lower decorative board 316 from leaking backward (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center lower decoration board 316 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can be decorated by emitting light.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 while extending in a semicircular shape. When the LED on the center upper decorative board 314 and the LED on the dish lower central decorative board 316 are made to emit light, each of them can be made to emit light almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  In the state in which the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201 and the lower dish 202. In addition, the production operation unit cover unit 310 includes a plate center upper decorative body 312a that is continuous with a plate left upper decorative body 271 and a plate upper right decorative body 276, and a plate center lower decorative body 312b is a plate left lower decorative body 281 and a dish right The lower decorative body 286 is continuous. Thereby, the production operation unit 300 is made conspicuous, and the appearance is improved by the integral decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the production operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the production operation unit of the upper plate body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in a box shape having an outer shape of a substantially cubic shape, and has a main body 321 that is open at the top, and extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer periphery. Flange portion 322, a plurality (four in this case) of leg portions 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper attachment formed on the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. And a gear bearing portion 325 that opens upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed such that the main body unit 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 therein. In the main body 321, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall from the lower side, and the portion where the vibration speaker 354 is attached on the lower surface is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354. The vibration can be amplified, and the vibration can be converted into sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

  A leg portion 361 b of the button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. In addition, the main body 321 is formed with a through-hole for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321 at the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall. The main body 321 has a rotation drive unit 340 attached to the outside of the left side wall and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

  The flange portion 322 has a diameter that substantially matches the inner periphery of the upper central decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312. On the upper surface of the flange portion 322, the effect operation ring decoration board 352 and the decoration board cover 353 are attached, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of leg portions 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear attachment member to attach the operation ring transmission gear so as to be rotatable around a shaft extending in the left-right direction. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 has a flange portion. Under the 322, it is exposed to the outside.

  In the state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is positioned slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, when assembled in the rendering operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached in contact with the lower surface of the main body 321.

[3-5e-3. Production control ring]
The production operation ring 330 of the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 55A is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from above, and FIG. 55B is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from below. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation portion base 320 and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The production operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) that is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and an inner diameter that is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

  The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation part base 320, an annular rotation base 332 that is rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of 332 and are rotatably attached to the ring mounting base 331 about an axis extending vertically, and the upward movement of the rotating base 332 is attached to the ring mounting base 331. And a ring retaining member 334 that regulates.

  Further, the production operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and the lower ring outer cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and an inner peripheral side of the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and constitute a part of the rotation operation unit 302. A ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in an annular shape having translucency.

  The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 and has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is slidably mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. Boss portion 331b for projecting in a cylindrical shape upward from a plurality of (four in this case) portions and rotatably mounting bush 333, and spaced apart in the circumferential direction on the outer side of mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. A plurality of through holes 331c penetrating vertically. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

  The rotation base 332 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332 a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward as it goes toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. When assembled in the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state assembled to the rendering operation unit 300.

  The ring outer upper cover 335 is formed three-dimensionally on the outer upper surface part 335a in which the circular arc that forms the outer and upper part in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of rings are arranged in the circumferential direction. A decorative portion 335b, and an outer upper cover mounting portion 335c that extends downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Yes. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of ¼ of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attaching portion 335 c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335 a and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The ring outer lower cover 336 has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc that forms the outer and lower part of the circular shape extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward and centrally from the inside of the outer lower surface portion 336a. And a plurality of outer lower cover mounting portions 336b. An outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

  The ring inner cover 337 includes an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc that forms an inner portion and an upper portion in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder that extends downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel to the central axis. A cylindrical surface portion 337b and a plurality of inner cover attachment portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter that is the same as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, and the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface part 335a, the outer lower surface part 336a, and the inner surface part 337a constitute a part of a range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole becomes a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 57A is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 57B is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the back. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the right front side, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the left front side. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 that is attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 that is attached to the rear side of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft projects leftward. , A drive gear 343 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350 345, a transmission gear 344 and a transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably mounted in cooperation with a rotational drive base, and are covered from the left side of the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345. 346.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 348 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

  The rotation drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction and extends in the front-rear direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. Yes. The second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a larger diameter than the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b), and protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345 a meshes with the second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 and meshes with the drive side gear portion 350 b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval apart in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Thereby, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them detects the detection piece 345b first. It is like that. Thereby, the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

  When the rotary drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Mesh with. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 as a whole in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotation drive unit 340 arbitrarily drives the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 through the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of. In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 causes the rotation operation unit 302 to reciprocate and vibrate by causing the operation ring drive motor 342 to rotate the drive gear 343 forward and backward within a predetermined rotation angle range. it can.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. Therefore, the operation ring drive is performed in the same direction as the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the player's rotation operation can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the player's rotation operation. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling corresponding to the content of the player participation type effect or a click feeling.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits the rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 340. The bearing portion 325 is rotatably attached.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is a bevel gear-shaped ring side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 340, and the rotation detection unit 340 detects the transmission by rotating integrally with the ring side gear portion 350a. A spur gear-like drive side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the drive-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles with the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350 a is constricted in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation shaft extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation shaft of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 340. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above, and the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320, so that the operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320. It is done.

  When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a is engaged with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b is engaged. The rotation detection unit 340 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and can rotate the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Stage control ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation unit base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annulus is divided into front and rear, and includes a front decorative substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a decorative substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. The decorative board cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form, similar to the production operation ring decorative board 352, and covers the front decorative board 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from the upper side and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

  The stage operation ring decoration board 352 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof, thereby allowing the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring attachment base 331 to pass through the through-hole 331c. The cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 can be decorated with light emission from the inside. Accordingly, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration such that the LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sound such as voice and music. It is.

  The vibration speaker 354 can output sound such as voice or music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. The vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire presentation operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present more various effects to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front and above, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as seen from the front and bottom. 62A is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and FIG. 62B is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The press operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 includes a columnar center press operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer periphery press operation unit 303b formed to cover the outer periphery of the center press operation unit 303a. ing.

  The production operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery, and is arranged on the object with the button unit base 361 attached in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a columnar shape, and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 and a pair of guide shafts 362 are attached between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. The disc-shaped lifting base 364 and the pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted respectively. It includes a pair of lift springs 365, the a and elevating base 364 is being biased upward.

  In addition, the production operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotating shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 mounted so as to protrude upward, the spur gear-shaped lifting / lowering driving gear 368 mounted on the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting / lowering driving motor 367, and the lifting / lowering driving gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-like driven gear 369 that is rotatably attached to the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and a lift cam drive gear member that is rotated by the driven gear 369 and is rotatably attached with the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough. 370, elevating cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are coupled and the central shaft 66 is inserted so as to be rotatable and is rotated so as to cover the elevating cam member 371 for elevating the elevating base 364, the elevating drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above. A disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Further, the production operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted on the upper side of the elevating base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. A central button main body 373, a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button main body 373 and the lifting base 364 and biasing the central button main body 373 upward, and substantially the same as the central button main body 373 A central button cover 375 is formed on the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. And a central button decoration board 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button body 373 and the central button cover 375 constitute a central pressing operation portion 303a.

  In addition, the production operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the central button body 373 on the upper surface of the lifting base 364 and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration board 377 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. An outer peripheral board cover 378 that is attached to the lifting base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration board 377 and cover the outer periphery of the central button main body 373, and a portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 that covers the outer periphery of the central button main body 373. A cylindrical outer periphery decorative lens 379 that is arranged on the outer periphery side above the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377 and has a three-dimensional decoration, and the outer periphery and the upper surface of the outer periphery decoration lens 379 are moved up and down. A transparent outer peripheral button attached to the base 364 and having a central button cover 375 facing upward at the center. Is provided with a bar 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral board cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute an outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b.

  The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and the button operation base unit 361 is attached to the button unit base 361 and the lift cam drive gear member 370. And a lift detection sensor 382 that detects the lift of the lift base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape and a plurality of legs 361b projecting downward from the base body 361a. The base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 has an outer diameter that is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320. The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lift cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to the upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and a lift detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is installed. In the button unit base 361, the lower end of the leg 361 b is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a distance that is half the diameter of the base body 361a. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal bars. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The upper base 363 has an outer diameter that is about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and the lower ends are in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 and the upper ends are in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

  The lifting base 364 has an outer diameter that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b penetrating vertically with a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass through at the center. And a pair of guide pins 364d projecting so as to face each other into the center hole 364b in the vicinity of the lower end of the standing wall 364c. Yes. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are attached to be rotatable around the axis.

  The elevating base 364 is guided to be movable up and down by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 through the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward by the upper end of the standing wall 364c coming into contact with the upper base 363, and has a space in which the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 can move between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364. Forming. The elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

  The raising / lowering cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-like gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the raising / lowering cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. And a lift detection piece 370c that is notched at two locations facing each other and is notched and is detected by the lift detection sensor 382. The raising / lowering cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably mounted by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the columnar outer peripheral surface and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364.

  The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the shaft center in the vicinity of the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward in parallel with the axis from the end, and a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

  The elevating cam member 371 includes a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

  The raising / lowering cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the raising / lowering cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed as follows. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the elevating base 364 can be moved up and down by guiding the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364 by the cam portion 371a.

  The central button body 373 includes a cylindrical tube portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tube portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts passing through the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which 362 is slidably inserted, a central port 373d penetrating with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the standing wall 364c of the elevating base 364 at the center of the bottom 373b, and downward from the bottom 373b A pressing detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 are provided.

  The central button body 373 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a cylindrical portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button body 373 is formed such that a bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and an upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a projects upward from the upper base 363. The central port 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends short downward, and the lower end of the central port 373d abuts on the upper surface of the lifting base 364, thereby restricting the downward movement of the central button body 373. The upper end of the standing wall portion 364 c of the elevating base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central port 373 d of the central button body 373.

  The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed such that their lower ends pass through the lifting base 364 and extend downward, and screws with washers inserted into the lower ends are attached. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, so that the upward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted.

  The pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is moved up and down when the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 (the lower end of the central port 373d) abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate through 364 and protrude downward. The central button body 373 is formed opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a lower urging force than the elevating spring 365.

  The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having a diameter substantially the same as the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. In the central button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375 b is attached to the upper end of the cylinder portion 373 a in the central button main body 373.

  In the central button decoration board 376, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can decorate the central button cover 375 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 are full-color LEDs. The outer periphery button decoration board 377 can make the outer periphery decoration lens 379 and the outer periphery button cover 380 emit light decoration by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 and is attached to the elevating base 364. The outer peripheral board cover 378 extends in a cylindrical shape upward from the inner periphery of the base board portion 378a. A cylindrical portion 378b covering the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed to be transparent.

  In the outer periphery decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction as it goes upward are arranged in a row at a constant interval in the circumferential direction. The outer periphery decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a in the outer periphery substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical cylindrical portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 380a toward the center. As for the outer periphery button cover 380, the lower end of the cylindrical part 380a is attached to the raising / lowering base 364. As shown in FIG. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same size as the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  When the production operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in a state where the lift base 364 is biased upward by a pair of lift springs 365. It is inserted from below into the engaging portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. In this state, the lift base 364 is in the lowered position where it has moved downward, and the pair of lift springs 365 is compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

  Accordingly, when assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

  In this state (the state shown in FIG. 62A), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button body 373 is moved. The pressure detection piece 373e is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. In a state in which the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the center button cover 375 is substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65C).

  In this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  When the lift drive gear 368 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367 in the lowered position, the lift cam is driven via the driven gear 369 engaged with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is moved from the locking portion 371c to the first position. The cam 371b rolls to the left portion of the locking portion 371c, and the lifting base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the two cams 371d extend vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 moves the guide pin 364d along the second cam 371d, and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the lifting base 364 is raised to a raised position.

  In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the raised position, the upper end of the upright wall portion 364c of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the lifting base 364 is restricted. In the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the lowering position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. In addition, the entire pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  When assembled in the production operation unit 300 and moved to the raised position, the center button cover 375 and the outer button cover 380 are in a state of projecting larger than the upper surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65B, etc.). reference).

  When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 are attached to the button spring 374. The center button body 373 comes into contact with the lifting base 364 by moving downward against the force. In a state where the central button body 373 is in contact with the lifting base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protrudes downward from the lifting base 364, but the lifting base 364 is the button unit base 361. Therefore, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374, After the central button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the lifting base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, and the lower end of the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

  As described above, when the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361 in a state where the central button main body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the pressing of the center button cover 375 (the center pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward with a force higher than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 is moved up and down via the outer peripheral button cover 380. The lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364. However, since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) protrudes upward by the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button body The pressure detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the lift base 364, and the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the raising / lowering cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise by the operation button raising / lowering drive motor 367. 62B, the third cam 371e that is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the lift cam member 371, the downward movement of the lift base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. Roll along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 attached in the board box 391.

  The board box 391 has a motor cover part 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when the board box 391 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a dish center upper decoration board 314, a dish center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a production operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367, the central button decorative board 376, the outer peripheral button decorative board 377, the press detection sensor 381, the lift detection sensor 382, and the tray unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 are relayed. Yes.

[3-5e-10. Effect of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative board in a plan view of the effect operation unit as seen from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65 (a) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing of the pressing operation part. It is a front view of a dish unit when an operation part is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 includes a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 includes a columnar central pressing operation unit 303 a located at the center of the rotation operating unit 302, and an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit disposed between the central pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operating unit 302. 303b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation portion 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  The production operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (production operation ring 330) is lowered. Accordingly, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). .

  In the normal operation state, the production operation unit 300 has a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 63 and the like).

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the left side by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates in the clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and can rotate and reciprocate the rotation operation unit 302 by repeating normal rotation and reverse rotation within a range of a predetermined rotation angle. Unlike the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350 and rotated. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the interval between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 that are separated in the circumferential direction is smaller than the interval between the plurality of detection pieces 345b that are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The interval is not an integer multiple. Thereby, the 1st rotation detection sensor 347 and the 2nd rotation detection sensor 348 are constituted so that detection piece 345b may not be detected at the same timing.

  In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. To do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) according to the order in which the detection pieces 345b are detected. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  Thus, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation unit 302 is driven to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be lightly assisted. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be made heavy or a click feeling can be given.

  The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state in which the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, and thus is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. .

  Thereby, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated to rotate in a manner that is easy for the player to perform. Sexuality is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. In addition, since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like a car handle.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decoration board 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape below the effect operation ring 330. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light. In addition, since the plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape along the rotation operation unit 302 in the production operation ring decorative substrate 352, the plurality of LEDs arranged in sequence are sequentially arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to decorate only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating. Thereby, it is possible to make the player have an illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating operation unit 302 that rotates.

  As shown in FIG. 65A, the production operation unit 300 has a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 with an upper surface higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 in a normal state. It is in a state of a lowered position slightly protruding upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the center pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the center pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380). The pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

  In this normal (downward position) state, even if the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380) does not move downward, and pressure detection is performed. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

  When the lifting cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 in a normal state, the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 is detached from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365, the pressing operation portion 303 together with the elevating base 364 vigorously protrudes upward to be in the raised position (see FIG. 65 (b)). In this raised position state, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is positioned higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. In other words, the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upwardly from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

  When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the central pressing operation unit 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303 a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation portion 303 a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b are the rotation operating portion 302. The height is substantially the same as the top surface (see FIG. 65C). In this state, the press detection sensor 381 detects the press.

  Further, when the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward in a state where the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a remains protruding above the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b. The outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b and the center pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is substantially in the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302 (see FIG. 65 (a)). . In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect pressure.

  As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the lower moving end regardless of the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Accordingly, it is possible to prompt the player to firmly press the center pressing operation portion 303a, and thus attention can be drawn to the operation of the effect operation portion 301 in the player participation type effect. , The player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

  Even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotation operation becomes easier with the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the rotation operation is difficult due to the pressing operation unit 303 being in the way. Therefore, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front side of the door frame left side base 401 and the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. A door frame left side decorative substrate 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402; A door frame left side decoration body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

  The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and opens forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and includes a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative board 402 can light up and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The left side reflector 403 has a through-hole 403a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left-side decorative board 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in milky white having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically. Thereby, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape opened rearward.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 271 of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top unit 450 door frame top decorative body 453. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 in the state assembled to the door frame 3 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and it looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the back. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right front portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and penetrates in the left-right direction. And a plurality of side window decorations 410b capable of emitting light disposed in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in the game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or is playing with the right pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 difficult to see, and to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window decoration parts 410b attached to the front surface and extending in a cylindrical shape forward and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window decoration member 412 on the front surface A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the part corresponding to the interior decoration part 410b, and the side window interior decoration part decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411, and the plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 And an internal reflector 414 inserted into the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is disposed on the front side of the front end of the side window decorative member 412 and is attached to the right side reflector 415 extending vertically and the door frame right side base 411. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surfaces of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and that has a through-hole 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and constitutes the side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411, and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical direction and the front / rear direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. The door frame is formed with a through-hole 417a that extends in a shape and penetrates in the left-right direction and forms the side window 410a. The side panel and 417, and a.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened rearward. The side window decorative member 412 has a flat connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality (three here) of side window decorative portions 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window decorative member 410b of the side window decorative member 412 is formed in a truncated cone shape having a slightly smaller outer diameter on the front end side than the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window decorative member 412, the front end of the side window decorative portion 410 b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window decorative member 412 is attached to the upper portion of the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 from the lower position with respect to the vertical center. The side window decorative member 412 is formed in a milky white color having translucency.

  The side window interior decoration part decoration board 413 is attached to a portion of the front side of the door frame right side base 411 that is behind the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412. The plurality of LEDs provided on the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. In the side window decoration part decoration board 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape in the vertical and horizontal directions around the axis of the side window decoration part 410b in the rear part of each of the side window decoration parts 410b. Has been.

  The internal reflector 414 is formed in an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 partitions the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left, and right.

  The right side reflector 415 is vertically extended at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wave shape that moves forward and then moves backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. Has been. The right side reflector 415 penetrates back and forth, and a plurality of through holes 415a are formed through which the LEDs on the door frame right side decorative board 418 face forward.

  The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends up and down and front and rear, the rear side extends vertically linearly, and the front side extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through-hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction and formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the door frame and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 The rear side of the right side decorative board 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be covered. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side inner panel 417 is flat and extends vertically and front and rear. The rear side extends vertically linearly, and the front side extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through-hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction and formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The rear side of the right side decorative board 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be covered. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and includes a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. In the door frame right side decorative board 418, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face are full color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative board 418 can light up and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in milky white having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc that bulges forward extends in a wave shape up and down along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape opened rearward.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the dish upper right decorative body 276 of the dish upper right decorative unit 275 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

  The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a portion of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a columnar fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) that extends forward in a wave shape so that a quarter portion from the top projects forward, and is formed in a partition shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is provided with a cylindrical (columnar) side window decorative portion 410b extending in the front-rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LED of the side window decorative portion decorative substrate 413 to emit light. Thus, the side window decoration part 410b can be decorated with light emission. Then, by decorating the side window decoration part 410b with light emission, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window decoration part decoration board 413 that emits and decorates the plurality of side window decoration parts 410b are turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be viewed from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the three side window decoration portions 410b in 410a. Therefore, even if a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game does not move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily used. It can be found in the above, and a sense of expectation for a game in the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b can block the line of sight of the player located nearby, It is possible to make it difficult for a player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for other players to feel like being seen by other players, so that other players can play games without hesitation. .

  Further, when the three side window decoration portions 410b are caused to emit light by the LED of the side window decoration portion decoration board 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let At this time, since the three side window decorative portions 410b are formed in a columnar shape, light is emitted in a band shape and a radial shape. It can be made difficult to see, and it can be made difficult to look into the game area 5a from other players such as the neighbors. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult to look inside the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, so that other players are interested in being noticed. It is possible to prevent feelings of discomfort from being unable to devote themselves to the game and to feel uncomfortable due to mistakes being induced, making the game more enjoyable by dedicating the player to the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72A is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, FIG. 72B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front top, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front bottom. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 attached to the upper side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451, and the upper front surface. The top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. A door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the door frame.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 that is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; A door frame top right decorative board 457 that is attached to the right of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face. I have.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452; The top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 And a top right reflector 460 attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached to the central speaker box 461 downward, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 respectively attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. A top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and a door frame top Door frame top relay board mounted near the upper right end of the base 451 67, includes a door frame top top plate 468 is attached to the top on the cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451, a.

  The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 451a that extends to the left and right at the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and from both the left and right ends of the front surface of the main body portion 451a. A forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward so that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so as to move rearward as the front ends go downward, and are formed in a box shape opened rearward. The front protrusion 451b on the right side when viewed from the front is also open upward.

  The top upper cover 452 is formed in substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 in a front view. The top upper cover 452 is formed in a shape that covers the outer sides of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and connects the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 protrudes most forward in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the left-right direction center toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top upper cover 452 has an opening 452a that is largely cut from the rear end toward the front on the upper surface. The opening 452a is closed by a door frame top top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a shape in which the semicircular arc that bulges forward decreases in curvature from the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452. Is formed. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tubular shape opened rearward. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and are formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. As shown in FIG. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is vertically spaced between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a that are spaced apart in the left-right direction and connect the front and rear ends and extend upward in a flat plate shape. A pair of central speaker ports 454b facing the top center speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker ports 454c penetrating vertically on the outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top center decorative board 455 is formed in a strip shape extending in the left-right direction. In the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative board 455 can light-decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can light-decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a band plate shape extending left and right. In the door frame top right decorative board 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can light-decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, and are provided on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, respectively. A through-hole penetrating back and forth is formed at a position corresponding to each mounted LED.

  The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full range speaker and outputs sound such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having countless through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay substrate 467 includes a door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a door frame top right decorative substrate 457, a top central speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and the door frame base unit 100. This relays the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

  The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452, the front end is locked to the top upper cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are respectively continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, thereby forming an integral decoration. Yes. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice and music to the player side through the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a front view of a door frame shown together with each decorative board. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending in the vertical direction and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a dish upper left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a of the rendering operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire periphery.

  Dish left upper decorative body 271, dish upper right decorative body 276, dish center upper decorative body 312 a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101 a Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration such that the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

  In the door frame 3, a dish upper left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, and the door frame top central decoration. Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light emission, It is possible to show the player the light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  In the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, an annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is coaxially disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit 303 b and a columnar central pressing operation unit 303 a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is provided below the rotation operation unit 302. A doughnut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tube-shaped) two large dish central upper decorative body 312a and dish central lower decorative body 312b are attached two apart vertically and The door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side unit 41 of the door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the dish lower central decorative body 312b. Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  As a result, in the dish unit 200, three donut-shaped members are lined up and down in the rotation operation section 302, the two dish center upper decoration bodies 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous.

  Further, the upper left decorative body 271, the upper right decorative body 276 of the dish, the lower left decorative body 281, the lower right decorative body 286 of the dish, and the lower central decorative body 312 b of the dish are arranged in half. The thickness of the tube-like tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Thereby, in the production operation unit 300, since it becomes larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 that can be operated by the player arranged on the upper side, The pressing operation unit 303 can be shown large, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward as it goes upward. Since it is inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 faces the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the player rotates from the player. The entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be shown larger. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotating, so that when the player participation type effect is executed, the player rotates immediately. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player's participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the plate center upper decoration body 312 a and the plate center lower decoration body 312 b are made larger than those of the rotation operation unit 302. In the dish unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201, and Since the decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation section 302, the rotation operation section 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are made conspicuous. At the same time, it is possible to improve the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 by the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, attract the player's interest strongly, and appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. 81 is an exploded perspective view in which the main body frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view in which the main body frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed Mounted as possible.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view. A main body frame upper hinge member 510, which is rotatably attached to the outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably mounted to the door frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3, and the main body frame. A body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end of the base unit 500 on the left side when viewed from the front and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. A solid body 520.

  The main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launcher 540 for driving a ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame base unit 5 0 viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member for guiding a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 are provided.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward in the shape of a box extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, A second rail cover 555 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to be separated from the one rail cover 554 to the left in a front view, and between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end, and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553; It is equipped with a.

  The payout unit 560 is based on instructions from the payout control board 633 for the ball guide unit 570 for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570. The payout device 580 for paying out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full ball path unit 600 on the door frame 3 side Alternatively, a lower full sphere path unit 610 for guiding to the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame flanges 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and protrude rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame collars 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the door frame collar 652 or the outer frame collar 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame collar 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that is energized and urges the outer frame collar 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame collar 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted into the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and the main body frame base 501 is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and guides the connection cable 503. A connecting cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 in a detachable manner. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangle whose front view extends vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion slot 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and a lower side of the game board insertion slot 501b and the game board 5 is placed. A placement unit 501c and a game board restricting part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 501c and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rear are provided.

  Moreover, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward at the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and a launching device mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launching device 540, and a launching device mounting Cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates forward and backward on the right side of the front view of the portion 501e and through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c in front view. A circular speaker opening 501g facing the front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in 620, and a main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward and below the speaker opening 501g. The cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted and the cable mounting recess 501h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape rearward from the right side of the game board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a, and a locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and a back cover 640 is provided at the rear end. It is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends of the rear end of the base body 501a and the left end in front view on the rear surface of the base body 501a, and is used to attach the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. The upper hinge attaching part 501k and the lower hinge attaching part 501l are provided.

  A game board lock member 505 is attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board mounting part 501c on the front side and to the right of the speaker opening 501g so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The game board lock member 505 allows the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b to be detachable by enabling the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion slot 501b to be restricted.

  The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right side of the speaker opening 501g to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed in a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and can be attached to the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat plate-like guide main body 502a extending to the left and right, and protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a and extends to the right from the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and through the front and rear at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a and left and right A plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a direction.

  The connecting cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. Is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached so that the attachment shaft 502c can rotate around an axis extending vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinged) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. Connected to the relay board 105.

  Then, the effect by the connection cable guide member 502 is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be able to rotate the hinge. ) Is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in parallel with the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is connected to the interface board 635 on the side connected to the connection cable guide member. The left and right directions of the plurality of through-holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the rear side of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l and passes through the cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 to open the door frame relay board cover. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is disposed on the left side of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

  In this state, if the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated so as to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side attached to the door frame 3 in the connection cable 503, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the right end mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 84B).

  The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases. However, the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side moves rearward about the attachment shaft 502c. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an open angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the door frame 3 from moving in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503. It is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring.

  Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back by 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can attach a heel. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 that is folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 due to folding is applied. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to its folding, and to connect the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502). The door frame 3 can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is positioned closer to the center axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 holds the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 with the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame 3. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 can be pulled toward the central axis (axial core) side.

  In the present embodiment, the door passes more than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103 around the center axis (axial axis) of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 126 on the door frame through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502. The angle at which the tangent line that touches the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axial center) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower door hinge pin 126 intersects the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. The configuration is as follows. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) when the door frame 3 is opened and closed can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is closed when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on main body frame]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame hinge assembly 120 is rotatably mounted.

  The main body frame upper hinge member 510 has an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L shape, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511. And a hinge pin 512 on the body frame that is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extending portion, and has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion that is bent downward and extends vertically in the upper hinge main body 511. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame hinge member 51 in the outer frame hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 from below.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to the body frame 4 as a door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

  The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is provided with a portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 extending horizontally from a portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 extending horizontally and spaced downward. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge main body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 vertically penetrates in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c in the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. A hinge hole 521a is provided. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 vertically penetrates near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restriction piece 522b for extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. It is equipped with. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. It is done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to the main body frame 4, the door frame 3. Can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view, with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion mold material.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and downward on the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position restricting members 531 are attached so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( The unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5) is prevented.

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the ball launcher as seen from behind. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the five game areas 5a. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front face of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 540 is attached to the flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 541 when viewed from the front. A firing solenoid 542 composed of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a hitting ball 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and from the vicinity of the tip of the hitting ball 543 A launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

  In the ball launcher 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in a state where the ball is in the state, the launch solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting ball 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hit ball 543 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  If the game ball B that has been hit does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B or the like, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) Is dropped to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150 and is discharged to the lower plate 202 through the foul cover unit 150.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 (a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 86 (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction substantially the same width as the top plate portion. Left side plate portion 551b, right side plate portion 551c having a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as top plate portion 551a and extending downward from the right side of top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of top plate portion 551a The back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the right side plate portion 551c to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and extending from the position closer to the front side to the right side from the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the vicinity of the lower end with a substantially constant width. Back plate left portion 551e, inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of left plate portion 551b, and from the front of the lower side of left plate portion 551b to the right Extends to approximately the same position as the right side of the back plate left part 551e It includes a bottom plate portion 551g and a connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and inward of the L shape.

  The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a width substantially the same as the width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. The payout base 551 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 at the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c.

  The payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and extends upward and downward. A unit 560 is attached. Further, the payout base 551 protrudes to the right at the upper part of the right side surface in front view of the inner plate portion 551f, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and has a ball tank 552 that is open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a portion that extends to the left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape opened upward.

  Also, the payout base unit 550 has a first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the left and right directions at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and is spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view and on the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stopper member 557 attached near the left end in front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. Is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the right side in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate portion 551a. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

  The tank rail 553 is attached to the vicinity of the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The tank rail 553 has a shape in plan view that is slanted to the left and rear from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one depth from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to become the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is opened downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570 a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 has an upper end of a portion extending straight to the left so that the height on the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B so that it is more steep with respect to the horizontal than the bottom surface. It is inclined so that the left end side is lowered at a certain angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, the tank rail 553 has a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the upper end of a portion extending straight to the left.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper ends of the portions of the tank rail 553 that extend straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth in the front-rear direction of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. Is.

  The ball straightening member 556 is located at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553 with respect to an axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball straightening member 556 includes a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). By delaying the flow of the game ball B on the upper side of the game ball B circulating in two upper and lower stages by the rectifying piece 556a and rectifying the flow so that it flows in a single stage on the downstream side, the flow in the tank rail 553 The ball is not clogged even if the height is lowered.

  The ball stop member 557 is attached to be slidable in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553. By sliding leftward, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

  Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in front view on the upper surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion slot 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. 87A is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87B is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the rear. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 and is guided by the ball guiding unit 570. In accordance with an instruction from the payout control board 633, a payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit And a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600, and the ball full path 580b is operated by the ball pull lever 593. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B released from the ball removal passage 580b separately. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction path 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back base left portion 551e of the payout base unit 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. Is to do.

  The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a serpentine shape through which the game ball B can flow and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward and a front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. The front guide passage front cover 572, the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B flowing in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of (see FIG. 92).

  The spherical guide unit 570 is formed such that the shape of the front view of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center of the guide unit base 571 in the height direction, and then bends to the right to guide the guide unit base 571. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning back and forth between the widths in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guidance unit base 571.

  The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B flows. Can be guided in a single row.

  In the vicinity of the upper part of the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached to an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outside of the front view of the guide passage 570a, and a part of the lower end projects into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and is not retracted and protrudes from the inside of the guide passage 570a when the game ball B comes into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a. It becomes.

  When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 moves backward from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not projecting, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Accordingly, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

  In the state where the ball guide unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guide passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guide passage 570 a is the discharge passage of the discharge device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are placed in the guiding passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout unit of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. 90A is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90B is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in FIG. It is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left side of the back plate 551e in the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout device 580 has a payout device main body 581 having a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can flow and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. A flat-type dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and is opened rearward. ing.

  The payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and has a payout motor 584 whose rotation shaft projects between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and a rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur gear-like drive gear 585 attached, and a spur gear-like first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device front lid 583. The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 and the second transmission gear 587 are meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably mounted by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. A spur gear-like payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a and between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. A payout gear member 588 that is rotatably attached, and a plurality of blade pieces 589a that integrally rotate with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 and project into the payout passage 580a. And a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the payout device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

  Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear cover 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, the payout device main body 581 and the back of the payout device. The ball removal movable piece 592 attached to the lid 582 so as to open and close the ball removal passage 580b at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. And a ball ejecting lever 593 that is slidable in the vertical direction by a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear lid 582.

  The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose plan view extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opened upward at a position leftward from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from about 1/3 of the total height so as to move gradually to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about ３ of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically so as to go to the center (rotary axis) of the delivery vane 589. Then, on the upper side of the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer periphery of the payout blade 589 Is extended downward in a concentric circular arc shape with the discharge vane 589, and vertically extends to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the discharge vane 589.

  In the payout passage 580a, a payout detection sensor 591 is disposed below the payout blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

  The ball extraction passage 580b is branched at a portion that extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the payout passage 580a and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side when viewed from the back. It opens downward near the left end.

  The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b are branched. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to protrude rearward and frontward from each other so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball extraction passage 580b. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a branch from the ball extraction passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 from above. It is formed at the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to constitute the side wall of the ball extraction passage 580b. The ball extraction movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  The payout motor 584 is attached to the right in the rear view of the part where the payout passage 580a in the payout device main body 581 extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are disposed in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 includes three plate-like detection pieces 588b extending outward at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends in the payout passage 580a from the upper side toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in the rear view so that the space between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage B is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. And protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout vane 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b that is recessed with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. Thereby, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a and rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear. Thereby, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

  The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are attached coaxially by a payout device rear lid 582 and a payout device front lid 583 so as to be integrally rotatable. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

  The upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is bent in a square shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than a gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to project into the ball extraction passage 580b or retreat out of the ball extraction passage 580b through the gap between the two.

  The ball release lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in the rear left view near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 passes through the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes backward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the lower end, the lower portion can come into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Further, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 90).

  When the ball removal lever 593 is raised to turn the ball removal movable piece 592 so that the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated, the game ball B that has been in a state of being connected in a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball removal movable piece 592 becomes the ball removal movable piece 592. Will flow down to the ball passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball extraction passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows down straight to the ball discharge passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down as soon as possible.

  In this way, in a state where the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the ball, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball extraction passage 580b, the ball extraction movable piece 592 is moved to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b by the abutment force. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, so that a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to damage the ball removal movable piece 592, so that more game balls B can be discharged earlier to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580 b. An increase in time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1 can be suppressed, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Further, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which are closer than the game ball B, and the ball removal passage 580b. Since the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 is moved between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even when the game ball B moves together with the ball removal movable piece 592 to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a when moving outward through the gap, the distance from the game ball B is larger. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outwardly between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movable movable piece 592 is moved by an inertial force, a strong force is not applied to the movable ball movable piece 592, and the movable ball movable piece 592 can be made difficult to be damaged, and the body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated downstream of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached to the lower side of the rear surface of the back base left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 below the payout device 580 from the rear. The upper full sphere path unit 600 is used to guide the game ball B released downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full sphere path unit 610. The upper full sphere path unit 600 is formed in a quadrilateral shape whose front view extends vertically.

  The upper full sphere path unit 600 is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is open on the rear side, and a box-like shape that is attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and is open on the front side. The upper full tank cover 602 and a discharge device pressing member 603 that is rotatably mounted near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and can press the discharge device 580 upward. The upper full base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side when viewed from the front, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends upward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about 2/3 of the total height. The ball receiving passage 600a and the upper paying ball receiving passage 600a communicate with each other, extend about 3/4 of the full width to the right in front view, and extend downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal payout passage 600c that extends downward from the left side of the front view from the left-right center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b and opens downward on the lower surface, and an upper upper portion that is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. An upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side in front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward on the lower surface, and in the vicinity of the right end in front view on the upper surface. And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 92).

  The upper full tank path unit 600 has an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full tank payout path 600d, and an upper full ball discharge path 600e that are open in a line from the left side when viewed from the front. In the state where the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. Thereby, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank discharge passage 600d. Is released downward from any of the above. The game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full tank path unit 610 is mounted on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower part of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the board unit 620 side. The lower full sphere path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal full passage 610a, a lower full tank discharge path 610b, and a lower full ball discharge path 610c. The lower full tank base extends in the front-rear direction and is opened upward. 611, a lower full cover 612 that is attached to the upper side of the lower full base 611, a lower normal discharge passage 610a that is attached to the front end of the lower full base 611 so as to be rotatable around a front and rear axis. A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharge passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b are attached. A closing spring 614.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout path 610a, a lower full tank payout path 610b, and a lower full ball discharge path 610c arranged in order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward from the rear end. In the state, the respective upstream ends are open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610 a and the lower full tank payout passage 610 b extend forward in a state where they are aligned side by side, and are opened forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full tank discharge passage 610b extends forward in a slightly lower state than the lower normal discharge passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b as viewed from the front, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

  The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is urged clockwise by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The opening is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 includes an operation protrusion 613a protruding forward. The operating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the turning center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and the front end surface approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined to protrude forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the payout unit 560, and a lower normal payout path 610a, a lower full tank payout path 610b, and a lower ball discharge path 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear part, respectively, It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball discharge passage 600e of the sphere path unit 600. Thereby, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d is lower lower full payout passage 610b. And the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

  In addition, the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, and the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full discharge passage 610 b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. In addition, the downstream end of the lower ball extraction passage 610c is opened to face the ball extraction guide portion 627 that opens to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

  In a normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 to be in contact with the door opening / closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the respective downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b are opened, and communicated with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank reception port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613 a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613. Is rotated clockwise by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the respective downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled in the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is positioned at the lower end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full ball path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is open.

  In the ball tank 552 opened upward, from the game hall island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, a predetermined number of balls are detected based on the detection of the ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied / stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a line by the tank rail 553. In a state in which the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream from the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stays upstream from the payout blade 589. It becomes.

  Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball-cut detecting sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thereby, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in at least the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a. It is discharged downstream of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (the ball housing portion 589b) is detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and then sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

  In a normal state, the game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 is disposed directly below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the dish unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game ball B paid out from 580 becomes accumulated in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower side of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It also stays in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full sphere path unit 600 in communication. Then, when the game ball B is paid out while the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B, the upper normal payout passage 600c enters the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B starts to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

  Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank pass unit 610, and is filled with a full tank ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received. Thereafter, the game ball B received by the full ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. Thereby, when the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game balls B, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  If the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the lower plate 202 is filled with the game balls B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 is moved and detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 enters a non-detection state.

  When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide to the raised end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back, and the ball removal movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It will be in the state pushed out to the outside of ball extraction passage 580b. Thus, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is released downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

  At this time, since the game ball B flowing down comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball removal movable piece 592 at the part of the ball removal movable piece 592, the ball removal movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

  The game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball passage unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball passage unit 610. And then discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball extraction passage 610c to the ball extraction guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, and then through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside (game hall). To the island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 93A is a perspective view of the main body frame substrate unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the substrate unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the lower back. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The substrate unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover from behind.

  The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 attached below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and a front side in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. A main body frame speaker 622 and a container-like speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front, and includes a circular speaker mounting portion 621a configured by a plurality of slits extending vertically, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The front concave portion 621b that is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and protrudes downward from the lower surface of the spatial front concave portion 621b and extends in the left-right direction toward obliquely downward and rearward A connecting portion 621c that is open.

  A body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass sounds.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is opened forward, and the rear portion of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes the most backward, and as it goes to the right in the front view, it goes backward in a staircase shape. The protrusion is formed so as to be small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the right side of the front center of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connection portion 621c.

  The speaker unit 620 a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses sound output from the main body speaker 622 with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 has a space front recess 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621, so that the speaker box 623 protrudes rearward as it goes to the right. Even if it is formed in a staircase shape so as to reduce the amount, a space on the right side of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently wide.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620 a is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43 a so that the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622. And the curtain plate interior space 40a of the outer frame 2 communicate with each other. Accordingly, a wide space enclosure 624 can be formed on the rear side of the body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43. Can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

  Specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right in front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the communication is made to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side through the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 is not particularly attenuated in the sound output backward from the main body frame speaker 622 without attenuating the bass range. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted low sound range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain plate front member 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state in which the phase is reversed. The sound radiated from the 200 speaker openings 211b resonates so as to be amplified, so that a large sound with a heavy bass sound can be output even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small.

  That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass-reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass. Thereby, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200, and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 By this, the player can listen to a sound having a rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the speaker cover 621 at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front concave portion 621b, and the speaker box 623. In addition, a through cylinder 623a is formed which communicates with the through hole 621d and extends in a cylindrical shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction. In the state assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a communicate with each other and are independent of the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

  The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 that is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a rear power supply unit that is attached to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

  The base unit 620b is formed by cooperation of the front base 625 and the rear base 626. The base unit 620b receives the game ball B released from the lower ball passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and receives a front view. A ball extraction guiding portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that opens upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game ball B that has passed through the ball removal guiding portion 627 and the discharge ball receiving portion 628 downward.

  The ball extraction guiding portion 627 has an upstream end opened leftward at an upper portion of the left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end opened to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. The ball extraction guide portion 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower full ball path unit 610 so that the upstream end opening coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the assembled state of the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving unit 628.

  The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is opened upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous so that the left end in front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

  The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball extraction guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then Since it discharges | emits below from the discharge port 629, it can make it easy to ensure the space of the left side rather than the center of the left-right direction in front view. Thereby, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer sound than the conventional pachinko machine.

  The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631.

  The payout control unit 620d includes a box-like payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (see FIG. 97). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5 or the like. Thus, the instructed number of game balls B are to be paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, an unauthorized modification to the payout control board 633 can be detected, and the deterrent against fraud is increased.

  The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. And an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

  The substrate base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most backward, which is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (the main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board, a peripheral control board, and the like, and is connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached. The back cover 640 is attached to the rear end of the main frame base 501 with the right side extending up and down of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around a vertically extending axis, and the left side is the payout base 551. Are attached to the back cover attaching portion 551i and the back cover attaching portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

  The back cover 640 is formed in a shape such that the right side of a flat plate extending in the up, down, left, and right directions is bent forward. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating back and forth and extending up and down. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be viewed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 98A is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98B is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of lockable units 650 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of being locked to the door frame 3. A door frame flange 652, a plurality of outer frame flanges 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and engageable with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from a lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the flange 652 or the outer frame flange 653 in the vertical direction.

  The locking unit 650 has a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame collar 652 downward and an outer frame collar 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from the upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame collar 653 downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame flanges 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are forward of the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It protrudes. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501 and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The rotation of the key engaged with the transmission member 133 and inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame cages 652 are engaged with the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of outer frames. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of the locking units 650 are connected via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame collar 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In a state in which the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved. 4 is unlocked. In this way, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the door frame ridge 652 and the outer frame ridge 653 are inclined so that the distal end sides thereof become thinner. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 become the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward and upward so as to get over 24 and the lower hook member 25, the locked state is brought about by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 99 and FIG. FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. FIG. 100 is a front view showing the inside of a game area in which game balls circulate in the game board. The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which the game ball B is hit when the player operates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning port 2001, a first start port 2002, and a gate unit that give a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by accepting or passing the game ball B 2003, a second start opening 2004, a first big prize opening 2005, and a second big prize opening 2006 are provided (see FIG. 100). Accordingly, in the gaming board 5, the game ball B has the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, the first major winning port 2005, and the second grand winning in the gaming area 5a. This is for playing a game in which the operation of driving the handle 182 and the circulation of the game ball B in the game area 5a are enjoyed so as to be received or passed through the mouth 2006 or the like.

  The game board 5 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the outer shape of the front component member 1000 is substantially square when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-like game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 100). In addition, the game board 5 is a game that is performed by driving a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear part of the game panel 1100 and a game ball B attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 97, FIG. 117, etc.) for controlling the contents.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel A peripheral control unit (not shown) arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100 A front unit 2000 attached to the front surface and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

  The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder (not shown) to which the rear unit 3000 is attached on the rear side.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of (four here) general winning ports 2001 that are always open so as to be able to receive the game balls B that have been driven into the gaming region 5a, and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are a gaming region. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a; a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B; According to the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, the game ball B can be received, and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 A first big prize opening 2005 and a second big prize opening 2006 that allow the game ball B to be accepted in accordance with either the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball B; The Eteiru.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is attached at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start opening 2002 and a start opening unit 2100 having one general winning opening 2001. The side unit 2200 which is attached to the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front opening unit 2100 in front view and has two general winning ports 2001, and the center in the vertical direction at the right end in front view in the game area 5a. A gate unit 2300 having a gate portion 2003 attached to the lower side of the game area 5a, and a general winning opening 2001, a second start opening 2004, which are attached to the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. And a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a first grand prize opening 2005 and a second big prize opening 2006.

  The back unit 3000 is a box shape that is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 (panel holder) and has a front opening, and is closed by attaching the effect display device 1600 to the rear wall from the rear side in a detachable manner. And a lower movable effect unit 3100, an upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and an upper front movable effect unit 3300 that are mounted in the back box.

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component member 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 5a is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left side to the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component member 1000 and extends in an arc from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view, and a game on the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 An out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000, and the upper portion being curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 is connected to the upper end of 1001 and has a stop portion 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an out port 1008 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the rear end of the out guiding part 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front in the frame. The game ball B guided backward by the out guiding portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an outer portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that are substantially perpendicular to the lower end, a lower portion of the outer guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer portion of the right rail 1005. Each part includes a security recess 1009 that is recessed backward from the front end. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch portion 1010 coincides with a notch portion of a panel holder (not shown) in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion pass through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 formed with a transparent synthetic resin and having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder (not shown) attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and attached to the rear unit 3000 on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of the panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even if an obstruction nail is installed on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. Has been. In the present embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component member 1000. Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  The panel holder of the gaming panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder is provided with a through-hole that holds the panel plate 1110 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and has an inside that is substantially the same size as the game area 5a and penetrates in the front-rear direction. ing.

  Moreover, the panel holder is provided with the notch part notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The notch is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component member 1000. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch are passed through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the assembled state on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

  In the state in which the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located immediately above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, all of the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. Can be discharged from the discharge portion 1201 formed to the lower discharge ball receiving portion 628.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 117) for controlling game contents and payout of the game ball B, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And.

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 can be opened and closed. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent against unauthorized actions on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. The main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2301, a second start port sensor 2511, a first count sensor 2512, a second count sensor 2513, a specific area sensor 2512a, a start port solenoid 2514, and a first attacker solenoid. 2515, a second attacker solenoid 2516, a sorting solenoid 2111, a general winning port sensor 3001, a first start port sensor 3002, and a magnetic sensor 3003.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  The function display unit 1400 is not shown in detail, but the two shins display a status indicator composed of three LEDs for displaying the gaming status, and a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B with respect to the gate portion 2003. A normal symbol display made up of LEDs, and a normal hold display made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball B with respect to the gate part 2003 are provided.

  Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying a first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002, and a first start port 2002. The first special hold number indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds (first hold number) related to the reception of the game ball B to the game, and the game ball B received at the second start port 2004. From the second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs that display the second special lottery result and the two LEDs that display the number of holdings (second holding number) related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 And a second special hold number indicator.

  Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 repeats the number of times of opening / closing patterns of at least one of the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit” or the like ( A round indicator composed of five LEDs for displaying the number of rounds).

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of symbols, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box (not shown) that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the effect image.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

[5-8. Table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 99 and FIG. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end forms an opening of the panel plate 1110. It penetrates and projects rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving a game ball B that has been driven into the game area 5a, and is always open (in this case, a plurality of general winning ports 2001) and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are games. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B; , To the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 that allow the game ball B to be received according to the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003. The first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize that allow the game ball B to be accepted in at least one of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B It is provided with a 2006, a.

  A plurality (four here) of general winning awards 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and three are arranged on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed below the center in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the right end in front view in the game area 5a. A right general winning opening 2001 is arranged immediately below the gate portion 2003. The second start port 2004 is disposed at a lower position on the lower left side of the gate portion 2003 and slightly lower than the general winning port 2001 on the right side. The first grand prize winning port 2005 is disposed below the second starting port 2004 and at a slightly lower height than the first starting port 2002. The second big prize opening 2006 is arranged at a slightly lower position on the left side of the first big prize opening 2005.

  The front unit 2000 is attached at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and directly above the out port 1008. The start unit 2100 has one general winning port 2001 and a first start port 2002, and a start port A side unit 2200 which is attached to the left side of the unit 2100 in the front view along the inner rail 1002 and has two general winning ports 2001, and the center in the vertical direction at the right end of the game area 5a in the front view. A gate unit 2300 which is attached to the lower side and has a gate portion 2003, and a general winning port 2001, a second start port 2004, which is attached to the upper side of the game area 5a and slightly in the middle of the front view. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a first grand prize opening 2005 and a second major prize opening 2006, and the frame of the center bonus 2500 closed Includes a transparent front direction unit 2600 is attached to so that the.

  The gate unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is disposed at the right end of the game area 5a as viewed from the front and below the center in the vertical direction, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The gate unit 2300 includes a gate portion 2003 formed so that the game balls B can always pass one by one in the vertical direction, and a gate sensor 2301 that detects the game balls B that have passed through the gate portion 2003.

  In the front unit 2000, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 and detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, and then to the lower substrate holder 1200. Discharged. Further, the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is sent to the rear unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 and detected by the first start port sensor 3002, and then discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. Is done.

  In addition, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor 2511 and then sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 and discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. The game ball B received in the first big prize opening 2005 is detected by the specific area sensor 2512a and then detected by the first count sensor 2512 when being distributed to the specific area by the distribution member described later, and is discharged by the distribution member. When assigned to the area, it is detected by the first count sensor 2512 without being detected by the specific area sensor 2512a, and then sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 and discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. In addition, the game ball B received in the second big prize opening 2006 is detected by the second count sensor 2513, then sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100, and discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-8a. Center character]
The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 101 is a front view of the center accessory and the front effect unit in the front unit of the game board. The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the front center of the game area 5 a and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the lower movable effect unit 3100 and the upper front movable effect unit provided in the effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. 3300 etc. can be visually recognized from the front. The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has the entire circumference excluding the lower side protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B that is driven into the game area 5 a Can not invade.

  The center accessory 2500 has one general winning opening 2001 arranged at the lower right corner when viewed from the front on the outer periphery of the frame, a second starting opening 2004 arranged slightly below the general winning opening 2001, It has a first big prize opening 2005 arranged below the second start opening 2004 and a second big prize opening 2006 arranged slightly below the first big prize opening 2005. Further, the center accessory 2500 is capable of releasing the warp inlet 2501 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter, and the game ball B having entered the warp inlet 2501 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front. And a warp outlet 2502 opened in the frame, and a stage 2503 capable of releasing the game ball B released from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction and then released into the game area 5a.

  The stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape that is depressed in the center in the left-right direction, and corresponds to a position corresponding to the position immediately above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel plate). 1110) is formed so that the position of the approximate center in the left-right direction is lowest. The stage 2503 is inclined so that the lowest part at the center in the left-right direction becomes lower toward the front, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from this part. In the center accessory 2500, the height of the lowest part of the stage 2503 is substantially the same as that of the second start port 2004.

  In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the heightened portion (top) of the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2503 is located immediately above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted into the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

  In addition, the center accessory 2500 detects a game ball B received in the second start port 2004, a second start port sensor 2511, and a first count detecting the game ball B received in the first grand prize winning port 2005. The sensor 2512, the specific area sensor 2512 a that detects the game ball B received in the first big prize opening 2005 and distributed to the specific area by the sorting member, and the game ball B accepted in the second big prize opening 2006 And a second count sensor 2513 for detection (see FIG. 117). The center accessory 2500 includes a start-up solenoid 2514 that opens and closes the second start-up port 2004 in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B of the gate unit 2003, and a first start-up port 2002 or a second start-up. A first attacker solenoid 2515 that opens and closes the first big prize opening 2005 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result lottered by accepting the game ball B into the mouth 2004, and the first start opening 2002 or the first A second attacker solenoid 2516 that opens and closes the second grand prize opening 2006 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start opening 2004, and the first big prize opening A distribution solenoid 2111 for operating a distribution member that distributes the game balls won in 2005 into a specific area and a discharge area.

  The center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, and the right side and the upper side of the right side of the upper surface in the front view are the outer periphery (outer rail 1001 and right rail 1005) of the game area 5a. A gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between them. Further, when the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the lower right corner when viewed from the front is arranged with the general winning port 2001, the second starting port 2004, the first major winning port 2005, and the second major winning port 2006. The lower right corner portion in front view that extends is extended to the lower right corner in the game area 5a, and a space is formed between the lower right corner portion and the upper right portion. In that space, the gate unit 2300 is arranged.

  Therefore, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a so as to circulate on the right side of the center object 2500 (so-called right-hand hit), the game ball B can be passed through the gate portion 2003 with high probability. In addition, the game ball B can be received into the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 that are opened (open) with a high probability.

[5-8b. Table production unit]
The table effect unit 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 102 is a side cross-sectional view of the front effect unit cut along the center in the left-right direction together with the center accessory as seen from the right. FIG. 103 is an explanatory view schematically showing the relationship between the LEDs in the front effect unit and the reflective recesses of the front light guide plate. FIG. 104 is a front view showing a light emission mode of the front light guide plate. FIG. 105 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the front light guide plate of the front effect unit emits light.

  The front effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is attached to a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the center accessory 2500. The front effect unit 2600 is closed on the center actor 2500 and has a transparent flat front light guide plate 2610, a reflector 2620 attached to the upper side of the front light guide plate 2610, and an upper surface of the reflector 2620. The front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 on which a plurality of LEDs 2630 that irradiate light toward the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610 are mounted, and the center light so as to cover the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 and the reflector 2620 from the front. And a front cover 2650 attached to 2500.

  The front light guide plate 2610 of the front effect unit 2600 is formed on the transparent flat light guide plate main body 2611 and the back surface of the light guide plate main body 2611, and from any of the plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 on the upper surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. And a plurality of fine reflecting recesses 2613 for reflecting incident light forward. The plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610 are composed of a first specific light incident portion 2612a, a second specific light incident portion 2612b, a third specific light incident portion 2612c, and a fourth specific light incident portion 2612d. It is configured. The first specific light incident portion 2612a, the second specific light incident portion 2612b, the third specific light incident portion 2612c, and the fourth specific light incident portion 2612d divide the upper surface of the light guide plate body 2611 into eight equal parts in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction). Then, they are arranged in order from the left to the right in two rounds (the order of returning to the beginning after the fourth specific light incident portion 2612d to become the first specific light incident portion 2612a).

  The reflection concave portion 2613 has a plane that extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612 and is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. . The reflective recess 2613 is recessed in a pent roof-like triangle. The reflective concave portion 2613 can reflect the light incident from the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612 in a direction substantially parallel to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate body 2611. In addition, the reflection concave portion 2613 can reflect the light incident from the non-corresponding specific light incident portion 2612 in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate body 2611.

  As a result, as indicated by a broken line in FIG. 103, when light is incident from the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612, the light is reflected to the front front surface of the light guide plate body 2611 (perpendicular to the paper surface) by the reflective concave portion 2613. The reflective recess 2613 appears to emit light from a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, as shown by the one-dot chain line in FIG. 103, when light is incident from the non-corresponding specific light incident portion 2612, the light is reflected in a direction other than the front front of the light guide plate body 2611 by the reflective concave portion 2613, From the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, it appears that the reflection recess 2613 is not emitting light.

  In the present embodiment, the reflective concave portion 2613 has a shape that is recessed in a triangle and extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be any one that extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612.

  The plurality of reflective concave portions 2613 correspond to any of the plurality of specific light incident portions 2612, and the plurality of first reflective concave portions 2613a and second specific light incident portions 2612b corresponding to the first specific light incident portion 2612a. A plurality of fourth reflections corresponding to a plurality of second reflection recesses 2613b corresponding to the third specific light input part 2612c, a plurality of third reflection recesses 2613c corresponding to the third specific light input part 2612c, and a fourth specific light input part 2612d. A recess 2613d.

  In addition, the front light guide plate 2610 includes a plurality of patterns 2614 that can emit and display in different modes by reflecting light forward from a specific group of the plurality of reflecting recesses 2613. Yes. The plurality of patterns 2614 includes a first pattern 2614a including only a plurality of first reflection recesses 2613a, a second pattern 2614b including only a plurality of second reflection recesses 2613b, and a third including only a plurality of third reflection recesses 2613c. The pattern 2614c includes a fourth pattern 2614d including only a plurality of fourth reflection recesses 2613d.

  The first design 2614a, the second design 2614b, the third design 2614c, and the fourth design 2614d are concentric, in order from the outside to the center, as shown in FIGS. 101 and 104, etc. (following the fourth design 2614d). Are arranged so as to return to the beginning and become the first pattern 2614a).

  The reflector 2620 has a fixed recess 2621 into which the upper end of the front light guide plate 2610 is inserted. The reflector 2620 can sandwich the front light guide plate 2610 between the front light guide plate 2610 and the front light guide plate 2610 by inserting the front light guide plate 2610 into the fixed recess 2621, and the front light guide plate 2610 can be positioned without rattling. it can. On the bottom surface (upper surface) of the fixed recess 2621, a through hole 2622 that penetrates up and down is formed at a portion corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 2630 mounted on the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640.

  The front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 has a strip shape extending in the left-right direction, and a plurality of LEDs 2630 are mounted on the lower surface of the reflector 2620 immediately above the fixed recess 2621. The plurality of LEDs 2630 are respectively mounted (attached) to portions corresponding to the plurality of through holes 2622 of the reflector 2620. The front light guide plate decoration board 2640 is formed on the upper surface of the reflector 2620 so that the plurality of LEDs 2630 face downward through the through holes 2622.

  The plurality of LEDs 2630 are attached so as to correspond to the plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610. The plurality of LEDs 2630 include a first LED group 2630a corresponding to the first specific light incident part 2612a, a second LED group 2630b corresponding to the second specific light incident part 2612b, and a third specific light incident part 2612c. And a fourth LED group 2630d corresponding to the fourth specific light incident portion 2612d. The first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d divide the plurality of LEDs 2630 arranged in the left-right direction into eight equal parts in the left-right direction, and from left to right The second LED group 2630d is arranged in order in the order of the second LED group 2630d. In the present embodiment, the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d each have six LEDs 2630.

  Next, the light emission effect by the front effect unit 2600 of this embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED group 2630a of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate main body 2611 from the first specific light incident portion 2612a, is reflected to the front by the first reflective recess 2613a, and the remaining second Since the second reflection recess 2613b, the third reflection recess 2613c, and the fourth reflection recess 2613d are reflected to other than the front, only the first reflection recess 2613a appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, The first pattern 2614a composed of a plurality of first reflective recesses 2613a can emit light (see FIG. 104 (a)).

  When the second LED group 2630b of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate main body 2611 from the second specific light incident portion 2612b, is reflected to the front by the second reflection concave portion 2613b, and the remaining second Since the one reflecting recess 2613a, the third reflecting recess 2613c, and the fourth reflecting recess 2613d are reflected to other than the front, only the second reflecting recess 2613b appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, The second pattern 2614b composed of a plurality of second reflective recesses 2613b can emit light (see FIG. 104 (b)).

  When the third LED group 2630c of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate main body 2611 from the third specific light incident portion 2612c, is reflected to the front by the third reflection concave portion 2613c, and the remaining second Since the first reflective concave portion 2613a, the second reflective concave portion 2613b, and the fourth reflective concave portion 2613d are reflected to other than the front, only the third reflective concave portion 2613c appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, The third pattern 2614c composed of the plurality of third reflective recesses 2613c can emit light (see FIG. 104C).

  When the fourth LED group 2630d of the front light guide plate decoration board 2640 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate main body 2611 from the fourth specific light incident portion 2612d, is reflected to the front by the fourth reflection concave portion 2613d, and the remaining second Since the one reflecting recess 2613a, the second reflecting recess 2613b, and the third reflecting recess 2613c are reflected to other than the front, only the fourth reflecting recess 2613d appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, A fourth pattern 2614d composed of a plurality of fourth reflective recesses 2613d can emit light (see FIG. 104 (d)).

  As described above, since the plurality of patterns 2614 arranged concentrically can be made to emit light, the plurality of LEDs 2630 can be divided into the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth. When the LED group 2630d is made to emit light in the order, the first picture 2614a, the second picture 2614b, the third picture 2614c, and the fourth picture 2614d can be made to emit light in this order, and there is a movement that spreads outward from the center. A lighting effect such as animation can be performed.

  On the other hand, when the plurality of LEDs 2630 are caused to emit light in the order of the fourth LED group 2630d, the third LED group 2630c, the second LED group 2630b, and the first LED group 2630a, the fourth pattern 2614d, the third pattern 2614c, Light can be emitted in the order of the pattern 2614b and the first pattern 2614a, and a light-emitting effect such as an animation with a movement that concentrates from the outside toward the center can be performed.

  Thus, according to the front effect unit 2600, a single front light guide plate 2610 can emit a plurality (three or more) of different pictures 2614, so that each picture can be displayed for animation display or the like. There is no need to provide a plurality of light guide plates, and the thickness in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible. Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the front light guide plate 2610 can be positioned as close as possible to the player side, and a wide space is provided on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610. It can be easily secured. Accordingly, since a large space can be secured on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like are provided on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610. The pachinko machine 1 with a high appeal to the player by improving the appearance in the game area 5a can be arranged, and in addition to the effect by the light-emitting display of the pattern 2614, the lower movable effect Various effects can be provided to the player by performing the movable effects by the unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc., and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest. be able to.

  In addition, the front light guide plate 2610 causes a plurality of translucent patterns 2614 due to the point light emission of the plurality of reflective recesses 2613 to emerge in front of the effect unit, the decorative body, and the effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. Because it can show a light-emitting decoration that moves like an animation, it can have a strong impact on players familiar with light-emitting effects using conventional light guide plates, and it can surprise and entertain players, It is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since only the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the light emission display of the pattern 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 well, other players away from the front can see the pattern 2614. The light-emitting display becomes difficult to see, it can be difficult for other players to notice that an effect using the front light guide plate 2610 is performed, and other players can be prevented from paying attention. In addition to being able to play, the game can be performed without worrying about other players, and the game can be enjoyed to prevent a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached so as to be sandwiched between the fixing recesses 2621 of the reflector 2620, the plurality of LEDs 2630 attached to the front light guide plate decoration board 2640 are reliably positioned with respect to the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610. can do. Thereby, each LED 2630 (the 1st LED group 2630a, the 2nd LED group 2630b, the 3rd LED group 2630c, the 4th LED group 2630d) is arrange | positioned in the position corresponding to each specific light-incidence part 2612 of the front light-guide plate 2610. Therefore, the light from each LED 2630 can be reflected frontward by the corresponding reflection recess 2613, and the corresponding pattern 2614 can be reliably emitted.

  Furthermore, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in which the center accessory 2500 is attached in the center of the front view game area 5a, even if the pattern 2614 is displayed by the LED 2630, the light emission is displayed. The displayed pattern 2614 does not hinder the game in the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually played can be viewed in a good state from the player side, making it difficult to see the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust and entertain the game in a good state.

  Further, since the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixed concave portion 2621 of the reflector 2620, the front light guide plate 2610 and the reflector 2620 are compared with the case where the light guide plate main body 2611 is attached by two members as in the prior art. Can be eliminated, and a plurality of LEDs 2630 can be reliably positioned at desired positions with respect to the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, since the LED 2630 can be reliably positioned with respect to the specific light incident portion 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610, the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612 can be reliably irradiated with light from the LED 2630, and only the intended pattern 2614 can be irradiated. It is possible to reliably display the light emission.

  Furthermore, since the plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 are arranged only on the upper side of the light guide plate main body 2611, the front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) is arranged only on the upper side of the light guide plate main body 2611. Compared to the case where the front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) does not surround the outer periphery of the light guide plate main body 2611 and the front cover (frame body) is provided over the entire periphery of the light guide plate main body 2611. It is possible to avoid partitioning the effect image and decorative body of the effect display device 1600 arranged in the player, so that the effect image can be easily seen from the player side, and the effect image can be displayed to the player. It is possible to entertain in a good state and suppress a decrease in interest, and there is no frame-like partition in the game area 5a in front view. In a feeling of opening may be a pachinko machine 1, can be assumed to be appealing is strongly attracted the attention of a player to improve the appearance of the game area 5a.

  Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 (reflector 2620) is made by matching the peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center accessory 2500. Or a plurality of LEDs 2630) from the player side, making it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front light guide plate 2610. It is possible to give a strong impact to a player who thought that 2610 did not exist and to surprise the player with light emission display of a plurality of patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 and to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, since the front cover 2650 prevents the plurality of LEDs 2630 and the reflector 2620 from being seen from the player side, it is possible to prevent the appearance in the game area 5a from being deteriorated by seeing the reflector 2620 and the like. The appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the plurality of LEDs 2630 are not seen from the player side by the front cover 2650, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front light guide plate 2610 using the plurality of LEDs 2630, and thus the LED 2630. The display 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 is displayed in a light-emitting manner, so that the player can be greatly surprised by the light-emitting display that the player has not predicted, and the player 26 can enjoy the light-emitting display of the pattern 2614. It is possible to think that there is something good for the game, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image behind the front light guide plate 2610 is provided, a light emission display of a plurality of different patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610, and an effect image by the effect display device 1600 Since it is possible to show the player a combined effect, various effects can be performed by appropriately combining them, and it is possible to make the player hard to get tired, and the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600 It is possible to entertain the player by directing and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the front light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front light guide plate 2610, the distance to the effect display device 1600, Therefore, by displaying the effect image related to the plurality of patterns 2614 displayed and emitted on the front light guide plate 2610, it is possible to add a sense of depth and a three-dimensional appearance to the displayed pattern 2614. An effect (display effect) that can strongly attract the player's interest can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In the above-described embodiment, the reflection concave portion 2613 is shown as having a triangular cross section and extending uniformly. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cross section is a semicircular arc and extending uniformly. May be a polygonal and constant extension, a curved cross-section and a constant extension, and the like.

  Further, the LED 2630 may be a single color or a full color. The number of the patterns 2614 may be four or more, and the number of the specific light incident portions, the reflective recesses, and the LED groups can be appropriately selected according to the number of the patterns 2614.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 106 is a front view of the game board showing the lower front center decorative body in the lower movable stage unit, and FIG. 107 shows the lower front central base body and the lower front center base body in the lower movable stage unit. FIG. 108 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the lower rear center decorative body is lit, and FIG. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the central decorative body, the lower rear central decorative body, the lower left side decorative body, and the lower right side decoration are illuminated. FIG. 109 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the game board is in the state shown in FIG. 108 and the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. Further, FIG. 110 shows the four rotating decorative bodies, the left side rotational decorative body, the left sub-side rotational decorative body, the right side rotational decorative body, and the right sub-side rotational decorative body in the lower movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the decoration of no. FIG. 111 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the types (sizes) of arrows that are emitted and displayed in the lower movable effect unit.

  FIG. 112 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the upper rear left decorative body and the upper rear right decorative body of the upper rear movable effect unit are lowered. FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the drive mechanism of the upper rear movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 114 is an explanatory diagram showing the structure of the clutch mechanism of the upper rear movable effect unit. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board shown with the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit lowered. FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder in the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit are attached to the rear side. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning port sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 of the front unit 2000 and a first start port sensor that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002. 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting near the first start port 2002 (see FIG. 117).

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder and has a box-like shape that is open at the front. The back unit 3000 has a square opening on the rear wall where the effect display device 1600 faces forward, and a lower part in the back box. Lower movable effect unit 3100 attached, upper rear movable effect unit 3200 attached to the upper part in the back box, and upper front attached in front of upper rear movable effect unit 3200 in the upper part in the back box A movable rendering unit 3300.

[5-9a. Lower movable production unit]
The lower movable effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. Lower movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the lower part of the back box, and a part thereof is located in front of the lower part of effect display device 1600. The lower movable effect unit 3100 includes a lower front center decoration unit 3110 attached below the effect display device 1600 and near the front end of the back box, and a lower center effect unit disposed behind the lower front center decoration unit 3110. 3120, and a lower left side effect unit 3150 and a lower right side effect unit 3170, which are respectively disposed on the left and right sides of the lower center effect unit 3120.

  The lower front center decorative unit 3110 includes a lower front central decorative body 3111 having a trapezoidal shape (an inverted isosceles triangle shape with a flat apex) constricted downward and having translucency. The lower front center decoration unit 3110 is located behind the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 and the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 in a state assembled to the game board 5. The lower front central decorative body 3111 can be decorated with light emission by the lower central decorative board of the lower central effect unit 3120.

  The lower center directing unit 3120 is attached to the lower central lifting base 3121 mounted in the back box behind the lower front central decoration unit 3110 so as to be lifted and to the front of the lower central lifting base 3121 and has translucency. The lower rear decorative body 3122 and the lower central decorative board (illustrated) on which a plurality of LEDs arranged on the rear side of the lower rear central decorative body 3122 and capable of irradiating light are mounted. And a central movable unit 3125 attached to the upper part of the lower central elevating base 3121.

  Although not shown, the lower center stage unit 3120 includes a unit base attached to the back box, a pair of elevating guides attached to the unit base and guiding the lower central elevating base in the vertical direction, and a unit. A rod-shaped arm member that is rotatably attached to an axis whose base end extends back and forth on the base, a sliding pin that is attached to the distal end of the arm member and is inserted into a slit of the lower central lift base 3121, and an arm member And a lower center raising / lowering drive motor to be rotated.

  Although not shown in the drawing, the lower center elevating base 3121 has a slit extending left and right, and a sliding pin attached to the tip of the arm member is slidably inserted into the slit. The lower center elevating base 3121 is lowered by a lower center elevating drive motor between a lowered position that is entirely behind the lower front center ornament 3111 and an elevated position that is entirely above the lower front center ornament 3111. It is mounted so that it can be raised and lowered.

  The lower rear center decorative body 3122 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle and has a plurality of light emitting areas 3122a arranged in the vertical direction. The lower back center decorative body 3122 can be decorated with light emission by the light emission of the LED of the lower center decorative substrate. The lower central decorative board is mounted such that a plurality of LEDs can individually decorate the light emitting areas 3122a of the lower rear central decorative body 3122, and the lower central lifting base 3121 is raised. Sometimes, it is mounted so as to be able to irradiate light toward the lower front center decorative body 3111 which is lower and forward.

  Although not shown in detail, the central movable unit 3125 is attached to the upper end of the lower central elevating base 3121 with an interval in the left-right direction, and a plurality of mounting bases each extending upward in a flat plate shape, A plurality of central rotary drive motors mounted on a plurality of mounting bases with the rotary shafts directed in the left-right direction, and the rotary shafts of the respective central rotary drive motors. And a plurality of cube-shaped rotating decoration bodies 3126 covering the above. The plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3126 can be rotated around an axis extending in the left and right directions by a central rotation driving motor, and are arranged coaxially in the left and right directions. In addition, each rotating decorative body 3126 is formed with different decorative portions 3127 on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 110). Each of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3126 can be independently rotated by each central rotational drive motor.

  Although not shown in the figure, the central movable unit 3125 is attached to the lower surface of the lower central elevating base 3121 below the rotary decorative bodies 3126, and a plurality of movable movable bodies 3126 can be irradiated with light. The lower center upper surface decoration board | substrate with which LED is mounted is provided. Each rotating decorative body 3126 can be light-decorated by appropriately emitting light from the LED on the lower central upper surface decorative substrate.

  The lower left side production unit 3150 of the lower movable production unit 3100 is not shown in detail, but the flat plate-like lower piece portion extending horizontally, and the plate-like side extending upward from the left end of the lower piece portion. The front side of the unit base of the lower central stage unit 3120 has a side and a flat upper side extending from the upper end of the side to the upper side of the lower piece and extending to the right shorter than the lower piece. The left unit base mounted in the back box on the left side of the view, and the cylindrical guide shaft with the lower end and upper end mounted on the lower piece and the upper piece, respectively, near the right side of the side of the left unit base And a rod-shaped male screw member that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically by a lower piece and an upper piece of the left unit base so as to extend in parallel with the guide shaft and has a male screw formed on the outer periphery. And male thread member A lower left side lift base 3151 slidably attached to the guide shaft with a nut fitted thereto, a lower left side lift drive motor attached to the left unit base and rotating a male screw member; A lower left side decorative body 3152 that is attached to the front surface of the left side lifting base 3151 and has translucency, and is attached to the right side surface of the lower left side decorative body 3152 so that light can be emitted toward the left. A lower left side decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

  The lower left side decorative body 3152 has a plurality of light emitting areas 3152a arranged in the vertical direction, and each of the light emitting areas is appropriately emitted by causing the plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left side decorative board to emit light appropriately. The 3152a can be decorated with light emission independently.

  The lower left side production unit 3150 is not shown in detail, but is attached to the upper part of the lower left side lifting base 3151 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and has a slider having a slit extending in the front-rear direction, The lower left slide drive motor is attached to the rear side of the lower left side elevating base 3151 so that the rotary shaft extends upward below the slider, and the base end side is attached to the rotary shaft of the lower left slide drive motor. And a cam member having a cylindrical slide pin that is slidably inserted into the slit of the slider on the distal end side extending in the horizontal direction from the proximal end side.

  Further, although the lower left side production unit 3150 is not shown in detail, the lower left side production unit 3150 is attached to the slider and extends upward in a flat plate shape, and the rotation base is directed to the left and right in the mounting base. A left side rotation drive motor that is attached, and a cubic left side rotation decoration body 3153 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the left side rotation drive motor and covers the outer periphery of the left side rotation drive motor. The left side rotating decorative body 3153 has different decorative portions 3154 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 110). The left side rotating decorative body 3153 can be rotated around an axis extending left and right by a left side rotation driving motor.

  Further, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is not shown in detail, but is attached below the left side rotating decorative body 3153 on the upper surface of the slider and can emit light toward the left side rotating decorative body 3153. A lower left side upper surface decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is provided. By appropriately emitting the LED on the lower left side upper surface decorative board, the left side rotating decorative body 3153 can be illuminated and decorated.

  Further, the lower left side production unit 3150 is not shown in detail, but is attached to the upper surface of the upper piece of the left unit base and extends upward in the form of a flat plate, and the sub attachment base A left subside rotation drive motor attached to the rotation shaft of the left subside rotation drive motor and the left subside rotation drive motor that is mounted with the rotation shaft directed in the left-right direction, and a cubic left subside rotation that covers the outer periphery of the left subside rotation drive motor And a decorative body 3155. The left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 has different decorative portions 3156 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 110). The left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 can be rotated around an axis extending left and right by a left sub-side rotation drive motor.

  The lower left side production unit 3150 is not shown in detail, but is attached to the upper surface of the upper piece of the left unit base below the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 and heads toward the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155. And a lower left sub-side upper surface decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light are mounted. The left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 can be light-decorated by appropriately emitting the LED on the lower left sub-side upper surface decorative board.

  The lower left side effect unit 3150 is assembled to the game board 5, and the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155 attached to the left unit base is at a height that allows the left side rotation decoration body 3153 to enter the lower part. The lower center elevating base 3121 of the center effect unit 3120 is disposed at substantially the same height as the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3126 when the lower center elevating base 3121 is positioned (raised) to the ascending end. Further, the lower left side effect unit 3150 has a left side rotation ornament 3153 between the left sub rotation effect body 3126 and the leftmost rotation ornament 3126 of the lower center effect unit 3120 when the left sub-side effect decoration 3155 is assembled to the game board 5. There is a space that can enter.

  The lower left side effect unit 3150 rotates the male screw member with a lower left side elevating drive motor so that the left side rotating decorative body 3153 and the lower center effect unit 3120 are moved together with the slider via the lower left side elevating base 3151. The lower central lift base 3121 can be moved up and down between a lowered position slightly higher than the height of the rotating decorative body 3126 in the lowered position and an elevated position having the same height as the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155. In addition, the lower left side production unit 3150 rotates the cam member with the lower left slide drive motor, thereby bringing the left side rotation decoration body 3153 close to the lower center production unit 3120 and the adjacent appearance position via the slider. Further, it can be slid in the left-right direction between the lower center effect unit 3120 and a retreat position in which about half is located below the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155.

  The lower right side production unit 3170 of the lower movable production unit 3100 is not shown in detail, but the flat plate-like lower piece portion extending horizontally, and the plate-like side extending upward from the right end of the lower piece portion. The front side of the unit base of the lower center stage production unit 3120 has a flat upper side that extends from the upper end of the side and the side to the upper side of the lower piece and to the left shorter than the lower piece. The right unit base installed in the back box on the right side of the view, and the cylindrical guide shaft with the lower end and upper end attached to the lower piece and the upper piece, respectively, near the left side of the side of the right unit base And a rod-shaped male screw member that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically by a lower piece and an upper piece of the right unit base so as to extend in parallel with the guide shaft and has a male screw formed on the outer periphery. And male thread member A lower right side elevating base 3171 slidably attached to the guide shaft with a nut fitted thereto, a lower right side elevating drive motor attached to the right unit base and rotating a male screw member; The lower right side decorative body 3172 which is attached to the front surface of the right side elevating base 3171 and has translucency, and is attached to the right side of the lower right side decorative body 3172 and can irradiate light to the right. A lower right side decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

  The lower right side decorative body 3172 has a plurality of light emitting areas 3172a arranged in the vertical direction, and each of the light emitting areas can be appropriately emitted by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right side decorative board. The 3172a can be independently decorated with light emission.

  The lower right side production unit 3170 is not shown in detail, but is attached to the upper part of the lower right side lifting base 3171 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and has a slider extending in the front-rear direction. A lower right slide drive motor attached to the rear side of the lower right side elevating base 3171 so that the rotary shaft extends upward below the slider, and a base end side is attached to the rotary shaft of the lower right slide drive motor. And a cam member having a cylindrical slide pin that is slidably inserted into the slit of the slider on the distal end side extending in the horizontal direction from the proximal end side.

  Further, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is not shown in detail, but is attached to the slider and extends upward in a flat plate shape, and the rotating base is directed to the mounting base in the left-right direction. A right-side rotation drive motor that is attached, and a cubic right-side rotation decoration body 3173 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the right-side rotation drive motor and covers the outer periphery of the right-side rotation drive motor. The right side rotating decorative body 3173 has different decorative portions 3174 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 110). Further, the right side rotating decorative body 3173 can be rotated around an axis extending left and right by a right side rotation driving motor.

  Further, although the lower right side effect unit 3170 is not shown in detail, it is attached below the right side rotating decorative body 3173 on the upper surface of the slider, and can irradiate light toward the right side rotating decorative body 3173. The lower right side upper surface decoration board | substrate with which several LED is mounted is provided. The right side rotating decorative body 3173 can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting the LED on the lower right side upper surface decorative board.

  Further, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is not shown in detail, but is attached to the upper surface of the upper piece of the right unit base and extends upward in the form of a flat plate, and the sub attachment base Right subside rotation drive motor attached to the right subside rotation drive motor and the right subside rotation drive motor mounted with the rotation axis facing the left and right direction, and a cubic right subside rotation that covers the outer periphery of the right subside rotation drive motor And a decorative body 3175. The right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 has different decorative portions 3176 on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 110). Further, the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 can be rotated around an axis extending left and right by a right sub-side rotation drive motor.

  Further, although the lower right side effect unit 3170 is not shown in detail, it is attached below the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 on the upper surface of the upper piece of the right unit base, and faces the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175. And a lower right sub-side upper surface decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light are mounted. The right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 can be light-decorated by appropriately emitting the LED of the lower right sub-side upper surface decorative board.

  When the lower right side effect unit 3170 is assembled to the game board 5, the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 attached to the right unit base is at a height that allows the right side rotating decorative body 3173 to enter the lower part. The lower center elevating base 3121 of the center effect unit 3120 is disposed at substantially the same height as the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3126 when the lower center elevating base 3121 is positioned (raised) to the ascending end. In addition, the lower right side effect unit 3170 has a right side rotation ornament 3173 between the right sub side rotation ornament 3175 and the rightmost rotation ornament 3126 of the lower center effect unit 3120 when the right sub-side ornament 3175 is assembled to the game board 5. There is a space that can enter.

  The lower right side effect unit 3170 rotates the male screw member with the lower right side elevating drive motor, whereby the right side rotating decoration body 3173 and the lower center effect unit 3120 are moved together with the slider via the lower right side elevating base 3171. The lower central lift base 3121 can be moved up and down between a lowered position slightly higher than the height of the rotating decorative body 3126 in the lowered position and an elevated position having the same height as the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175. Also, the lower right side production unit 3170 rotates the cam member with the lower right slide drive motor, thereby bringing the right side rotation decoration body 3173 close to the lower center production unit 3120 and the adjacent appearance position via the slider. Further, it can be slid in the left-right direction between the lower center effect unit 3120 and a retreat position in which about half is located below the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175.

  As shown in FIG. 110, the lower movable effect unit 3100 includes a decorative portion 3127 of each of the four rotational decorative bodies 3126, a decorative portion 3154 of the left side rotational decorative body 3153, a decorative portion 3156 of the left sub-side rotational decorative body 3155, Different decorations are formed on the decoration part 3174 of the side rotation decoration body 3173 and the decoration part 3176 of the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175, respectively. The four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the left side rotating decorative body 3153, the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155, the right side rotating decorative body 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 are each formed in a dice-shaped cube and extend to the left and right. Different decorations are formed on the first surface to the fourth surface around the rotation axis.

  In the state where the first surfaces of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the left side rotating decorative body 3153, the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155, the right side rotating decorative body 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 are directed to the front, It is “凰”, “First Eye”, “First Eye”, “Second Eye”, “Third Eye”, “Four Eye”, “First Eye”, “凰”. In the state where each second surface is directed to the front, “star”, “super” “chi” “ja” “n” “su” “!” “Star” are displayed from the left. In the state where the third surface is directed to the front, “!”, “凰” “ge” “ki” “a” “tsu” “凰” “!” Is displayed from the left. Furthermore, in the state where the fourth surface is directed to the front, “celebration”, “!”, “O”, “me”, “de”, “to”, “u” and “!” Are displayed from the left.

  As described above, the four rotational decoration bodies 3126, the left side rotation decoration body 3153, the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155, the right side rotation decoration body 3173, and the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175 are respectively directed to the front with the same numbers. Thus, a predetermined message can be shown to the player, and an expected value that is “big hit” can be displayed according to the content of the message.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 111, the lower movable effect unit 3100 causes the lower front center decorative body 3111, the lower rear central decorative body 3122, the lower left side decorative body 3152, and the lower right side decorative body 3172 to emit light appropriately. “Arrows” of different sizes can be displayed in a luminous manner. Specifically, if only the lower front center decorative body 3111 is caused to emit light, a “small arrow” of a triangle with the apex of the isosceles triangle facing downward can be emitted and displayed (FIGS. 106 and 111A). reference). Further, when the lower front center decorative body 3111 and the raised lower rear central decorative body 3122 are caused to emit light, a “middle arrow” facing downward with a bar extending upwardly larger than the “small arrow” is displayed in a light emitting manner. (See FIGS. 107 and 111 (b)). Further, in the state of “middle arrow”, the lower left side decorative body 3152 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 are raised, and the lower front central decorative body 3111, the lower rear central decorative body 3122, the lower left side decorative body 3152, and the lower right When all of the side decorative bodies 3172 are caused to emit light, a “large arrow” in which the upper end of the arrow that is directed downward and larger than the “middle arrow” is widened to the left and right can be displayed by light emission (FIGS. 108 and 111 (c)). See).

  In this way, three different sizes of arrows, “small arrow”, “middle arrow”, and “large arrow”, can be displayed in a light-emitting manner, so “big hit” in the order of “small arrow”, “middle arrow”, and “large arrow”. It is possible to display that the expected value of “is high”.

  Next, an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100 will be described. As shown in FIG. 99 and the like, the lower movable effect unit 3100 is a lowered position in which the lower center elevating base 3121 is behind the lower front center decoration unit 3110 and cannot be seen from the front. The four rotating decorative bodies 3126 attached to the upper end of the lower central elevating base 3121 are positioned so as to be in contact with the upper end of the lower front central decorative body 3111 in a front view.

  Further, in a normal state, in the lower left side effect unit 3150, the lower left side lifting base 3151 is located at a lowered position that is slightly above the upper end of the lower front center decorative unit 3110 and almost invisible from the front, The left side rotation decoration body 3153 is separated from the lower center stage production unit 3120 to the left via the slider, and a half of the rotation decoration body 3153 is positioned below the left sub side rotation decoration body 3155, and the left sub side rotation decoration body 3155 is a game. It is located in the vicinity of the lower left end of the region 5a from the center in the vertical direction.

  Further, in a normal state, in the lower right side effect unit 3170, the lower right side lifting base 3171 is positioned slightly above the upper end of the lower front center decoration unit 3110 and in a lowered position almost invisible from the front. The right side rotation decoration body 3173 is separated from the lower center stage production unit 3120 to the right side via the slider and is located at a retreat position where the half is below the right sub side rotation decoration body 3175. The right sub side rotation decoration body 3175 is a game. It is located near the lower right end of the region 5a from the center in the vertical direction.

  As one of the effects presented to the player in this normal state, for example, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, for example. According to the lottery result, after rotating the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the rotation of the respective rotating decorative bodies 3126 is stopped, and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 facing forward in each rotating decorative body 3126 stopped to rotate. To the player. Thereby, the player can be thrilled and excited by whether or not the rotation of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 stops in a desired combination, and a movable effect by the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 can be enjoyed. When the combination of the decorative portions 3127 of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 that have stopped rotating satisfies a predetermined condition, the lower rear central decorative body 3122 attached to the lower central lift base 3121 by the lower central decorative substrate. Is emitted to decorate the lower front center decorative body 3111 of the lower front central decorative unit 3110 located in front. As a result, as shown in FIG. 106, a downward arrow is emitted and displayed by the lower front center decorative body 3111, so that the player's line of sight is displayed below the game area 5a by the emission display of the downward arrow. The player can be directed to the production operation unit 301 arranged on the screen, can prompt the player to operate the production operation unit 301, and can easily participate in the player participation type production that operates the production operation unit 301. It is possible to make the player entertain the player participatory type effect and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Or, according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B from the normal state to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the lower central lift base 3121 is changed. Raise from the lowered position to the raised position. As a result, the lower rear center decorative body 3122 and the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 move to the center of the front-view game area 5a so as to block part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. The player can be surprised and the player can think that there is something good, and the expectation for the game can be raised. Then, after rotating the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the rotation of the respective rotating decorative bodies 3126 is stopped, and the combination of the decorative portion 3127 facing forward in each of the rotated decorative bodies 3126 stopped to rotate is given to the player. Make it visible. This may cause the player to think that if the four rotating decorations 3126 stop rotating in a desired combination, they must be “big hit” (the lottery result in which an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous) occurs. The player can be thrilled by whether or not the rotation of the four rotating decorations 3126 stops in a desired combination, and the expectation for the lottery result can be enhanced. When the combination of the decorative portions 3127 of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 that have stopped rotating satisfies a predetermined condition, a plurality of lower central decorative substrates attached to the lower central lifting base 3121 that is rising The LED is caused to emit light, and the lower rear center decorative body 3122 disposed in front and the lower front central decorative body 3111 disposed forward and downward are illuminated. As a result, as shown in FIG. 107, a large downward arrow is emitted and displayed by the lower rear central decorative body 3122 and the lower front central decorative body 3111. The player's line of sight can be guided to the effect operation unit 301 disposed below the game area 5a to prompt the player to operate the effect operation unit 301. By operating it, it can be thought that it will be a “big hit”, and the player can operate the effect operation unit 301 to entertain the player participation type effect.

  Furthermore, the lower center elevating base 3121 is selected according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B from the normal state to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. Is raised from the lowered position to the raised position. As a result, the lower rear center decorative body 3122 and the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 move to the center of the front-view game area 5a so as to block part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. The player can be surprised and the player can think that there is something good, and the expectation for the game can be raised. Subsequently, the left and right left side rotating decorative bodies 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body 3173 are respectively slid to the appearance position on the center side, and then the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171 are respectively moved. The position is raised to the raised position (see FIG. 108). As a result, the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155, the left side rotation decoration body 3153, the four rotation decoration bodies 3126, the right side rotation decoration body 3173, and the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175 are aligned in the left-right direction. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is possible to raise a sense of expectation for the game by making it seem that the lottery result is a “hit”. Then, after rotating the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155, the left side rotating decorative body 3153, the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the right side rotating decorative body 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175, the rotation is stopped and the left A decoration part 3156 of the sub-side rotation decoration body 3155, a decoration part 3154 of the left-side rotation decoration body 3153, a decoration part 3127 of each of the four rotation decoration bodies 3126, a decoration part 3174 of the right-side rotation decoration body 3173, and a right sub-side rotation decoration The player visually recognizes the combination of the decorative portion 3176 of the body 3175. At this time, since the plurality of decoration portions 3127 include a decoration portion 3127 that is decorated with numbers, the countdown is performed by stopping the rotation so that the number decoration portions 3127 face forward. As a result of the countdown effect, it is possible to make the player think that the lottery result must be a “hit” and to enhance the interest in the game. Then, when the rotation of the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155, the left side rotation decoration body 3153, the four rotation decoration bodies 3126, the right side rotation decoration body 3173, and the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175 is stopped and the countdown ends, The lower front center ornament 3111, the lower rear center ornament 3122, the lower left side ornament 3152, and the lower right side ornament 3172 are illuminated. As a result, as shown in FIG. 108, an even larger downward arrow (giant arrow) is displayed by light emission, so that the player can operate the effect operation unit 301 arranged at the tip of the giant arrow. Thus, it can be convinced that the lottery result is “big hit”, and the player can be surely operated on the production operation unit 301. When this huge arrow is displayed in a flashing manner, a message explaining the effect operation unit 301 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 is raised, and the effect operation unit 301 is rotated. The operation unit 302 is rotated at high speed (see FIG. 109). Thereby, since the rotation operation part 302 rotates at high speed, the player's interest can be enhanced, so that the press operation part 303 can be surely pressed, and the player is entertained and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  As an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100, in FIG. 109, the effect display device 1600 displays a character “Rotation of the lower button is hot!”, Causing the player to pay attention to the rotation operation unit 302, and the rotation operation. The faster the rotation speed of the section 302, the higher the expected value for “big hit” is to inform the player. That is, the expected value is represented by the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302, and an effect image informing the player of the expected value is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 109, as the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, the lower movable effect unit 3100 includes a lower front center ornament 3111, a lower rear center ornament 3122, and a lower left side ornament as shown in FIG. An effect image suggesting an operation method of the effect operation unit 301 in which the player's operation is prompted by an “arrow” emitted and displayed by the body 3152, the lower right side decorative body 3172, and the like may be displayed. Specifically, effect images such as “Press the button!”, “Turn the dial!”, “Turn the dial left!”, “Turn the dial right!”, Etc. are displayed. Thereby, operation in the production | presentation operation part 301 can be performed exactly, and the player participatory production which operates the production | generation operation part 301 can be enjoyed reliably.

  Then, when the player operates the effect operation unit 301, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an expected value that is a “hit” by the effect image may be displayed. Using the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the left side rotating decorative body 3153, the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155, the right side rotating decorative body 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175, each of which is formed in a dice shape, the expected value is obtained. You may make it display.

  As an indication of an expected value using four rotating decorative bodies 3126, a left side rotating decorative body 3153, a left subside rotating decorative body 3155, a right side rotating decorative body 3173, and a right subside rotating decorative body 3175 formed in a dice shape, respectively. Performs an effect of displaying an expected value that is a “big hit” by combining each decoration part 3127, decoration part 3154, decoration part 3156, decoration part 3174, and decoration part 3176 that face the front by respective rotations and stops. . Specifically, when only the four rotating decoration bodies 3126 of the lower center stage production unit 3120 at the center are used, for example, there are the following three patterns. The pattern a1 displays an expected value in a state where the combination of the decorative portions 3127 facing the front when the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 are stopped rotating is a combination of pieces that the player cannot read the meaning of. No pattern. The pattern a2 has a high expected value to some extent when each of the rotating decorative bodies 3126 stops rotating with the second surface facing the front, and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 is “CHI” “A” “N” “SU”. Pattern showing that. The pattern a3 has a very high expected value when the respective rotating decorative bodies 3126 stop rotating with the third surface facing the front, and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 is “ge” “ki” “a” “tsu”. Pattern showing that. As described above, the expected value can be displayed by the pattern displayed by stopping the rotation of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, and the expected value increases in the order of the pattern a1, the pattern a2, and the pattern a3.

  Furthermore, as the effects using the lower movable effect unit 3100, all of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the left side rotating decorative body 3153, the left subside rotating decorative body 3155, the right side rotating decorative body 3173, and the right subside rotating decorative body 3175 ( Eight (8) dice-shaped rotating bodies are used to produce an effect of displaying an expected value that will be a “big hit” by combining the decorative portion 3127, the decorative portion 3154, the decorative portion 3156, the decorative portion 3174, and the decorative portion 3176. You may make it do. Specifically, there are the following six patterns. In the pattern b1, the combination of the decorative portion 3127, the decorative portion 3154, the decorative portion 3156, the decorative portion 3174, and the decorative portion 3176 that have stopped rotating is a combination (no display of an expected value). In the pattern b2, the left sub-side rotating ornament 3155 is “凰” or “star”, the left-side rotating ornament 3153 is “!” Or “凰”, and the four center rotating ornaments 3126 are “Chi”, “ャ”, “「 ”. “S”, right side rotation decoration 3173 is “!” Or “凰”, and right sub-side rotation decoration 3175 is “凰” or “star” (chance display). In the pattern b3, the left sub-side rotation decoration 3155 is “凰” or “star”, the left-side rotation decoration 3153 is “!” Or “凰”, and the four center rotation decorations 3126 are “ge”, “ki”, “ A) “tsu”, right side rotation decoration 3173 is “!” Or “凰”, and right sub-side rotation decoration 3175 is “組合 せ” or “star” (gekiatsu display). In the pattern b4, the left sub-side rotating ornament 3155 is “凰” or “star”, the left-side rotating ornament 3153 is “super”, and the four center rotating ornaments 3126 are “chi”, “ja”, “n”, “su”. ”, A combination of“! ”For the right side rotational ornament 3173 and“ 凰 ”or“ star ”for the right sub side rotational ornament 3175 (super chance display). In the pattern b5, the left sub-side rotational ornament 3155 is “凰” or “star”, the left-side rotational ornament 3153 is “super”, and the four central rotational ornaments 3126 are “ge”, “ki”, “a”, “tsu”. ”, The right side rotational ornament 3173 is“! ”, And the right sub-side rotational ornament 3175 is a combination of“ 凰 ”or“ star ”(super-gequity display). In the pattern b6, the left sub-side rotational decoration 3155 is “celebration”, the left-side rotational decoration 3153 is “!”, The four central rotational decorations 3126 are “o”, “me”, “de”, “to”, and the right side. A combination in which the rotational decoration body 3173 is “U” and the right sub-side rotational decoration body 3175 is “!!” (“big hit” is determined). In this way, the four rotation decoration bodies 3126, the left side rotation decoration body 3153, the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155, the right side rotation decoration body 3173, and the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175 are displayed by stopping the rotation of the eight rotation bodies. The expected value can be displayed by the pattern, and the expected value increases in the order of the pattern b1, the pattern b2, the pattern b3, the pattern b4, the pattern b5, and the pattern b6.

  In the above production, if the player does not operate the production operation unit 301 within a certain period of time after the operation of the production operation unit 301 is prompted, the production of displaying the expected value as described above is not performed. The “arrow” light emission display is also turned off. On the other hand, if the player operates the effect operation unit 301 within a certain period of time after the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is urged, an effect is displayed in which the expected value as described above is displayed using the remaining effect time. When the production time is over, the above production is finished and the light emission display of “arrow” is turned off and the production is finished.

  As described above, according to the lower movable effect unit 3100, when a game state is changed by playing a game in the game area 5a in a normal state (a game ball to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004). (Depending on the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery selected by receiving B), the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 arranged side by side on the upper side of the lower front central decorative body 3111 rotate or the lower center Four rotating decorative bodies 3126 arranged side by side by the lifting base 3121 rise together with the lower rear central decorative body 3122, four rotating decorative bodies 3126 raised by the lower central lifting base 3121 rotate, Lower left slide drive motor of side effect unit 3150, lower right slide drive motor of lower right side effect unit 3170, etc. (slide The pair of left side rotation decoration body 3153 and right side rotation decoration body 3173 slide in the left-right direction, the left side rotation decoration body 3153 and the right side rotation decoration body 3173 rotate, the slide mechanism and the lower left side. The four rotating decoration bodies 3126, the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155, and the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175 in which the left side rotation decoration body 3153 and the right side rotation decoration body 3173 are raised by the lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171. The left and right sub-side rotating decorative bodies 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 rotate and the like can be shown to the player so that the player can see the central movable unit 3125 (four Rotating decorative body 3126), left side rotating decorative body 3153 and right side rotation Decorative body 3173, and it is possible to focus on the left Sabusaido rotary decoration member 3155 and the right Sabusaido rotating decorative body 3175 and the like, it is possible to entertain the movable effects by them.

  Further, when the lower center elevating base 3121 is located at the lower end, the lower rear center ornament 3122 emits light and the lower front center ornament 3111 emits light to display a downward arrow, or lower center elevating By raising the base 3121 and causing the plurality of LEDs on the lower central decorative board to emit light from the lower rear central decorative body 3122 and the lower front central decorative body 3111, a large downward arrow is displayed by light emission, or a pair of lower left side up and down By raising the base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171 and causing the lower left side decorative body 3152 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 to emit light, a larger downward arrow can be emitted and displayed. It is possible to entertain the player even by directing, and the downward-facing lighting display It is possible to guide the viewpoint of the player's downward staging operation unit 301 by the mark, it is possible to urge the operation of staging operation unit 301 to the player. Then, in the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, or the press operation unit 303 is pressed, so that the player participates in the player participation type effect. And can entertain.

  Therefore, since it is possible to perform various movable effects, light-emitting effects, and player-participation-type effects as described above, various combinations of effects can be presented to the player by combining them appropriately. Since it can make the player hard to get bored and make it difficult for the player to predict the production pattern, the player can be surprised by the unexpected production. Can be used to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  As described above, the lower front center decorative body 3111, the lower rear central decorative body 3122, the lower left side decorative body 3152, the lower right side decorative body 3172, etc. When prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 301, the effect display device 1600 provides an effect image that prompts the operation of the effect operation unit 301, an effect image that explains the operation of the effect operation unit 301, or an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage By displaying an effect image showing the relationship between the occurrence of the event and the effect operation unit 301, etc., it is possible to strongly encourage the player to participate in the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301. The production operation unit 301 can be made easy to operate, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed to prevent a decrease in interest.

[5-9b. Upper rear movable production unit]
The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114 and the like. Upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the upper part in the back box above effect display device 1600. The upper rear movable rendering unit 3200 includes an upper rear left unit 3210 attached to the upper left corner in the back box, and an upper rear right unit 3230 attached to the upper right corner in the back box.

  The upper rear left unit 3210 of the upper rear movable production unit 3200 is not shown in detail, but is attached to the left base 3211 mounted in the back box and slidable to the left base 3211 in an oblique direction from upper left to lower right. Left slider 3212, a linear rack gear 3213 attached to the left slider 3212, an upper rear left drive motor 3214 attached to the left base 3211 with the rotation axis directed in the front-rear direction, and an upper rear left A clutch mechanism 3250 attached to the drive motor 3214 and connected to the input side of the rotation shaft of the upper rear left drive motor 3214; a spur gear-like drive gear 3215 connected to the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250; A spur gear-shaped first gear meshing with the drive gear 3215 and rotatably attached to the left base 3211 A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3217 meshed with the first transmission gear 3216 and rotatably attached to the left base 3211; and a second transmission gear 3217 meshed with the left base 3211. A third transmission gear 3218 that is rotatably attached to the left base 3211 and a spur gear-like pinion gear 3219 that meshes with the third transmission gear 3218 and the rack gear 3213 and is rotatably attached to the left base 3211. I have.

  Further, the upper rear left unit 3210 is attached to the lower end of the left slider 3212 and is attached to the rear side of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the flat upper rear left decorative body 3220 extending left and right. And an upper rear left decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 can be decorated with light emission by causing a plurality of LEDs on the upper rear left decorative substrate to emit light.

  The upper rear left unit 3210 can raise and lower the upper rear left decorative body 3220 via the rack gear 3213 by driving the upper rear left drive motor 3214.

  The upper rear right unit 3230 of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is not shown in detail, but is attached to the right base 3231 mounted in the back box and slidable to the right base 3231 in an oblique direction from the upper right to the lower left. The right slider 3232, the linear rack gear 3233 attached to the right slider 3232, the upper rear right drive motor 3234 attached to the right base 3231 with the rotation axis directed in the front-rear direction, and the upper rear right drive. A clutch mechanism 3250 attached to the motor 3234 and connected to the input side of the rotating shaft of the upper rear right drive motor 3234; a spur gear-like drive gear 3235 connected to the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250; A spur gear-shaped first gear meshing with the gear 3235 and rotatably attached to the right base 3231 A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3237 meshed with the first transmission gear 3236 and rotatably attached to the right base 3231; and a second transmission gear 3237 meshed with the right base 3231. A third transmission gear 3238 that is rotatably attached to the right base 3231 and a spur gear-like pinion gear 3239 that meshes with the third transmission gear 3238 and the rack gear 3233 and is rotatably attached to the right base 3231. I have.

  The upper rear right unit 3230 is attached to the lower end of the right slider 3232 and is attached to the rear side of the upper rear right decorative body 3240 and the flat upper rear right decorative body 3240 extending left and right. And an upper rear right decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be decorated with light emission by causing a plurality of LEDs on the upper rear right decorative board to emit light.

  The upper rear right unit 3230 can raise and lower the upper rear right decorative body 3240 via the rack gear 3233 by driving the upper rear right drive motor 3234.

  The clutch mechanism 3250 has a cylindrical storage case 3251 and a plurality of protrusions 3252a extending radially near the inner surface of the storage case 3251 in the storage case 3251, and the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper An input member 3252 to which the rotation shaft of the rear right drive motor 3234 is attached, and a plurality of transmission grooves 3253a inserted in the housing case 3251 with the protrusions 3252a of the input member 3252 having a gap in the circumferential direction, A plurality of cam surfaces 3253b formed so as to be narrower from the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 projecting from the housing case 3251. An output member 325 having an output shaft 3253c to which is attached A plurality of rollers 3254 inserted between the plurality of cam surfaces 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251; a tightening spring 3255 for tightening the housing case 3251 from the outside; a housing case 3251; The main body housing 3256 attached to the left base 3211 or the right base 3231 and the housing concave portion 3256a of the main body housing 3256 are closed, and the output of the output member 3253 is provided. A lid member 3257 through which the shaft 3253c passes, and a bearing 3258 attached to the lid member 3257 and through which the output shaft 3253c is inserted are provided (see FIGS. 114A to 114C).

  In the clutch mechanism 3250, when the input member 3252 is rotated by the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the plurality of protrusions 3252a of the input member 3252 are positioned at the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253. The output member 3253 rotates in contact, and the driving gear 3215 or the driving gear 3235 attached to the output shaft 3253c of the output member 3253 rotates. That is, the clutch mechanism 3250 can transmit the rotation from the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234 to the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 as it is.

  Further, when the clutch mechanism 3250 rotates the output member 3253 from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side via the output shaft 3253c, the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 moves in the direction of the protruding portion 3252a of the input member 3252. Therefore, the space between the cam surface 3253b and the inner surface of the housing case 3251 is narrowed, and the roller 3254 is caught between them. As a result, the rotation of the output member 3253 is blocked, the rotation of the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 is locked, and the rotation from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side is caused by the upper rear via the input member 3252. There is no transmission to the left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. Therefore, even if a force is applied to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 or the upper rear right decorative body 3240 downward due to gravity, the clutch mechanism 3250 causes the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 to pass through the output member 3253. Since the rotation is locked, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 do not move downward arbitrarily, and a load is applied to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234. Instead, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at an arbitrary position.

  In the clutch mechanism 3250 of this embodiment, the housing case 3251 is tightened from the outer peripheral side by a tightening spring 3255 made of a coil spring, and the tightening spring 3255 and the housing case 3251 are housed in the housing recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256. Therefore, when the rotational load (torque) applied to the output member 3253 from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 via the output shaft 3253c becomes larger than a predetermined value, the tightening force (biasing force) of the tightening spring 3255 is increased. ), The circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253 abuts on the protrusion 3252a of the input member 3252, and the rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is rotated with a strong force from the output side, a slip occurs between the tightening spring 3255 tightening the storage case 3251 and the storage case 3251, and the rotational force is applied to the upper rear left. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side to be released, the roller 3254 is strongly bitten and cannot be unlocked, or the output member 3253 and the housing case 3251 are damaged. Can be prevented.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 114 (d), the clutch mechanism 3250 inserts two rollers 3254 between the protrusions 3252 a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253 b, and two rollers 3254. It is good also as a structure which urged | biased to the protrusion part 3252a side close | similar to each by the lock spring 3260, respectively. Thus, when a force is applied to rotate the output member 3253 from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side, the roller 3254 is immediately moved to the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the housing case 3251. The rotation (rotation angle) of the output member 3253 from when the rotation from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side is applied to when the lock is applied can be inserted between the inner surface and the inner surface. It can be as small as possible.

  Next, an effect using the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 will be described. In the normal state, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is located above the effect display device 1600 and behind the upper front movable effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. The upper rear right decorative body 3240 is in a state invisible from the player side. In this normal state, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 are not driven, but as described above, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 The rotation of the drive gear 3215 and the drive gear 3235 is locked via the output member 3253 by the clutch mechanism 3250 interposed between the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. The rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 do not move downward without permission.

  Accordingly, in order to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from moving downward, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 are continuously driven or moved downward. It is not necessary to provide an electrical lock mechanism for preventing the movement, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. Further, since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be prevented from moving without permission due to the presence of the clutch mechanism 3250, the game board 5 is being transported or attached to the island facility of the game hall. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 remain in the original state at the time of shipment even when vibration or acceleration is applied, and unnecessary origin adjustment is not necessary. It is possible to reduce the labor involved in installing the game board 5 and to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  In this normal state, depending on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and When the upper rear right drive motor 3234 is driven, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are moved obliquely downward toward the center via the clutch mechanism 3250, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 is moved. And the left end of the upper rear right decorative body 3240 come into contact with each other to form one large decorative body (see FIG. 112). As a result, a large decorative body extending left and right appears in the upper front portion of the effect display device 1600, so that the player can be surprised, and the player can be entertained to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Thus, according to the upper rear movable rendering unit 3200 of the present embodiment, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 (the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right Since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between the decorative body 3240 and the decorative body 3240), vibrations from the presentation operation unit 301 and other movable decorative bodies that can be operated by the player, the left slider 3212, the right slider 3232, and the upper part Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250 tries to rotate because the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are about to descend due to gravity acting on the rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, the output The roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the housing case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the member 3253. Thus, the roller 3254 is caught between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the upper rear from the output member 3253 side (upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and upper rear right decorative body 3240 side). Since the rotation transmission to the left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side is interrupted and the rotation of the output member 3253 is locked, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are arbitrarily lowered. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be prevented from unexpectedly moving (falling) via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, and the upper rear The left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 cause untrustworthiness to the player due to unintended movement. Can be avoided, it is possible to suppress the reduction of interest to delight movement of the upper left rear decorative body 3220 and the upper right rear decorative body 3240 to the player.

  In addition, as described above, the rotation of the output member 3253 can be restricted and locked by the clutch mechanism 3250 even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side are about to be lowered. Since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at an arbitrary height position via the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are various. A variety of performance patterns that stop moving up and down at the position can be shown to the player, and it is difficult for the player to get bored with the movable effects of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. Can be made.

  Since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at any position in the vertical direction via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 even if the upper rear left decorative body 3240 is stopped. The drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be prevented from being loaded, and early damage to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 due to overload can be prevented, and the upper It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by avoiding interruption of the game due to breakage of the rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. be able to.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 114 (d), two rollers 3254 are inserted between the protruding portions 3252 a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253 b, and the two rollers 3254 are respectively moved by lock springs 3260. When urging to the projecting portion 3252a side close to each of them, a roller 3254 is immediately applied when a force is applied to rotate the output member 3253 from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side. Can be engaged between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251, and the lock is applied after the rotation from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side acts. The rotation of the output member 3253 until this can be reduced as much as possible. Thus, when the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are moved downward by the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are smoothly lowered without being jerky. Therefore, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and enjoys the movable performance by the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, by moving the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 downward to bring the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 into contact with each other, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and Since the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be combined to form a large decorative body, the combined appearance of a large decorative body can have a strong impact on the player, making the player enjoyable And the appearance of a large decorative body can make it seem that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit game”) that would be advantageous to the player may occur, and expectation of the game A feeling can be raised and the fall of interest can be suppressed. When the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are brought into contact with each other and joined together, the upper upper right decorative body 3240 or the upper rear left decorative body 3220 on the other side is moved by contacting each other. However, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided for each, a force to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 (from the output side to rotate). Force 3), the roller 3254 is engaged between the cam surface 3253 b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251 to lock the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be prevented from moving due to contact with each other, and the upper rear left decorative body can be prevented by reaction of the contact. It is possible to prevent the body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from returning, and the player can surely entertain the movable effect in which the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 come together and entertain. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the clutch mechanism 3250, the housing case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, and the tightening spring 3255 and the housing case 3251 are housed in the housing recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256. 3253 is rotated, and the roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the housing case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253, so that the roller 3254 is engaged between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253. Thus, when a force for rotating the housing case 3251 is applied via the plurality of rollers 3254, a force (torque) for rotating the housing case 3251 is a frictional resistance due to the tightening force of the tightening spring 3255. Is larger between the housing case 3251 and the clamping spring 3255. Rigashoji, the accommodating case 3251 is able to rotate. Then, by rotating the housing case 3251, the output member 3253 rotates through the plurality of rollers 3254, the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253 a of the output member 3253 abuts on the protruding portion 3252 a of the input member 3252, The rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is rotated with a strong force from the output side, a slip occurs between the tightening spring 3255 tightening the storage case 3251 and the storage case 3251, and the rotational force is applied to the upper rear left. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side to be released, the roller 3254 is strongly bitten and cannot be unlocked, or the output member 3253 and the housing case 3251 are damaged. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-described effects can be realized.

[5-9c. Upper front movable production unit]
The upper front movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 115 and 116. The upper front movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the front side of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 in the upper part in the back box in front view with respect to the effect display device 1600. The upper front movable effect unit 3300 is attached to a horizontally long unit base 3301 attached to the upper part in the back box, an upper front drive motor 3302 attached to the unit base 3301, and a unit base 3301 that can be moved up and down. And an upper front movable decorative body 3350 that moves up and down by driving of the upper front drive motor 3302.

  The upper front movable decorative body 3350 is arranged on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 and a circular central decorative body 3351 that is attached to be vertically movable (downward) in the center of the unit base 3301 in the left-right direction. A pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a and a pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a are connected to each other, and are attached to the rear side of the central decorative body 3351 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A first projecting decorative body 3352 having a connecting rod 3352b, a pair of second projecting decorative parts 3353a disposed on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351, and a pair of second projecting decorative parts 3353a are coupled to each other. The second projecting decorative body 3352 is coaxially connected to the first connecting rod 3352b and is attached to the rear side of the central decorative body 3351 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A second projecting decorative body 3353 having a Yuibo 3353B, and a.

  The first protruding decorative body 3352 is formed in an isosceles triangular shape in which a pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a protrudes long with the central decorative body 3351 side as a base. In the pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a on the right side of the central decorative body 3351 is disposed rearward in the front-rear direction with respect to the first protruding decorative portion 3352a on the left side. Further, the first projecting decorative body 3352 has a link attachment portion 3352c to which the distal end of a right second link bar 3304, which will be described later, is rotatably attached to the distal end of the right first projecting decorative portion 3352a.

  The second protruding decorative body 3353 is formed in an isosceles triangular shape in which a pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353a protrudes long with the central decorative body 3351 side as a base. In the pair of second projecting decorative portions 3353a, the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the left side of the central decorative body 3351 is disposed rearward in the front-rear direction with respect to the second projecting decorative portion 3353a on the right side. Further, the second projecting decorative body 3353 has a link mounting portion 3353c to which the tip of a left second link rod 3304, which will be described later, is rotatably attached to the tip of the left second projecting decorative portion 3353a.

  In the upper front movable decorative body 3350, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a of the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a of the second protruding decorative body 3353 are formed in the same shape and the same size. Yes. The upper front movable decorative body 3350 has a left second protruding decorative portion 3353a behind the left first protruding decorative portion 3352a and a right first protruding decorative portion 3352a behind the right second protruding decorative portion 3353a. It is located and the 1st protrusion decoration body 3352 and the 2nd protrusion decoration body 3353 are comprised so that it may overlap in the front-back direction.

  Further, although not shown, the upper front movable decorative body 3350 has a plurality of LEDs on the front side, respectively, on the rear side of the central decorative body 3351, the pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a, and the pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353a. Are mounted on the upper front central decorative board, the first protruding decorative part decorative board, and the second protruding decorative part decorative board, the central decorative body 3351, the pair of first protruding decorative parts 3352a, and the pair of The second projecting decorative portion 3353a can be independently decorated with light emission.

  Further, the upper front movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction at a symmetrical position with the center in the left-right direction on the front side, and outward in the left-right direction. A pair of first link rods 3303 extending in a rod shape, and a distal end side of the pair of first link rods 3303 is attached to the distal ends of the first link rod 3303 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the distal end side projects first. A pair of second link rods 3304 attached to the link attachment portion 3352c of the decorative body 3352 and the link attachment portion 3353c of the second projecting decorative body 3353 so as to be rotatable around the respective axes, and the front surface of the unit base 3301 An upper stopper 3305 that protrudes forward from the top and restricts the rotation of the first link bar 3303 upward on the front end side, and a lower side on the front end side of the first link bar 3303 It includes a lower stopper 3306, a for regulating the rotation.

  Next, an effect using the upper front movable effect unit 3300 will be described. In the normal state, the upper front movable effect unit 3300 has the upper front movable decorative body 3350 raised as shown in FIG. 99 and the like, and the central decorative body 3351 is located near the upper end in the left-right direction of the game area 5a. In addition, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 extend horizontally and overlap each other in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 116 (a)). In this normal state, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 are overlapped with each other in the front-rear direction, so that the player can recognize that it is one decorative body. In a normal state, the pair of first link bars 3303 are in contact with the upper stopper 3305, respectively, and further rotation in the direction in which the tip side moves upward is prevented.

  In this normal state, the upper front drive motor 3302 is driven according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result lottery by receiving the game ball B into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. As a result, the central decorative body 3351 moves downward together with the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353. At this time, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 move downward while remaining in a horizontally extended state. When the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 move downward, the right second link rod 3304 attached to the link mounting portion 3352c of the right first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the left side The second link rod 3304 on the left side attached to the link attachment portion 3353c of the second projecting decorative portion 3353a is moved downward, and a pair of second link rods 3304 attached to the respective tips. The first link rod 3303 rotates so that the tip side moves downward.

  When the pair of first link rods 3303 that rotate as the upper front movable decorative body 3350 (central decorative body 3351) moves downward contact the lower stopper 3306, further rotation is prevented. A state is reached (see FIG. 116 (b)). When the central decorative body 3351 further moves downward after the pair of first link rods 3303 abut against the lower stopper 3306, the right first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the left second protruding decorative portion 3353a are Since the downward movement is restricted by the left and right second link rods 3304, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 are located at the center of the first connecting rod 3352b and the second connecting rod 3353b (see FIG. The first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the opposite side to the side on which the second link rod 3304 is attached rotate about the center) of the central decorative body 3351. (See FIG. 116 (c)). As a result, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a arranged on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 rotate so that the scissors open around the central decorative body 3351, respectively. The entire upper front movable decorative body 3350 can be enlarged, and the player can be surprised and a decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

  As described above, according to the upper front movable effect unit 3300, in a normal state, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 overlap each other in the front-rear direction. When the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is lowered, the overlapping first projecting decorative part 3352a and second projecting decorative part 3353a are rotated and opened so that the distal ends are separated from each other, The player who has been recognized as one decorative body can be surprised, and the movement of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 can be enjoyed.

  Further, the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 are moved to the central decorative body 3351 simply by moving the upper front movable decorative body 3350 downward by the action of the first link bar 3303 and the second link bar 3304. Since the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 can be rotated and rotated in directions opposite to each other, there is no need to separately provide a drive motor for rotating the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the commands from the peripheral control section 1511. An effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the display. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a for controlling the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b for controlling the launch of the game ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but the main control board is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU, main control I / O port as input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU are provided. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU incorporates a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and a second start for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. The mouth sensor 2511, the general winning mouth sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, the gate sensor 2301 that detects the gaming ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003, and the first big winning opening 2005. The first count sensor 2512 for detecting the game ball B, the specific area sensor 2512a for detecting the game ball B received in the first big prize opening 2005 and distributed to the specific area by the sorting member, and the second big prize opening 2006 The second count sensor 2513 for detecting the received game ball B and the magnetic sensor 3 for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a. 03, the detection signal from the like are input via the respective main control I / O ports.

  The main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the start port solenoid 2514, the first attacker solenoid 2515, and the second attacker solenoid are output. 2516, a drive signal is output to the distribution solenoid 2111, the status display of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I / O port, the normal design display, the normal hold display, the first special design display, the first special design display A drive signal is output to a holding number display, a second special symbol display, a second special holding number display, a round display, or the like.

  In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2511, the gate sensor 2301, the first count sensor 2512, the specific area sensor 2512a, and the second count sensor 2513 are non-contact type. In contrast to an electromagnetic proximity switch, a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general prize opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2511. And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2301 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2511, and the gate sensor 2301.

  In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters. The detection of the game ball B by the first count sensor 2512 and the second count sensor 2513 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are also used for the first count sensor 2512 and the second count sensor 2513. Further, since the specific area sensor 2512a is an important sensor related to the occurrence of the big hit game (directly connected to the player's profit), a proximity switch having a high durability and a long life is used. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2001 where the game balls B do not frequently enter. For this reason, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

  Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. The main control MPU, which will be described in detail later, when receiving various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described.) With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. This RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the payout control board 633.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, this power failure notice signal is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like controls the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls relating to payout, and performs the launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and the launch that performs the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for canceling an error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 552, a tank rail during maintenance 553, a ball guidance unit 570, and a ball removal switch for discharging the game ball B in the payout device 580 to the outside (upper plate 201) of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation.

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
The payout control unit 633a that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 633 is not illustrated in detail, but a micro that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU has a function and the like for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

  Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

  Further, detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. A command for outputting to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Or the number of game balls B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  An error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the numeral “1” is displayed, it indicates that the ball is out (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, a notification is made that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580, and when the number “2” is displayed, it means that “the ball is a ball” (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and it is difficult to rotate the payout blade 589). When the number “3” is displayed, "Specifically, the payout detection sensor 591 is in trouble based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591", and when the number "5" is displayed, “Retry error” (specifically, the fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value) is notified, and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full”. (Specifically, the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154), and the number “7” is displayed. Sometimes it is informed that “CR is not connected” (that the electrical connection has been cut off anywhere from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), and when the number “9” is displayed, Tsu that is being click "(specifically, yet that the ball number of payout non game ball B has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is received at the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining level to the ball lending operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball lending display section of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a clock signal. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing reference pulse, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and firing A ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. Then, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 for detecting whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle 182 and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will are detected. A detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing timing control circuit after being input to the firing control input circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotation position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch solenoid drive circuit generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182. In response to the input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 triggered by the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, whereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 are stored. When one ball is received in the ball feeding unit 140 and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the game ball B received by stopping the output of the constant current is sent to the ball launcher 540 side. send. Thus, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 even when the power is turned off in the power-off process. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 117, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. An effect display control unit 1512 for performing the drawing control.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
A peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. And a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each peripheral board of the game board 5 is received based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to each decoration board of the gaming board 5 The game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is supplied from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board or the drive motor of the game board 5 For transmitting to the drive solenoid, or for outputting a drive signal to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, etc. Door-side drive light emission composed of side drive data and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side or displayed on the effect display device 1600 is produced from the serial I / O port for display control unit. In addition to transmitting to the display control unit 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

  Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting positions in the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and the upper front movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5 are the peripheral control MPU. Has been entered. In addition, detection signals from the press detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit 1512 The operation is monitored.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side provided in the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 and the like. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow from the speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding backward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated. In the present embodiment, acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo) as sound information are sent to the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main frame 4. By sending a signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present an acoustic effect (sound effect) that has a more realistic feeling than before.

  In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). In combination with WDT, it is diagnosed whether its own system is running away.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, movable body driving command, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect driving board of the gaming board 5 are a plurality of serial inputs different from the display command. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The effect driving board outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 or based on the received gaming board side lighting / flashing command. The lighting signal or the blinking signal is output to the LED of each decorative board provided in the game board 5.

  Further, the effect drive board sends a drive signal based on the received drive command to the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button lift drive motor 367 provided in the door frame 3, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, etc. Or output to

[6-3b. Production display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 performs drawing control of the effect display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 displays a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that controls display of the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation of Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

  The display control MPU has a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. Control is in progress. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, its control data (display command), and A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of the screens drawn on the effect display device 1600 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in time series. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which various data is transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance for the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then displays the screen data following the first screen data. Extract from display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs the extracted data to the VDP.

  When screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The VDP employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the left and right directions of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to.

  The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the speed at which the effect display device 1600 is drawn is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when various characters (characters) are displayed on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each character is referred to as “sprite”. As a result, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite superposition sequence”).

  Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “sprite character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed by using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in horizontal 2 × vertical 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The effect display device 1600 sequentially repeats main scanning in the direction intersecting with the main scanning for setting the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels, sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front. Driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially receives one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. Output to each of the pixels. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as the sub-scan. Similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the pixels are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game contents]
The game content by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is obtained when the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 disposed in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, it passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 and is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the game ball B can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. That is, the game ball B can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game ball B abuts against the obstacle nails. The flow velocity of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates by contact of the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball B that has been driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side in front of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, The region on the left side of the accessory 2500 will flow down. When the game ball B flowing down the left area of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B is supplied from the warp outlet 2502 to the stage 2503.

  The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 and moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the center in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503 into the game area 5a, the portion is located immediately above the first start port 2002, and therefore is received at the first start port 2002 with a high probability. When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first start port 2002 or the general winning port 2001 of the start port unit 2100.

  By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center object 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, the side ball 2200 and the obstacle nail move toward the center in the left-right direction, and the general winning port 2001 of the side unit 2200, Alternatively, there is a possibility that the first start opening 2002, the general winning opening 2001, etc. of the start opening unit 2100 may be accepted. When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B that has been driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit). , And is discharged to the upper part of the gate unit 2300 through the right side of the center accessory 2500. In addition to the gate part 2003 of the gate unit 2300, this part is provided with the second start opening 2004 and the general winning opening 2001 of the center accessory 2500, and passes through the gate part 2003 with a certain probability.

  Then, when the game ball B hit right is passed through the gate part 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. If the lottery normal lottery result is “normal hit”, the second start opening that is closed 2004 is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 to 15 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game ball B is received at the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B are transferred to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Paid out.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result (for example, 0 0.08 to 20 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

  In addition, since the game ball B passes the gate part 2003 after the game ball B passes the gate part 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is put on hold until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result ends. In addition, the number of hold of the normal lottery result is up to 4 and the upper limit is discarded without being held even if the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous game state (for example, “hit”, A lottery of a special lottery result that generates “small hit” and “per time reduction (shortening of time)” is performed, and a lottery is received by receiving the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. If you win the jackpot in the special lottery result, determine the jackpot type based on the symbol random number (hereinafter also referred to as symbol random number (first special symbol random number, second special symbol random number)) that is obtained at the time of entering the ball, A gaming privilege (a jackpot game or a gaming state after the jackpot game) corresponding to the determined type of jackpot (determined jackpot type) is given in the same manner. Beginning If a special lottery result is drawn when the game ball B is received in the mouth 2004, a symbol random number (hereinafter referred to as a symbol random number (the first special symbol random number, the second special symbol) is obtained at the time of entering the ball. Random number) is determined based on the small hit type, and a game bonus (small hit game or small hit game) corresponding to the determined type small hit (determined small hit type) is entered into a specific area The jackpot game executed in this case, the game state after the jackpot game) are given, and the lottery special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, special fluctuation time). It is also suggested to the player that the game ball B is received by receiving the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. , 14 "Short-range big hit B)", "5R short-term big hit (A 5R short-term big hit A, 5R short-time big hit B)", etc., and the small hit type is "5R small hit (no per V) (5R small hit A1, 5R small Per B1) ”,“ 5R small per minute (per hour at V short) (A2 per 5R small, B2 per 5R small) ”,“ 14R small per per (short per V time per A) (14R small per A, 14R small per B) ”, etc. As will be described in detail later, “5R small hits A2, B2” and “14R small hits A, B” are set as small hits that make it easy for a game ball to enter a specific area. For “5R small hits A1, B1”, a small hit that makes it difficult to enter a game ball into a specific area is set compared to “5R small hits A2, B2” and “14R small hits A, B”. Has been.

  The special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game balls B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is the special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the elapse of the special variation time, the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 is in a state where the game ball B can be received in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the first grand prize port 2005 or the second major prize port 2006 when the first grand prize port 2005 or the second grand prize port 2006 is in the open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Thus, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580. Accordingly, when the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 can accept the game ball B, the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 accepts the game ball B. The game ball B can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the first big prize opening 2005 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, for 1.8 seconds). The opening / closing pattern to be closed is executed a predetermined number of times (once in this embodiment). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, or when a game ball won in the first big prize opening 2005 in the small hit game enters a specific area, the first big prize winning 2005 or the second big prize win. A predetermined long time (28.5 seconds in this example) has elapsed after the mouth 2006 is open to accept the game ball B, or to the first grand prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006. An open / close pattern that closes the game ball B in an unacceptable state when one of the conditions for accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B is satisfied (a single open / close pattern is referred to as one round) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 5 rounds for “5R jackpot” and 14 rounds for “14R jackpot” are repeated for each player, and an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player by allowing the player to win a prize (jackpot game) Is generated.

  In the present embodiment, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are indicated until the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is suggested. When the game ball B is accepted, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. The number of reserved special lottery results to be held is up to four for each of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and for more than that, the first start port 2002 and the second start port Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not put on hold and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of the hold. If a special lottery result drawn by accepting the game balls B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is suggested, the suggested special lottery result must be “big hit” and “small hit”. For example, the start condition for the lottery of the next special lottery result is satisfied, and if there is a special lottery result held in the unexecuted state on the main control board 1310, the special lottery result with the highest digestion rank It will be digested (executed).

  This special lottery result suggestion (variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol)) is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result based on the combination of the LEDs that are lit, after a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on / off and blinked for a predetermined time. For example, if the special lottery result is “big hit”, the LED is turned on with a combination according to the big hit type (big hit symbol). If the special lottery result is “small hit”, the LED is turned on with a combination according to the small hit type If the special lottery result is “lost”, the special lottery result is suggested by turning on the LEDs in a combination different from the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol (losing symbol).

  On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and suggests a special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner after changing each pattern row in a state where three pattern rows (decorative symbols) composed of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. The displayed pattern sequence (decorative pattern) is sequentially stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, each symbol row is changed in a state where three symbol rows composed of a plurality of decorative symbols are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. After that, the symbol strings that are variably displayed are sequentially stopped and displayed. At this time, each symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the decorative symbols of the three symbol rows that are stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three symbol sequences are stopped and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is selected. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  In addition, in the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbol variation display stops in the order of the left column → the right column → the middle column as viewed from the player side. A reach state is formed when the same decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed in a row. In the present embodiment, among the plurality of symbol columns, the left column is the first stop column, the right column is the second stop column, the middle column is the third stop column, and the left and right columns form a reach state. It becomes.

  Here, the “temporary stop display” can appear during a period in which the special symbol is maintained in the fluctuation state in the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, This is a state in which a specific decorative design is displayed in a swinging fluctuation state within the display area of the effect display device 1600. On the other hand, the “definite stop display” can appear when the special symbol is stopped on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 or after that, This is a state in which any decorative design is stopped without fluctuation in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern string fluctuates and the confirmed image is changed). The time until display is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time. Further, when a time (fluctuation time) indicating a special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 elapses, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmits a stop display command to a peripheral control board 1510 described later. The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) does not completely stop the effect suggesting the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 until a stop display command is received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) (for example, (Sway fluctuation display), the effect that suggests the special lottery result is stopped (determined display) based on receiving the stop display command.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type effect, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate or vibrate the rotation operation unit 302, assist the rotation operation, or inhibit the rotation operation. The press operation unit 303 can be raised and made conspicuous by 367, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided in the door frame 3, each decoration board provided in the game board 5, the lower movable effect unit 3100 of the front effect unit 2600 and the rear unit 3000, the upper rear Using the movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like as appropriate, it is possible to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, and the like, and the player can be entertained by various effects. It can suppress that the interest with respect to falls.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when the player should perform an operation that should be mistaken or not, the correct operation is performed. To that effect to the player. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is requested, when the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operating unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. That effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the front effect unit of the front unit 2000 on the game board 5 according to the selected lottery result. 2600, the lower movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc. can be used as appropriate to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc. Various effects can also entertain the player, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

  As described above, when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol, a big hit game that allows the player to win a prize is performed on the main control board 1310. When the big hit game is executed, first, an opening period in which an opening effect indicating the start of the big hit game is performed is generated. When the opening period is over, the first grand prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are limited to a predetermined number of rounds (14 rounds in the present embodiment) determined in advance according to the determined jackpot type. Is opened (the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are in a state where the game ball B can be received), and a round game is performed. One round game is until the first grand prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are opened and closed a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, once), and the first grand prize is won during one round game. Until a specified number (the upper limit number of winnings: 10 balls in this example) of game balls B wins in the mouth 2005 or the second major winning opening 2006, or a specified time (round game time: 28.5 seconds in this example) ) Until it elapses. In the round game, a round effect is performed. Then, when the round game of the specified number of rounds is finished, an ending period (about 5 seconds in the present embodiment) in which an ending effect indicating the end of the big hit game is generated is generated. The

  When the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) stops at the small hit symbol, a small hit game that allows the player to win a prize is performed on the main control board 1310. When executing the small hit game, first, an opening period in which an opening effect indicating the start of the small hit game is performed is generated. When the opening period ends, the first grand prize opening 2005 is opened (the first big prize opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball B can be received). In the embodiment, the upper limit is set to 1). During a single open game, the specified number of game balls B (the maximum number of wins: 10 balls in this example) is won in the first grand prize opening 2005 or until the specified time (open game time: in this example). 1.8 seconds). In the opening game, an opening effect is performed. When the specified number of open games is over, an ending period (about 5 seconds in the present embodiment) in which an ending effect indicating the end of the small hit game is generated is generated. When the ending period ends, Is terminated.

  Further, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, the big hit game may be continuously generated after the small hit game is ended. Although not shown, the first grand prize opening 2005 is provided with a distribution member that distributes the game balls won in the first big prize opening 2005 into a specific area and a discharge area, and when a small hit game is started, a distribution solenoid is provided. 2111 operates in a predetermined operation mode. When the game ball B wins the first big prize opening 2005 in the small hit game, and the winning game ball B is distributed to the specific area inside by the sorting member and detected by the specific area sensor 2512a. A round game is performed in which the second big prize opening 2006 is opened up to a predetermined number of rounds (15 rounds in the present embodiment) determined in advance according to the determined small hit type. Therefore, in the above ending effect at the end of the small hit game, not only the end of the small hit game is shown, but the game ball B distributed by the distribution member is a specific area inside the first big prize opening 2005 It is also indicated whether or not the sensor 2512a is detected, that is, whether or not the big hit game is continued from the small hit game. In addition, when the big hit game is continuously generated after the end of the small hit game, the small hit game in which the first big prize opening 2005 is opened becomes one round, and the number of round games including this one round Until the number reaches the specified number of rounds (from the second round to the fifteenth round), a round game in which the second big prize opening 2006 is opened is performed.

  Further, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is a part of the big hit symbol, and is controlled to the time-saving state after the big hit game is finished. In addition, in a case where the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is a small hit game, the game ball B distributed by the distribution member during the small hit game is detected by the specific area sensor 2512a. After the big hit game is executed based on the fact, the time is controlled to be short. In this time-short state, the result of the normal determination as to whether or not it is easier to win the game ball B at the second start port 2004 is derived as compared to a non-time-short state (such as a normal game state) in which the time-short state has not occurred. In addition to shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation to be performed, the second start opening 2004 is opened and closed with an opening pattern different from the non-time-saving state when the normal symbol is won in the normal determination (time-saving control). .

  In the present embodiment, in the case of winning in a non-time-saving state, the opening pattern A in which the second start port 2004 opens and closes in a short-open mode (in this example, 0.05 seconds) is performed, while the time-saving time is set. In the case of winning in the state, the opening pattern B in which the second start port 2004 is opened and closed in a long opening mode (1.5 seconds in this example) is performed. In other words, the second start port 2004 is set to operate in an advantageous manner for the player in the short-time state, as compared with the non-short-time state, which has a longer opening / closing time corresponding to one ordinary map. For this reason, in the short-time state, compared to the non-short-time state, the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the second starting port 2004 is easy to open and close, and when the player makes a right turn, the game is given to the second starting port 2004. The sphere B is accepted and the normal symbol variation according to the normal determination is easily performed. The determination as to whether or not the time is short is made on the basis of when the normal symbol change executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped, specifically, when the normal symbol change is stopped. If it is in the short time state, even if it is in the short time state at the start of normal symbol fluctuation, the opening pattern A that opens and closes the second starting port 2004 in a short open mode (in this example, 0.05 seconds) is executed, and the normal symbol is executed. In the case of a short time state when the fluctuation is stopped, an opening pattern B that opens and closes the second start port 2004 in a long open mode (1.5 seconds in this example) even if it is a non-short time state at the start of the normal symbol fluctuation. Executed.

  According to the above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, if the player hits the right hand in the short-time state and continues to make a right turn, there is a possibility that the game ball B can be received by the second starting port 2004. There is a high probability that the game ball B is received in the second start port 2004). On the other hand, in the case of a non-time-saving state, when the player wins the normal game, it is difficult for the game ball B to be received at the second starting port 2004. For this reason, in the non-short-time state, the change display of the first special symbol is executed mainly based on the reception of the game ball B to the first start port 2002, and in the short-time state, the game ball B is mainly displayed to the second start port 2004. The variable display of the second special symbol based on the acceptance is executed.

  In addition, in the time-saving state according to this embodiment, the sum of the symbol variation of the first special symbol and the symbol variation of the second special symbol is predetermined after the jackpot game executed when the 14R hourly jackpot is won. When the number of times (100 times in this example: number of time reductions) is executed, the symbol change of the first special symbol is repeated a predetermined number of times after the end of the jackpot game executed when winning the short-time state A and the 5R short-time jackpot There is a time-short state B which is executed when the symbol is executed (5 times in this example: the number of time reductions) or the symbol variation of the second special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 1 time: the number of time reductions). In addition, after the big hit game executed when 5R small hit (V time short big hit) is won, it is controlled to the time-short state B, and the big hit game executed when 14R small hit (V time short big hit) is won. After completion, control is made to the time-shortening state A.

  As described above, in the non-short-time state, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed mainly based on the reception of the game ball B to the first start port 2002, and in the short-time state, the game ball B mainly to the second start port 2004 is executed. The variation display of the second special symbol based on the acceptance of is performed. Also, in the time-saving state B that is executed when winning the 5R time emergency jackpot out of the time-saving state, the number of symbol fluctuations (number of time reductions) that can be executed during the time-shortening state B is set to 5 times in the first special symbol. On the other hand, in the second special symbol, it is set to one time, and the number of times (number of time reductions) is made different.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the second special symbol based on the start winning at the second start port 2004 is more than the case where the variation display of the first special symbol based on the start winning at the first start port 2002 is executed. When the change display is executed, the player is in an advantageous state. Also, in the time-saving state B, which is executed when winning the 5R time emergency jackpot among the time-shortening states, when the change display of the first special symbol in which the first special lottery result is lost is executed, the change time is 7 seconds. (Excluding hold shortening control (control that sets a variable time shorter than normal (7 seconds) when the number of holds is 3 or more)), the second special lottery result is lost. When two special symbols are displayed, the variation time is 16 seconds (the second special symbol does not perform the hold shortening control in the time-short state B, which is executed when the 5R short-time hit is won among the time-short states) Set to

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when both the first reservation number based on the start prize to the first start port 2002 and the second reservation number based on the start prize to the second start port 2004 exist, The change display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second number of reservations is executed with priority (the second number of reservations is preferentially consumed over the first number of reservations). As described above, if the player hits the right hand in the time-saving state and continues to hit the right, there is a high probability that the game ball B will be received by the second starting port 2004. In the short time state B that is executed when the big win is won, in most cases, the start winning to the second starting port 2004 occurs, and the variation display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning is executed. finish.

  Next, the game characteristic in the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment is demonstrated. Eight types of numbers [1] to [8] are adopted as the decorative symbols corresponding to the first special symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment. 111] [222] [333] [444] [555] [666] [777] [888]. In addition, 2/270 is defined as the jackpot winning probability on the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side. The winning probability per small hit on the first special symbol side is defined as 3/270, and the winning probability per small hit on the second special symbol side is defined as 113/270. 251/251 is defined as the winning probability per ordinary figure. In addition, the number of prize balls of the game ball B is three for the first start opening 2002, and one for the second start opening 2004 is the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006. On the other hand, 15 are defined. Further, as the opening pattern A of the second starting port 2004, a mode is defined in which the state is maintained until 0.05 seconds elapses after the second starting port 2004 is opened. On the other hand, as the opening pattern B of the second starting port 2004, a mode is defined in which the state is maintained until 1.5 seconds elapses after the second starting port 2004 is opened. Further, “one ball” is defined as the upper limit number of winnings, which is a condition for the second start port 2004 to be closed. Further, in each round game of the big hit game, “1” is set as the number of times the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are opened, and “10 balls” is set as the upper limit number of prizes. In the small hit game, “1” is defined as the number of times the first big winning opening 2005 is opened, and “10 balls” is defined as the maximum number of winnings.

  By the way, if the stopped special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is a big hit symbol, the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize winning port 2006 is opened as a big hit game. Then, when the game ball B is received in the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 when the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 is open, the main control board 1310 and the payout control are performed. A predetermined number of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 by the substrate 633. Accordingly, when the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 is in an open state, by allowing the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 to accept the game balls B, many game balls B are received. It can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

  On the other hand, if the stopped special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is a small hit game, the first big prize opening 2005 is opened as a small hit game. When the game ball B is received in the first game winning opening 2005 when the first game winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number of game balls B are received from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. , Paid out to the upper plate 201. However, in the small hit game, the opening time of the first big prize opening 2005 is short, and in the big hit game, the first big prize wins more than the number of game balls B accepted in the first big prize winning opening 2005 and the second big prize winning opening 2006. The number accepted into the mouth 2005 is significantly less. In this way, in the small hit game, the number of game balls B paid out to the player is small, but during the small hit game, the game balls B entered into the first big winning opening 2005 and distributed by the sorting member are A big hit game can be generated by being detected by the specific area sensor 2512a, and the player can be entertained.

  Further, in this embodiment, 2/270 is set as the jackpot winning probability on the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, and when the jackpot is won on the first special symbol side, Most of them (94%) are configured to be 5R short-time hits, so the big hit (the so-called first hit) on the first special symbol side in the normal game progression process (non-time-saving state) There is a high possibility that a big hit will occur, and after the big hit game related to the 5R short time big hit, the short time state B mentioned above will occur. If the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner when the time-short state B is controlled after the end of the big hit game, a plurality of symbols are displayed to the second starting port 2004 during the variable display. The number of second holdings that are likely to lead to the small hit game execution is increased by entering a single game ball B, and after the change display, a variable display according to the second hold number is executed to execute the small hit game Will give you expectations. In other words, if it is controlled to the short-time state B after the end of the big hit game, regardless of which of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is variably displayed, the variation display time is used first to make a small Execute a stock game that increases (stores) the second hold number that is likely to lead to the right to execute the winning game, and after the display of the fluctuation, digests the second hold number that was increased (stored) during the stock game Can achieve a new game characteristic of executing a digest game aiming to acquire the right to execute the game, and suppresses the decline in the entertainment interest of the game as compared to the conventional game characteristic of simply waiting for the next big hit, regarding the continuous occurrence of big hit Is possible.

  Further, in order to more suitably realize the above-described game characteristics, in the present embodiment, the progress control in the short-time state is controlled in a unique form. Specifically, in the time-short state B executed when winning the 5R short-time jackpot out of the time-short states, when the start winning to the second start port 2004 occurs and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed In this case, the short-time state B is terminated after the variable display of the second special symbol is executed only once, but since the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with a long variable time of 16 seconds, A plurality of start winnings are generated at the second starting port 2004, and after the time-shortening state B is ended, a variable display based on the plurality of starting winnings is executed. That is, the second special symbol variable display period that is executed based on the occurrence of the start winning at the second start port 2004 in the time-short state B that is executed when the 5R time-short hit is won among the time-short states is: The second start port 2004 is set to be long enough to be able to be opened and closed a plurality of times, and as a result, a plurality of start winnings for the second start port 2004 are generated (the second reserved number is increased). It has become. As a result, even when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the short-time state B, the above-mentioned “reserving the number of second special symbols to be stored and digested using the before and after the end of the short-time state B. Game characteristics "can be realized, and a decrease in the entertainment interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the second hold number is zero in the time-saving state B executed when winning the 5R time junior high in the time-saving state (the second hold number is not stored). In addition, when the change display of the first special symbol is executed based on the first reserved number or the occurrence of a new start winning at the first start opening 2002, the change display of the first special symbol is performed once. Without shortening the time-short state B, the time-short state B is continued even after the first variable display of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol in the time-short state B where the variable display of the second special symbol is not performed. The time-short state B is configured to be terminated after the special symbol variation display is executed a maximum of 5 times. As a result, the first special case is disadvantageous as compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed because there is no second reserved number in the time reduction state B which is executed in the case of winning the 5R time emergency hit among the time reduction states. The special symbol variation display is executed only once, and is disadvantageous for the player as compared with the case where the short-time state B is terminated after the second special symbol variation display (for example, the second special symbol is the first special symbol). Despite the fact that it is easier to win a small win than this, it is possible to avoid the disadvantage that the player cannot receive the right of one lottery of the second special symbol), and such a disadvantage occurs. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is configured such that after the variable display of the first special symbol is executed up to five times in the short time state B when the variable display of the second special symbol is not performed, the short time state B is terminated. Therefore, after the start of the time reduction state B, the time reduction state B continues even if all the four reserved numbers of the first special symbol that have already been stored are digested. For this reason, even if the user leaves the seat after the start of the short-time state B, it is possible to experience the above-described game characteristics, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by leaving the seat.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed once, even if the variation display of the first special symbol has not reached five times, the variation of the second special symbol is performed once. The time reduction state B is configured to end with the display. In other words, one symbol variation of the second special symbol in the time-short state B also functions as a limiting means for forcibly terminating the time-short state B that can occur over a plurality of variation displays on the first special symbol side. Since the time-short state B is not easily lengthened and can be prevented from being excessively advantageous to the player, it is possible to more suitably realize the above game characteristics.

  In the time-saving state B that is executed when the 5R time-short hit is won among the time-saving states, the condition (number of time reductions) for ending the time-saving state B is not limited to the above, but at least the second special symbol For example, the first special symbol may be displayed twice, the second special symbol may be displayed once, the first special symbol may be displayed once, and the first special symbol may be displayed. It is good also as 5 times, and it is good also as 2 times as the frequency | count of a fluctuation | variation of a 2nd special symbol. As described above, when the variable display of the other special symbol is made to function as a limiting means for forcibly terminating the short-time state that can occur over a plurality of variable displays on one special symbol side, It is preferable that the number of changes in the special symbol is one.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the time variation state B is reached, the symbol variation of the first special symbol is executed five times after the end of the big hit game, or the symbol variation of the second special symbol is executed once. Although it was configured to finish, in addition, after the jackpot game is finished, programming is performed so that the short-time state B is finished by executing the total number of symbol fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol five times. It is good also as setting. For example, when adding the total number of fluctuations, when determining the end of the short time state B, the total number of fluctuations is referred to after the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol alone and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol alone. Such a configuration can be exemplified. By configuring in this way, there is a programming change from other gaming machines that do not differ in the time-short state end trigger in the first and second special symbols, or the time-short end trigger in the first and second special symbols. When changing programming to other gaming machines that do not differ, it is possible to make common without requiring significant changes such as deletion and addition of program data related to the total number of fluctuations, but the design of the second special design It is possible to realize the above-described game characteristics in which the time-saving state ends when the fluctuation is executed once.

[8. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 118A is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 118 (a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment first performs various processes as the process of step S1 on the condition that the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated. Data stored in a register or a RAM built in the main control MPU (hereinafter referred to as a main control built-in RAM) is initialized. The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. The RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses after the power is turned on, and the main control MPU receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. If it is determined, initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize various registers and data stored in the main control built-in RAM.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, a backup process is executed in which information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) is stored in the main control built-in RAM. If the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). A recovery process for recovering the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state. Further, when the initialization process is executed, the gaming state is controlled to a non-time-saving state.

  Next, as a process in step S2, a random number that is a number to be updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) used for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped, and the special symbols. Whether or not to reach as a game effect to be executed by the effect display device 1600 in response to the variable random number used in the lottery process for a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variable display control of the game Reach random number to be used for lottery processing (whether or not to produce an effect), symbol random number to be used for lottery processing to determine the type of jackpot if it is determined that the big hit based on the special random number (The first symbol random number, the second symbol random number), the random number used for the lottery process (ordinary random number) for the winning of the winning of the second starting port 2004, etc. And it includes a random number counter that.

  In this example, a common reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first start opening 2002 is won, the second start opening 2004 is won. Even in this case, the reach random number is acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number. The reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number may correspond to the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is different from the first reach determination table. You may make it vary the execution ratio of reach production by providing the 2nd reach determination table in which a determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. Note that after the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, for example, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 ms.

  FIG. 118B is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 118B, in this interrupt control, first, a register saving process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the processing of step S12, the gate sensor 2301, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2511, the first count sensor 2512, the second count sensor 2513, the general winning port sensor 3001, Detection signals from various sensors such as the magnetic sensor 3003 and the specific area sensor 2512a are input. Next, as a process in step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the random numbers, the random number counter is updated in such a manner that the random numbers (special random numbers, normal random numbers) related to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbols and the normal symbols are updated. The operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the special symbol process processing including the lottery processing relating to the display mode at the time of stopping the variable symbol variable display as the processing of step S14. Execute. This special symbol process will be described later, but here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, second symbol) indicating the progress of the game stored in the main control built-in RAM. The corresponding process is selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes a normal symbol process including a lottery process related to winning when the second start port 2004 is opened as the process of step S15. Even in this normal symbol process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game.

  When the special symbol process (step S14) and the normal symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then performs the special symbol process as step S16. Then, processing for transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM in the normal symbol process process to the peripheral control board 1510, for example, is performed.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs an information output process for outputting data such as hit information supplied to the hall management computer, for example, as a process of step S18.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S19 as the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2511, the first count sensor 2512, and the second count sensor 2513. When the detection signals of the general winning opening sensor 3001 and the like are in the on state, a winning ball process is executed to output a payout control command to the payout control board 633 so that a prize ball corresponding to the signals is paid out to the player. To do. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board 633 outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 and pays out a prize ball to the player. In this example, when the game ball B wins the first start port 2002 and the first start port sensor 3002 is turned on, “3 balls”, the game ball B wins the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 is turned on. When the second start sensor 2511 is turned on, “1 ball”, when the game ball B wins the first big prize opening 2005 and when the first count sensor 2512 is turned “15 balls”, the second big prize is won. When the game ball B wins the mouth 2006 and the second count sensor 2513 is turned on, “15 balls”, when the game ball B wins the general prize port 2001 and the general winning mouth sensor 3001 is turned on. Each player will be given out 8 award balls.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the number of reserved storages as the process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process that is a process of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that operates constantly is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and the control is finished when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24). It becomes.

  By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 mS. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process by a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 119, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is first controlled by the first start port sensor 3002. On condition that the detection signal is on (the ball enters the first start port 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and is stored in the main control. A first start port passing process such as storing in the first special symbol storage area of the RAM is executed (step S32). Further, on condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2511 is in an ON state (the ball enters the second start port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second start-pass passage process such as obtaining from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S34).

  Next, the main control MPU determines whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game is being controlled is set (step S35), and if the big hit execution flag is set, the control of the big hit game is controlled. The big hit control process (step S40) which performs is performed. In the big hit control process, the result of the lottery process (the result of the hit determination and the content of the big hit type) about the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped suggests “15R big hit” The first count sensor 2512 indicates that ten game balls B have been won after the first big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or at the first big prize opening 2005. The process of controlling to the 15R big hit game which repeats the opening / closing pattern to be closed 15 times when detected is executed.

  In the big hit control process, the opening control of the first big winning opening 2005 is performed, and then the time-short flag setting process is executed. The time reduction flag is a flag indicating that the time reduction control (control executed in the time reduction state) is being executed, and is set when the big hit game based on the big hit that is time-controlled after the big hit game is ended, which will be described later. It is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown at 130 or the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process described later. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the number of time reductions is set so that the time reduction control is ended when the first special symbol variation display is executed five times or the second special symbol variation display is executed once. That is, when the time-shortening control is started after the big hit game ends, and the condition of either executing the variable display of the first special symbol five times or executing the variable display of the second special symbol once is satisfied. The time reduction control is terminated.

  Further, if the big hit execution flag is not set, the main control MPU determines whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being controlled is set (step S36). If the running flag is set, the small hit control process (step S41) for controlling the small hit game is executed. In the small hit control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped becomes a mode that suggests “small hit”, the second big prize opening 2006 to be described later is displayed. When the second count sensor 2513 detects that ten game balls B have been won after the second big prize opening 2006 is opened based on the opening pattern A or the open pattern B. Execute the closing process. Further, when the game ball B that has won a prize in the second big prize opening 2006 and is distributed by the sorting member enters the specific area, the game is controlled to the big hit game and the first big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor 2512 detects that 10 game balls B have been won in the first big prize opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern to be closed is repeated 15 times, and the game shifts to 15R big hit game Control. On the other hand, when the game balls B won in the first big prize opening 2005 and distributed by the sorting member do not enter the specific area, and enter the discharge area, they are not controlled by the big hit game, After the winning game is over, the game state (normal state or short time state) before the small hit game is controlled again.

  The main control MPU also has a second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area if neither the big hit execution flag nor the small hit execution flag is set. On the condition that the value of “0” is “0” (step S37), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process relating to the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (step S38). On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the two special symbol reserved storage areas is not “0” (step S37), when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped A second special symbol process process including a lottery process according to the display mode is executed (step S39).

  FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first start port passage process (step S32).

  If it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first start port sensor 3002 is in the ON state and the game ball B has entered the first start port 2002, the process shown in FIG. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S41.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the first special reserved number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area from the main control built-in RAM, Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is “4” which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S42). In the process of step S42, when it is determined that the first reserved memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S43 to S43 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol on hold. The process of S45 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S44, the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM is used as the random number acquired in step S41. To store.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 displays the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S41. Whether or not the game is a big hit, if the big win is reached, the type of the big hit, otherwise the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the type type of the game effect to be executed ( After performing the effect pre-determination process for determining the pre-determination information such as the variation pattern type) before starting the variable display according to the start winning (step S45), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S42 that the first reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S43 to S45, the first special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  Further, when the first reserved memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the first held state. While updating to correspond to the stored number, a command (first reserved number designation command 0 to 4) instructing the first reserved storage number is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the storage process (step S20). It is supposed to be. The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S45). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random number acquired in step S41, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation Whether or not it is a big hit by comparing with a random number, the type of jackpot if it is a big hit, or the reach effect as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit The mode type of the game effect is specified (step S61).

  Then, the specified prior determination information (whether or not it is a big hit, the type of jackpot if it is a big hit, or the reach effect as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit, or execution According to the type of game effect to be performed), the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of reserved memories stored (the value of the reserved number counter) corresponding to the acquired special random number Set the prior judgment command. For example, in the effect predetermination process related to the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first start port passage process, the specified predetermination information and the first special random number are acquired, and the first reserved memory number (first 1 special reserved number counter value) and a first special symbol pre-determination command corresponding to the value (step S62).

  Then, a pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the special symbol command control process (step S16), and stored in correspondence with the first start port 2002 where the start winning has occurred. In addition to the number of reserved memory, whether or not the display result of the change display of the special symbol based on the start winning that has occurred is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if not, the execution display device 1600 Peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before the start of the variable display according to the start winning is performed as the game effect to be executed or the advance determination information such as the type of game effect to be executed is displayed. Can be grasped.

  When the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command. Specifically, the peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control MPU is provided with a first reserved storage area for storing pre-determination information related to the variable display of the first special symbol.

  The first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control MPU stores the first determination information indicated by the received previous determination command as the first (first) storage area. Store sequentially from the area. When the advance determination command is received when the advance determination information is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the advance determination information notified to the (n + 1) th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. And when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the first special symbol is received, the advance stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area in accordance with the received first variation pattern command Discard the determination information and move the prior determination information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area (to the reserved storage area) Shift the stored prior decision information). Thereby, the preliminary determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to be able to specify the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest preliminary determination information.

  In this way, when the variable display control is put on hold, the big display expectation degree (pseudo-winning probability) of the variable display control is maintained even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (pending state). )) In advance, for example, can be notified at a predetermined timing such as when a new output of the hold display or a shift display of the hold display according to the hold display. .

  FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passage process (step S34).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 2511 is in the on state and the game ball B has entered the second start port 2004, it is shown in FIG. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on the counter value, the second reserved memory number is the maximum value (upper limit value). ) Is “4” (step S52). In the process of step S52, when it is determined that the second reserved memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S53 to S53 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol on hold. The process of S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S54, the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM is used as the random number acquired in step S51. To store.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S52 that the second reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S53 to S54, the second special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  In addition, when the second reserved memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004, the second on-hold state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed. While updating to correspond to the stored number, a command (second reserved number designation command 0 to 1) indicating the second reserved storage number is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the storage process (step S20). It is supposed to be. The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S38). The first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for the determination. Since only the table is different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, on the condition that an interval timer described later has timed out (YES in step S85), one of the following five process processes is performed according to the first special symbol process flag. It will be executed selectively. If the interval timer has not timed out (NO in step S85), the process ends without executing the following process.

1. First special symbol in which the first special random number stored in the main control built-in RAM is read out, and a lottery process is performed on the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped based on the read first special random number Normal processing (step S80)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which the determination process of the first special symbol variation control stop mode is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control stop )
3. Variation of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and variation of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the first special symbol First variation pattern setting process (step S82) in which a lottery process or the like for the aspect is performed
4). First special symbol variation processing that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S83).
5. The first special symbol display mode of the function display unit 1400 displays the first special symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control mode is stopped. First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol as described above (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S80) should be performed in the processing of step S1 (see FIG. 118).

  FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 124, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S101. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol that is in the hold state, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the process of step S102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first design random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol is the same main control built-in RAM Read from. Next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down and the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of symbols is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol reserved storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reserved storage area a to first special symbol reserved storage area d), and a start winning prize to the first start opening 2002 is shown. The random numbers extracted according to the generation are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

  After that, as a process of step S105, a hit determination process which is a lottery process for the big hit or the small win is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) (step S106), the process is terminated.

  FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S105).

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a hit determination table and a special random number shown in FIG. 126 (A) (the first special random number read in step S102 when the first special symbol normal process is executed, When the two special symbol normal processing is being executed, the second special symbol normal processing is compared with the second special symbol normal processing (step S114).

  As shown in FIG. 126 (A), the hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM and provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). In the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, the three types of the first special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the big hit is won, and are different from the jackpot determination value. Each of the first special random numbers is matched with a big hit determination value indicating that the first special random number is won in a small hit, and 265 types of first special random numbers are matched with a loss determination value indicating that it is the loss. Associated with (probability of big hit; 1/135, probability of small hit; 3/270). In this example, in the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process, two types of second special random numbers are included in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number. 113 types of second special random numbers that match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won and 155 types of second special random numbers that coincide with the jackpot determination value that indicates that the jackpot determination value is different from the jackpot determination value. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the loss determination value indicating that the random number is the loss (big hit probability: 1/135, small hit probability: 113/270). In other words, the determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is configured to have a higher probability of being determined as a small hit than the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number. When the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start winning to the second start port 2004 is executed than when the variation display of the first special symbol based on the start winning to the first starting port 2002 is performed. This is in a state advantageous to the player.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes the hit determination table and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process or the second special symbol read in the second special symbol normal process). As a result of the comparison with the (random number), if it is determined that it is a big hit (step S115), a big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won is set (step S116), and the hit determination process is terminated.

  Further, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal process), When it is determined that a small hit is made (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the change is won for the small hit is set (step S118), and the hit determination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if neither the big win nor the small win is won, that is, if it is determined to be lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119).

  The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and the reach determination table for the short time state used when the gaming state is the short time state, and the non-time reduction used when the gaming state is the non-short time state. And a reach determination table in a state. In the reach determination table in the short-time state, the reach reaches the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number reaches, and the reach determination value indicates that 71 types of reach random numbers do not reach. Each random number is associated.

  In addition, the reach determination table in the non-short-time state matches the reach determination value indicating that five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set in the reach determination table in the short-time state reach, The reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is not reached. As described above, in this embodiment, in the non-short-time state, the reach determination value indicating the reach is higher than that in the short-time state.

  If the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the reach reach table selected with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119) and determines that the reach is lost (step S120), the fluctuation is detected. A reach flag indicating reach is set and the process is terminated (step S121).

  FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 127, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131).

  If the jackpot flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU selects the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIG. 126 (B) and selects the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. By comparing with the selected jackpot symbol determination table, the jackpot symbol as a mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol is determined (step S132).

  As shown in FIG. 126 (B), in the jackpot symbol determination table, symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) are associated with each other according to the determination results (14R hour junior college / 5R hour junior college). It is remembered. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number.

In particular,
1. Closed after opening the first grand prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor 2512 detects that ten game balls B have won the first big prize opening 2005. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 14 times (14 rounds), the game ball B is controlled to a 14R big hit game that can enter the first big prize opening 2005 (easy), and after the big hit game ends, the special symbol changes If the next big hit game does not occur until 100 times of execution, the state is terminated when the state is terminated.
2. Closed after opening the first grand prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor 2512 detects that ten game balls B have won the first big prize opening 2005. (2 rounds), after that the second grand prize opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or that ten game balls B have won the second big prize opening 2006 Opening and closing patterns that are closed when detected in 2513 are repeated four times (four rounds), so that the game ball B can enter the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 (easy) for a 5R big hit game. Control, after the end of the jackpot game, the next jackpot game must occur until the first special symbol variation display is executed five times or the second special symbol variation display is executed once. End of state 5R time reduction jackpot A controlling the time reduction state B that
3. After the second grand prize opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the second count sensor 2513 detects that ten game balls B have won the second big prize opening 2006 By repeating the opening / closing pattern 14 times (14 rounds), the game ball B is controlled to a 14R big hit game that can enter the second big prize opening 2006 (easy), and after the big hit game ends, the special symbol changes If the next big hit game does not occur until 100 times of execution, the state is terminated when the state is terminated.
4). Closed after opening the first grand prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor 2512 detects that ten game balls B have won the first big prize opening 2005. (2 rounds), after that the second grand prize opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or that ten game balls B have won the second big prize opening 2006 Opening and closing patterns that are closed when detected in 2513 are repeated four times (four rounds), so that the game ball B can enter the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 (easy) for a 5R big hit game. Control, after the end of the jackpot game, the next jackpot game must occur until the first special symbol variation display is executed five times or the second special symbol variation display is executed once. End of state 5R time reduction jackpot B controlling the time reduction state B that

  In the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number, 6 judgment values are assigned when the short hit is A at 14R, and 94 judgment values are assigned when the short hit is A at 5R. Yes. In other words, if a lottery result for a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, a short hit is A at 14R with a probability of 6% and a short hit with A at 5R is with a probability of 94%. Similarly, in the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, 58 judgment values are distributed when the shortage big hit B at 14R, and 42 decision values are sorted when the shortage big hit B at 5R. ing. In other words, when a lottery result for a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, it becomes a short hit B for 14R at a probability of 58%, and a short hit B for 5R at a probability of 42%. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the probability of being determined to be a short jackpot at 14R is higher in the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number than in the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number. When the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start winning to the second starting port 2004 is executed rather than the variation display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first starting port 2002. It is in a state advantageous to the player.

  In addition, when a lottery result for the big hit is obtained, the gaming state after the big hit game is ended is determined according to the type of the big hit. In the big hit control process (step S40), after the big hit game is controlled, a process for setting the time reduction flag based on the determination result and a process for setting the time reduction number according to the type of the big hit in the time reduction counter. Executed.

  Specifically, when it is determined that the big hits of “14R hourly jackpot A” and “14R hourly jackpot B” have been obtained, after 14 rounds of jackpot game have been executed, a special symbol (first special symbol) When it is determined that the jackpot of “5R short-time big hit A” and “5R short-time big hit B” has been obtained until the symbol fluctuation of the sum of the second special symbol and the second special symbol is executed 100 times. After five rounds of big hit game is executed, the time is controlled until the variable display of the first special symbol is executed five times, or until the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once. In this way, when the lottery result based on the first special random number is obtained as a big win, the lottery result is controlled to be in a short time state after the big bonus game is finished, and similarly the lottery result based on the lottery based on the second special random number Even if the game is obtained, the time is always controlled after the big hit game is over. However, when the big hits of “14R hourly big hit A” and “14R hourly big hit B” are obtained, the big hit game is more than the case where the big hit of “5R hourly big hit A” and “5R hourly big hit B” is obtained. After execution, it is controlled to be in a short time state over a long period of time.

  Also, if the 14R hourly jackpot A is determined, the 14R hourly jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is determined as the 14R hourly jackpot symbol A, and if the 5R hourly jackpot A is determined, the 5R jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is 5R. Decide on A symbol for time and college. In addition, if the second special symbol stop symbol setting process is determined to be 14R hour short hit per B, the 14R big hit symbol of the second special symbol is determined to be 14R hour short hit per B symbol, and if 5R hour short hit per B is determined. The 2R special symbol 5R big hit symbol is determined to be the 5R short junior big symbol B symbol.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the lost symbol when the big hit flag is not set (step S136).

  After the stop symbol determination process is performed in this manner, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs either of the lottery results (big hit type, small hit, reach lose, or lose) as the process of step S137. A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that an instruction (which may be an instruction for a stop symbol form of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) as the process of step S138, this process is ended.

  The peripheral control MPU performs display control of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command. On the effect display device 1600, a decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is variably displayed. Specifically, the peripheral control MPU, as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of stoppage of decorative symbol variation, when a big hit is identified from the received determination result notification command, the big bonus symbol (left, middle, right decorative symbol is [0] to [8] (combination of the same symbols) and when reach lose is specified, the lose symbol with reach (the same symbols with left and right decorative symbols [0] to [8]) If the combination is a combination of symbols with a different middle decorative pattern; reach lose pattern, and if a loss is specified, it is at least the left / right of the left / middle / right decorative patterns. Display pattern of the determined stop symbol when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (when the game effect ends).

  FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 128, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the jackpot flag. If so (step S141), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the big hit according to the type of big hit determined at step S132 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S142), and the reach flag is set. If it is set (step S145), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S146), and if neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, normal loss (reach effect) If it is a losing), the fluctuation pattern table at the time of losing (not shown) Is selected (step S147).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S149). Further, the main control MPU sets a variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S150). As a result, the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 performs the variation display control of the first special symbol for the variation time determined in this way, and the effect display device 1600 is synchronized with the variation display of the special symbol. Production control is performed at.

  A plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Each variable random number is stored in association with each other. Therefore, the main control MPU selects the selected variation pattern table from the plurality of types of variation pattern tables corresponding to the determination result based on the special random number and the design random number, and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. And the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is obtained from this table, thereby determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

  Further, the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example is set so as to determine the type of reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with a variable random number. . For example, 164 kinds of random numbers among 241 kinds of random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that any one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 kinds of random numbers are super reach with a low expectation degree of jackpot Determination values (223 to 240) are set as determination values (164 to 222) indicating that any one of the effects is to be executed, and 18 kinds of variable random numbers are to execute any one of the super reach effects having a high expectation degree of jackpot. ) Is set. Super-reach production has a higher jackpot expectation than normal reach production, and for players who want to generate a big hit game, the player's expectation for the big hit game will increase when the super reach production is executed. It has become.

  In the variation pattern table of this example, 13 to 60 seconds is set as the variation time corresponding to the first special random number in the non-short-time state, and 4 to 60 seconds is set in the short-time state. As the corresponding variation time, 13 to 60 seconds are set in the non-short-time state, and 2 to 60 seconds are set in the time-short state.

  When the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, it is next determined as a process of step S151 whether or not the counter value of the short time counter where the number of times of the short time state is set is “0”. If the counter value is not “0”, the time counter is counted down (step S152), and it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short counter is “0” (step S153). . As a result, if the counter value is “0”, a time reduction end flag indicating that the time reduction control is ended is set (step S154).

  If it is determined in the process of step S151 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is “0”, or if it is determined in the process of step S153 that the time reduction counter is not “0”, Then, the process proceeds to step S155. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation processing (step S83) (step S155), the processing is terminated.

  FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 129, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S171. As the process, 1 is subtracted from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is set. If it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery variation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process is terminated.

  FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 130, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S181. As the process of the above, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed, and the effect display device 1600 has the second control. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of one special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 resets the time reduction end flag (step S184) and resets the time reduction flag (step S185) when the time reduction end flag is set (step S183). As a result, the time-shortening control is terminated when a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times, 1 time, 5 times) of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed. The control of the non-short-time state is started.

  Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit game is started (step S187). The waiting time until the start (time for displaying that the big hit game is started) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Although not shown, in step S188, processing for setting the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot to the jackpot counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The big hit number counter is decremented by one for each round execution in the big hit control process described later, and when the big hit number counter becomes “0”, it is determined that the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has executed the prescribed round number. And control to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the big hit control process described later, until the big hit number counter reaches “0”, the big prize opening opening pre-processing (step S91) and the big prize opening open process (step S92) are repeatedly executed to win the big prize. When the round is ended in the open mouth process (step S92), the big hit number counter is decremented by 1 and becomes “0”. Then, the process proceeds to the big open mouth opening post process (step S93) and the big hit game is ended. The control to be executed is executed.

  Then, a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game is being executed is set (step S189). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, a big hit start command (14R short hit big hit A start command, 5R short hit big hit A start command) corresponding to the big hit type (A short hit big hit at 14R, 5A short hit big hit at 5R) is set. Thereby, the effect of the big hit game according to the type of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Also, in the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process, a big hit start command (14R short / big hit B start command, 5R short / big hit per B start) according to the type of big hit (14R hour short hit B, 5R short hit big hit B) Command).

  Further, the big hit running flag indicating that the big hit game is being executed, when the big hit game is ended, specifically, in the big winning opening opening post-processing (step S93) of the big hit control processing (step S40). Opening / closing control of the first grand prize opening 2005 according to the type (for example, after the first big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or ten game balls B are won in the first big prize opening 2005. Is detected when the first count sensor 2512 detects that the opening / closing pattern is closed 14 times or 5 times (opening / closing control that repeats the opening / closing pattern), and is reset (all rounds that can be executed in the big hit game). When the big hit execution flag is reset, the big hit control process (step S40) is not executed in step S35 of the special symbol process (step S14), while in the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

  When the big hit flag is not set (step S186), if the small hit flag is set (step S190), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 indicates that the small hit game is started. A small hit start command is set (step S191), and a waiting time until the start of the small hit game (time for displaying that the small hit game is started) is set in the interval timer (step S192). Then, a small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hitting game is being executed is set (step S193). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of the small hit. In step S191, a small hit start command (5R small hit A1 start command, 5R small hit A2 start command, 14R small hit A, 5R small hit A1, 5R small hit A2, 14R small hit A) A start command) is set. Thereby, the effect of the small hit game according to the type of the small hit specified by the small hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. In the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process, a small hit start command (5R small hit B1) according to the type of small hit (5R small hit B1, 5R small hit B2, 14R small hit B). Start command, 5R small hit B2 start command, 14R small hit B start command).

  Further, the small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed, when the small hit game is finished, specifically, the small hit control process (step S41) described later (step S401). ), The opening / closing control of the first big prize opening 2005 according to the type of the small hit (for example, after the first big prize opening 2005 is opened (for example, 1.8 seconds), or 10 game balls B are placed in the first big prize opening 2005. It is reset when the first count sensor 2512 detects that an individual winning has been completed and the closing control is closed. When the small hitting execution flag is reset, the small hit control process (step S41) is not executed in step S36 of the special symbol process (step S14), while the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the device and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

  When the small hit flag is not set, that is, when the game is lost, the interval time is set in the interval timer until the next special symbol change display is started (the time during which the special symbol stop symbol is displayed). (Step S194), the process proceeds to Step S195.

  When the processing of step S186 to step S194 is executed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal processing which is an initial value. (Step S195), the process is terminated.

    FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the jackpot control process (step S40). In the big hit control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the big hit process flag.

1. The peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is changed to the big hit game based on the fact that the display mode when the variable display is stopped is the big hit symbol. Waiting until the next round is started, or waiting until the next round is started Preliminary winning opening opening pre-processing (step S91)
2. Based on the fact that the special symbol variation display stop mode has become a big hit symbol, the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are controlled to be opened, or the next round is started. The first grand prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are controlled to be opened, and the first grand prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or after the first Processing for opening a big prize opening to be closed when the first count sensor 2512 or the second count sensor 2513 detects that ten game balls B have won the big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 (step S92)
3. The big winning opening opening post-process that waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the big hit game is over when all rounds are over (step S93).

  The jackpot process flag is operated to indicate that the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (step S91) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 118). Further, in the process for opening the big prize opening (step S92), a big hit round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is issued at the start of the round for controlling the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 to the open state. At the end of the round for controlling the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 to the closed state, a big hit round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The jackpot round start command and jackpot round end command are commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and a jackpot game effect according to the number of rounds designated by the jackpot round start command and jackpot round end command is displayed. It is executed by a device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker, and the like.

  FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hitting control process (step S41). In the small hit process, one of the following two process processes is selectively executed according to the small hit process flag.

1. Small hit start process for executing a setting process for starting a small hit game (step S400)
2. Small hit-medium processing for monitoring the entry and release time of the game ball B during the small hit game (step S401)

  Note that the small hitting process flag is operated to indicate that the small hitting start process (step S400) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 118). In addition, when the entry of the game ball B into the specific area is detected in the small hit processing, the big hit execution flag is set and the number of rounds that can be executed in the big hit game corresponding to the type of the small hit (5R small) If the win is 4 rounds and 14R is a small hit, 13 rounds) are set in the big hit number counter, and the process is terminated. Thereby, the big hit game is started following the small hit game.

  FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol process (step S15).

  Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2301 is in an on state and the game ball B has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. In step S802, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs a gate-passing process such as acquiring a normal random number of normal symbols from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol storage area of the RAM. Run.

  Next, in the normal symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. A normal symbol normal process in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read out, and a lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is performed based on the read normal random number (step S803).
2. Normal symbol variation pattern determination processing (step S804) in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the ordinary symbol random number.
3. Normal symbol variation process that waits until the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S805).
4). The normal symbol display mode of the function display unit 1400 displays the normal symbol variation control mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the normal symbol variation control stop mode. Normal symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of symbols (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is a mode suggesting “per game”, a process for controlling the game ball B to be received at the second starting port 2004 is performed. Normal electric accessory release process to be executed (step S807)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 118).

  FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate section passage processing (step S802).

  Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2301 is in an on state and the game ball B has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. In step S811, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value by the normal hold number counter indicating the number of normal random numbers stored in the normal symbol hold storage area from the RAM of the main control MPU. . Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved symbols of the normal symbol is “4” which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S811, when it is determined that the number of stored normal symbol symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed to newly put the normal symbol variable display control into the held state. Will be processed. That is, first, as the processing of step S812, the normal holding number counter is incremented (added by 1). In step S813, the normal random number and the normal variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, in step S814, each random number obtained in this way is stored in the normal symbol storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal reservation counter in the RAM area of the main control MPU.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S811 that the number of normal symbols held is the maximum value, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly held. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S812 to S814 (not acquiring the normal random number and the normal variable random number from the random number counter), the normal symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  In addition, as a gate part passage process (step S802), you may make it like another example described below. For example, if the detection signal from the gate sensor 2301 is on and it is determined that the game ball B has passed through the gate unit 2003, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 firstly The ordinary random number and the usual variable random number are acquired from the random number counter and stored in the temporary storage area. After that, the counter value by the above-mentioned normal holding number counter is obtained from the RAM of the main control MPU, and based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the holding number of normal symbols is “4” which is the maximum value. Do. When it is determined that the number of stored normal symbols is not the maximum value, the normal number of counters is incremented (add 1) so that the variable symbol display control of the normal symbols is newly held. Next, the previously obtained ordinary random number, the ordinary variable random number (the ordinary random number, the ordinary variable random number stored in the temporary storage area) are stored in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU. Are stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal holding number counter. On the other hand, as a result of obtaining the counter value by the normal reserved number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU, when it is determined that this counter value is “4” which is the maximum value (the number of reserved symbols of the normal symbol is If it is the maximum value), the previously acquired ordinary random number and the ordinary figure variable random number are discarded without being stored in the ordinary symbol holding storage area, and the obtained ordinary symbol fluctuation display control is newly performed. It is good also as preventing it from being suspended.

  FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal process (step S803).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 135, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs the process of step S821. It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is the variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is then processed as step S822. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the symbol display mode (for example, ordinary random numbers, ordinary variable random numbers) is read from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, the normal reserved number counter is counted down, and when the variable symbol variable display stored in each storage area of the main control MPU RAM is stopped. The random number (ordinary random number, ordinary variable random number) related to the display mode is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted in accordance with the passage of the game ball B to the gate unit 2003 are counted from the first (first) area. Store in order. When random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, the random numbers extracted to the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area And when the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage is read out. Various random numbers stored in the area are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. Thereby, the order in which the suspension of the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable symbol control can be released in order from the earliest suspension (the first occurrence). .

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the common figure determination table shown in FIG. 136A with the ordinary random number read in step S822 (step S828).

  A universal hit determination table shown in FIG. 136 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU. Then, in the per-standard-judgment determination table that is referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, the above-mentioned normal random numbers are set so that all ten types of normal random numbers are consistent with the per-standard-judgment determination value indicating that the common-rank is won. Is associated. In other words, in this example, when the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003, the winning combination is always won.

  When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the normal symbol determination table with the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing and determines that it is normal symbol (step S829), A universal symbol flag indicating that the variation is won per universal symbol is set (step S830), and the normal symbol variation control stop mode (ordinary symbol stop symbol) is determined as the regular symbol symbol. (Step S831). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S829 that the normal symbol is not hit, the normal symbol losing symbol is determined as the mode (the normal symbol stop symbol) when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped (step S833).

  Then, after the lottery process for the normal symbol is performed in this way, as the process of step S834, the lottery result (indicating either one of the usual symbols or the loss) is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Sets the common figure determination result notification command corresponding to each result. After that, when the above-described normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804) as the process of step S835, this process is terminated.

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation pattern determination process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 137, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has the time flag set. If this is the case (step S841), the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for time reduction is selected (step S842), and if the time reduction flag is set (step S841), the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for non-time reduction is selected. (Step S843).

  Then, by comparing the selected ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table with the ordinary symbol variation random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal process, a variation pattern (ordinary symbol variation pattern) to be executed is determined (step S844). ), A normal symbol variation display command of the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 by setting a general symbol variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 of the start of the normal symbol variation with the determined normal symbol variation pattern. Is started (step S845).

  Further, when the main control MPU determines the usual figure fluctuation pattern, the main control MPU sets the usual figure fluctuation time corresponding to the decided common figure fluctuation pattern in the usual figure fluctuation timer (step S846). As a result, the effect control is performed on the normal symbol display (the normal symbol variation display) of the function display unit 1400 for the usual symbol variation time corresponding to the determined ordinary symbol variation pattern.

  Further, in the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for the non-short-time operation of this example, 20 seconds is set as the ordinary symbol variation time. On the other hand, the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for the short time in this example is 0.8 seconds as the normal symbol variation time so that the normal symbol variation time is shorter than the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for the non-temporal time variation. Is set. The normal symbol variation pattern determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

  When the normal symbol variation display control is started, when the above-described normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the normal symbol variation process (step S805) as the processing of step S847, The process ends.

  FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol variation process (step S805). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 138, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs the process of step S851. In step S846, the normal time change timer set with the normal time change time is decremented by one. If it is determined that the normal symbol variation time timer is 0, that is, that the variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (step S852), the process proceeds to step S853. That is, in the process of step S853, when the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S806), this process is terminated.

  FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol stop process (step S806).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 139, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs the process of step S861. The display control for displaying the stop symbol of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol normal processing on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed, and the derivation display of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is notified. The usual stop display command is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S862).

  And then, when the above-mentioned normal game hit flag is set (step S863), the second start port corresponding to the current game state using the normal game hit release pattern table shown in FIG. 136 (B). A release pattern 2004 is set (step S864).

  Specifically, if the second start port 2004 is controlled to be in a non-time-short state at the start of opening, the open pattern A is set as the open pattern of the second start port 2004. That is, if the second start port 2004 is controlled to be in a non-time-saving state at the start of opening, the second start port 2004 is opened and closed when a lottery result based on a normal drawing is obtained by a lottery based on a normal random number. An opening pattern A in which the start port solenoid 2514 is turned on and the second start port 2004 opens and closes in a short open mode (in this example, 0.05 seconds) is executed. Thereby, when the opening pattern A is executed as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004, the time for the second starting port 2004 to open is short, and the game ball is in a state where the second starting port 2004 is in the open state. Is difficult to enter. In other words, even when the second start port 2004 is opened and closed during the non-time-short state, the game ball hardly enters.

  On the other hand, if the opening time of the second start port 2004 is controlled to be in a short time state, the open pattern B is set as the open pattern of the second start port 2004. That is, if the second start port 2004 is controlled to be in a non-time-saving state at the start of opening, the second start port 2004 is opened and closed when a lottery result based on a normal drawing is obtained by a lottery based on a normal random number. The opening pattern B in which the start opening solenoid 2514 is turned on and the second start opening 2004 is opened and closed in a long open mode (1.5 seconds in this example) is executed. As a result, when the opening pattern B is executed as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004, it takes a long time for the second starting port 2004 to perform the opening operation, and when the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, the game ball Can enter the ball.

  When the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004 is set, next, as a process of step S885, a start command per game showing that the game per game is started is set, and the normal symbol process flag is set to the normal electric accessory. When the process is updated so as to shift to the release process (step S866), this process ends. Note that the start-per-common-command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect of the per-normal-game game in accordance with the type of per-normal instructed by the start per-multi-command is displayed on the effect display device 1600, It can be executed by a lamp, LED, speaker, or the like.

  In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has updated the normal symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the normal symbol normal process which is the initial value when the universal symbol flag is not set in step S864. At this point (step S868), this process ends.

  FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary electric accessory release process (step S807).

  If it is determined in step S871 that the second start port 2004 is in an open state, as shown in FIG. 140, the main control board 1310 has a main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. If the predetermined time (the opening time of the second starting port 2004 in the opening pattern set in step S865) has elapsed since the control MPU controlled the second starting port 2004 to the open state (step S872), the control MPU When the start port solenoid 2514 for opening and closing the start port 2004 is turned off and the second start port 2004 is controlled to be closed (step S873), this process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S871 that the second start port 2004 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 140, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has the second start port 2004. Is the timing for opening the second start port 2004 (step S874), the start port solenoid 2514 for opening and closing the second start port 2004 is turned on to control the second start port 2004 to the open state (step S875). The process ends.

  If it is not time to open the second starting port 2004 in the process of step S871, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 opens the second starting port 2004 as shown in FIG. When the number of times reaches a predetermined number (the number of times of opening of the second start port 2004 in the opening pattern set in step S865) (step S876), an end command per command is set (step S877). Then, when the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol normal processing which is the initial value (step S878), this processing is ended. Note that the per-game end command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the end-per-map command, the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, etc. Can be terminated.

[9. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for control performed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 141, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU performs an initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing a RAM built in the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU generates an interrupt every 2 mS and executes a 2 mS steady process. In the 2 mS steady process, a process of counting up the 16 mS progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 mS progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 mS progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 mS has elapsed. While the flag T is set, processing for resetting (setting 0) the 16 mS progress monitoring counter is executed. As described above, the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 mS in the 2 mS steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 mS elapsed flag is set in step S502 (the 16 mS elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 mS elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 mS steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 mS steady process, a process for controlling the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like is executed based on the command received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 mS steady process ends, the process returns to step S502 again, and every time the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 mS, the above steps S503 to S504 are repeated. On the other hand, if the 16 mS elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 mS elapsed flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 142 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 mS steady process executed every 16 mS in the sub-main process. In the 16 mS steady process, the peripheral control MPU executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process in step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the fact that the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by being set in the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S149 of the first fluctuation pattern setting process and step S149a of the second fluctuation pattern setting process) is received is received. Based on this, the control process related to the effect display device 1600 is executed.

  Moreover, in the sound control process of step S603, the control process regarding the speaker provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, a control process related to lamps / LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the various decorative boards 184, 273, etc. is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  In addition, the process of step S601-step S606 in a 16mS steady process is complete | finished within 16 mS. Even if it takes 16 mS or more from the start of the 16 mS steady process to the end of the 16 mS steady process, the 16 mS steady process is immediately executed from the beginning when the 16 mS has elapsed since the start of the 16 mS steady process (command in step S601). Do not execute (from analysis process). That is, when 16 mS elapses during execution of the 16 mS steady process, only the 16 mS elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 mS elapse flag is set after the 16 mS steady process ends, the 16 mS steady process is performed. To start.

  In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 mS steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop process in the sub-main process and the 16 mS steady process.

  FIG. 143 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process (step S602).

  In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU selectively executes one of the following five process processes according to the effect process flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. Will be.

1. Fluctuation pattern command (first variation pattern command for instructing variation pattern of first special symbol, second variation pattern command for instructing variation pattern of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) analyzed by command analysis process above After performing processing for controlling the effect display device 1600, LED, speaker, etc. based on the second variation pattern command for instructing the variation pattern of the special symbol), the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the processing during variation effect. Change production start process to be changed (step S711)
2. The elapsed time since the start of the control of the effect display device 1600, the LED and the speaker 921, etc. is measured, and the processing for controlling the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker, etc. is performed according to the elapsed time, and the special design (first In the process of changing effects (step S712), the effect process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the change end process when the change time corresponding to the change pattern of the one special symbol and the second special symbol elapses.
3. A process for deriving and displaying a predetermined display result based on the reception of a stop display command for instructing to stop changing the display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Changing the process flag to a value according to the variable effect start process, changing to a value corresponding to the big hit effect process if the big hit, changing to a value corresponding to the small hit effect process if the big hit (Step S713)
4). Based on the reception of the jackpot start command instructing the start of the jackpot game, the effect display device 1600 performs a process for executing display control during the jackpot game, and the effect process flag is changed when the jackpot game is ended. Big hit effect processing (step S714) to be changed to a value corresponding to the effect start processing
5. Based on the reception of the small hit start command for instructing the start of the small hit game, the effect display device 1600 performs processing for executing display control during the small hit game, and the second big prize opening during the small hit game If the game ball B accepted in 2006 is allocated to a specific area, the effect process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the big hit effect start process when the small hit game ends, and the game ball B is allocated to the specific area If not, the small hit effect process to change to a value corresponding to the variable effect start process (step S715)

  Special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) executed by the special symbol display (first special symbol display of function display unit 1400, second special symbol display of function display unit 1400) by the above processing. The decorative display variable display is executed on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display.

[10. Fluctuation control at the end of short-time control]
As described above, the second start port 2004 is controlled to open and close in the time-short state with an opening pattern different from the non-time-short state. In other words, if the normal symbol change executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 stops, if the time is short, the second start port 2004 with the opening pattern A in the short release mode (0.05 seconds in this example). When the normal symbol change executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 stops, if it is in a non-time-short state, the release pattern B in the long release mode (1.5 seconds in this example) The starting port 2004 is opened and closed.

  Thus, in order to change the opening pattern of the second start port 2004 on the basis of when the normal symbol change executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped, immediately before the time reduction state ends (for example, the number of time reductions) In the case of the short time state A of 100 times, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 in the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) in the short time state immediately before the 100th variation display stops, etc. When the normal symbol variation executed in step 1 stops and the second start port 2004 is opened and closed, the second start port 2004 is opened and closed with the open pattern B of the long open mode (1.5 seconds in this example) as the short-time state. Will be. In addition, when the time-short state ends after the second start port 2004 is opened, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable because the opening pattern in the time-short state is executed even though the time-short state has ended. In addition, there may be a case where a start winning to the second start opening 2004 occurs at an unexpected time such as after a symbol change is started in a non-time reduction state after the completion of the time reduction state, which is not intended by the game designer. Behavior (In the non-time-short state, the first special symbol variation display is mainly executed and the second special symbol variation display is hardly executed. The start-up prize is generated and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed), and the player feels uncomfortable because of the behavior, and there is a possibility that the gaming interest will be lowered.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the special symbol that is variably displayed on the special symbol display (the first special symbol display, the second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400 is stopped at the lost symbol (for example, the first special symbol display) Step S194 of one special symbol stop process), normally, “0.5 seconds” is set in the interval timer as the waiting time (the time during which the special symbol stop symbol is displayed) until the next special symbol variation display is started. set. As described above, the interval timer is referred to in the first special symbol process (step S28) and the second special symbol process (step S39), and until the interval timer times out, the special symbol indicator (second symbol) of the function display unit 1400 is displayed. Control is performed so that the variable display of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) in the one special symbol indicator and the second special symbol indicator is not started.

  In addition, when the time-shortening state ends, that is, when the symbol variation of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) after the big hit game reaches the number of time-shortenings and the symbol variation stops (time-shortening) When the last symbol variation in the state is stopped), the interval timer is set to “2 seconds” as the waiting time until the next special symbol variation display is started (the time during which the special symbol suspension symbol is displayed). set. As described above, in the short time state, after the second start port 2004 is changed to the open state, the second start port 2004 is changed to the closed state when 1.5 seconds have elapsed. Therefore, by setting “2 seconds” to the interval timer when the last symbol change in the time-saving state stops and ends the time-saving state, the symbol change of the special symbol in the non-time-saving state is started The two start ports 2004 can be changed to the closed state, and thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the start winning to the second start port 2004 after the change of the special symbol in the non-time-short state is started.

  It should be noted that the period set in the interval timer when the last symbol variation in the time reduction state stops and ends the time reduction state is at least equal to the opening time of the second big prize opening 2006 in the time reduction state (in this example, “1. 5 seconds ") or more. In addition, when the second symbol winning opening 2006 is not changed to the open state when the last symbol variation in the time-saving state is stopped and the time-shortening state is ended, the waiting time until the next special symbol variation display is started. A time similar to a normal time (in this example, “0.5 seconds”) may be set.

  In this way, when the final special lottery result in the short-time state is derived (when the last symbol variation in the short-time state stops), regardless of the presence or absence of the first holding number and the second holding number, By controlling the execution of the next special lottery (winning judgment), the time-saving control that can be continued after the last special lottery result in the short-time state is derived (after the last symbol variation in the short-time state stops) Can be terminated within the predetermined period, and an increase in the number of second reservations after the end of the time-saving control can be suppressed. As a result, the game progresses in an unintended behavior of the game designer that the start winning to the second start port 2004 occurs and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in spite of the non-time saving state. Since it is possible to suitably achieve the progress of the game in the behavior intended by the game designer (the game nature intended by the game designer), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest by not giving the player a sense of incongruity. .

  In the above-described example, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol variation executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (determination as to whether or not to end the short-time state). Although what is performed as a reference is shown, when the normal symbol variation executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started to determine whether or not the time is short (for example, the normal symbol normal process (step S803) described above) Or when the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (S804) is executed). In this case, at least the fluctuation time of the normal symbol change executed in the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 during the time reduction state (ordinary symbol change time: “0.8 seconds” in this example), and the time reduction state The opening time of the second big prize opening 2006 (in this example, “1.5 seconds”) may be equal to or longer than the total period (in this example, “2.3 seconds”).

[11. Hold notice effect and hold change effect]
In the present embodiment, the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the hold number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310. Until the hold display is consumed, the display mode of the hold display is displayed. Is changed, it is possible to execute a hold notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot for the decorative symbol change display (special symbol change display) based on the hold display. Further, during the display period of the hold display, it is possible to execute a hold change effect that suggests the possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes.

  Specifically, a hold number designation command and a pre-determination command are transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on the winning of a game ball (a start condition is established) at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. . Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, when the pending number designation command and the advance determination command are received in the command analysis process of step S601, the pending number specified from the pending advance notice determination table corresponding to these commands, that is, the pending number designation command. (Pending memory count) and pre-determination information specified from the pre-determination command (big hit, small hit, reach lose, or lose) select the hold advance notice determination table, and the determination set in the hold advance notice determination table The type of the holding notice pattern set in the holding notice determination table is determined by comparing the value with the read random number for determining the notice of holding. In addition, in the hold notice determination table, the distribution of the judgment value for each hold notice pattern is different for each pre-judgment information specified by the pre-judgment command (either big hit, small hit, reach lose, or lose). The appearance rate of the notice pattern is different.

  Further, when a game ball wins (start condition is established) at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the number of holds (the number of stored memories) specified from the hold number designation command is increased, thereby producing an effect display. One hold display is added to the device 1600 and displayed. On the other hand, when the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) based on the hold display is started (start condition is satisfied), the hold number (holding memory number) specified by the hold number designation command is decreased. Then, the hold display in the effect display device 1600 is erased. Then, during the display period from when the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 until the hold display is erased, the display mode of the hold display is displayed based on the hold notice pattern. Each time the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) based on another hold display is started (start condition is satisfied), the display mode of the hold display can be changed. In this embodiment, when the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) based on the hold display is started (the start condition is satisfied), the hold display is deleted. Even after the start of variable display (variable display of special symbols), the hold display may be continuously displayed and the display mode of the hold display may be changeable. In such a case, the position at which the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 moves before and after the start of the decorative symbol change display (special symbol change display) based on the hold display, in the same manner as other hold displays. In this case, it is possible to suggest a possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes due to the execution of a hold change effect (hold movement change effect, turn-off hold change effect, billiard hold change effect) described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 144 and FIG. 145, a description will be given of a hold notice determination table in which a plurality of kinds of hold notice patterns are set for each hold number (holding storage number) specified from the hold number designation command. The pending notice determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. 144A is a hold notice determination table used when hold 1 is lit (hold number = 1), and FIG. 144B is a hold notice decision table used when hold 2 is lit (hold number = 2). 144 (C) is a hold notice determination table used when hold 3 is lit (the number of holds = 3), and FIG. 145 (D) is used when hold 4 is lit (the number of holds = 4). This is a pending notice determination table.

  As described above, a plurality of types of holding notice patterns are set in the holding notice determination table corresponding to the number of holds (the number of stored memories). It is set how the display mode of the hold display in the effect display device 1600 changes every time the hold storage is digested by the number of storages). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 144 (A), the display mode of the hold display on the effect display device 1600 may change in the hold notice determination table used when hold 1 is lit (the number of holds = 1). No (that is, only digesting the hold display) is associated with the hold notice pattern in which only the display mode of the hold display for one time is set. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 144 (B), the display mode of the hold display can be changed once in the hold notice determination table used when hold 2 is lit (the number of holds = 2). For this reason, a hold notice pattern in which a display form of hold display for two times is set is associated. In addition, as shown in FIG. 144 (C), in the hold notice determination table used when hold 3 is lit (the number of holds = 3), the display mode of the hold display can be changed twice before the hold display is exhausted. For this reason, a hold notice pattern in which a display mode of hold display for three times is set is associated. In addition, as shown in FIG. 145 (D), in the hold advance notice determination table used when hold 4 is lit (hold number = 4), the display mode of the hold display can be changed three times before the hold display is used. For this reason, a hold notice pattern in which the display mode of hold display for four times is set is associated.

  Further, as the display mode of the hold display in the effect display device 1600 set to the hold notice pattern, four displays are displayed so that the hold display is displayed in one of white (basic color), blue, red, and rainbow color. An aspect is provided. Then, when determining the hold notice pattern from the hold notice determination table, as a result of the change of the display form of the hold display to the end, the expectation of jackpot is high in the order of white (basic color) → blue → red → rainbow color. It is set to be. That is, when the lottery result is identified as a big hit as the prior determination information, a hold notice pattern that has a high jackpot expectation display mode (for example, rainbow color) is determined with a high probability as a final hold display mode. When the lottery result is specified as the determination information, it is determined with a high probability a holding notice pattern that is a display mode (for example, white) with a low expectation degree of jackpot as the final holding display mode. Therefore, when the final hold display mode is displayed in a display mode with a high degree of jackpot expectation, the player's expectation for the jackpot game is increased.

  In the hold notice pattern, the display mode of the hold display does not change in the reverse order of the order of white → blue → red → rainbow color, and the display mode of the hold display is maintained when the hold display is digested. Alternatively, the next display mode is set to be a display mode with a high expectation degree of jackpot. For this reason, even if the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a display mode with a low jackpot expectation level, there is still a possibility of changing to a display mode with a high jackpot expectation level when digesting the hold display. The aspect can be noticed with expectation to the end.

  In addition, the hold notice pattern does not necessarily have to be changed in the order of blue → red → rainbow after the display mode of the hold display is displayed in white (basic color). Starting from a mode (for example, suddenly starts in rainbow color by the holding notice pattern number 4 when the hold 1 is lit), or changes to the next display mode by skipping one or more display modes (for example, when the hold 2 is lit) Is set to change from white (basic color) to rainbow color). For this reason, even if there are few opportunities (the number of holding | maintenances) that the display mode of a hold display changes, the display mode of a hold display can be displayed with a display mode with high expectation degree of jackpots. Moreover, even if the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a display mode with a low expectation degree of jackpot, it is not possible to predict which display mode the next display mode will change, and the display mode of the hold display until the end You can get attention with your expectations.

  Also, in the hold notice determination table, only when a jackpot is specified as pre-determination information from the pre-judgment command, a hold notice pattern that becomes a rainbow color as a final hold display display mode (hold notice pattern number when hold 1 is lit) 4. Hold advance notice pattern numbers 4, 7, 9, 10 when hold 2 is lit, hold advance notice pattern numbers 4 and 7 when hold 3 is lit, etc. Is set to be possible. For this reason, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in rainbow color, it is determined that the lottery result will be a big hit when the hold display is digested, and the player's expectation for the big hit game is increased. .

  Also, in the hold notice determination table, when a loss is specified as the pre-determination information from the pre-judgment command, the hold notice pattern (when the hold 1 is lit) is displayed in white (basic color) or blue as the final hold display display mode. (Pending notice pattern numbers 1, 2 when hold 2 lights up, hold notice pattern numbers 1, 2 when hold 3 lights up, hold notice pattern numbers 1, 2 when hold 3 lights up, hold notice pattern numbers 1, 2 when hold 4 lights up, etc.) If the big hit, small hit, and reach are specified as the pre-determined information from the pre-determining command, the red-holding advance notice pattern (holding advance notice pattern when hold 1 is lit) will be displayed. Hold notice pattern when hold 4 lights, such as number 3, hold notice pattern numbers 3, 6, 8 when hold 2 lights, hold notice pattern numbers 3, 6 when hold 3 lights It is set to be able to determine the number 3,6, etc.). For this reason, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in red, it is determined that the reach effect is executed at least when reaching the hold display, and the player's expectation for the big hit game or the small hit game is determined. Has come to increase.

  In the present embodiment, by determining the hold notice pattern at the start of display of the hold display, a series of contents in which the display mode of the hold display changes until the hold display is digested are determined. However, as the determination method, at the start of the display of the hold display, only the display mode of the hold display at the start and the display mode of the final hold display may be determined. And, when the display mode of the hold display at the start time and the display mode of the final hold display are different, at least the display mode of the final hold display before the target hold display is digested So that the display mode of the hold display changes every time when the timing at which the display mode of the hold display can change is reached. Even with such a determination method, the display mode of the hold display can be sequentially changed until the hold display in the effect display device 1600 is consumed.

  Next, a hold change effect that suggests a possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes during the hold display period will be described below. In the above-described hold notice effect, the display mode of the hold display can be changed every time the change display of the decorative symbol (the change display of the special symbol) is started (the start condition is satisfied) during the display period of the hold display. At the timing when the display mode of the hold display can be changed, the hold change effect suggesting the possibility that the display mode of the hold display is changed can be executed.

  Specifically, on the peripheral control board 1510, at the time when the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) starts (start condition is established), whether the display mode of the pending display changes based on the pending notice pattern By determining whether or not, selecting the hold change effect determination table corresponding to the determination result, and comparing the determination value set in the hold change effect determination table and the read random number for determining the hold change effect, The type of the hold change effect pattern set in the hold change effect determination table is determined. That is, whether or not to execute the hold change effect and, when executing the hold change effect, determine the type of the hold change effect.

  As shown in FIG. 146, a plurality of types of hold change effect patterns are set in the hold change effect determination table, and a hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 1) that does not execute the hold change effect, Hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 2) for executing hold movement change effect as hold change effect, hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 3) for executing counter change change effect as hold change effect, hold change A hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 4) for executing a billiard hold change effect is set as an effect. The hold change effect determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. Moreover, in the hold change effect determination table, the distribution of the determination values for each of the hold change effect patterns (hold change effect pattern numbers 2 to 4) for executing the hold change effect is the same, and the appearance rate of each hold change effect is However, it is also possible to vary the distribution of the judgment values so that the appearance rate of each hold change effect is different.

  Further, in the hold change effect determination table used when it is determined that the display mode of the hold display changes, the determination value is distributed only to the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern numbers 2 to 4) for executing the hold change effect. On the other hand, in the hold change effect determination table used when it is determined that the display mode of the hold display does not change, most of the determination is made to the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 1) that does not execute the hold change effect. The value is distributed. Thus, when the display mode of the hold display changes, the hold change effect is always executed. When the hold change effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display changes with high probability. For this reason, it can be noted with an expectation whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes due to the execution of the hold change effect.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit is four as the number of reservations (the number of storages on hold), but the number of reservation displays corresponding to the number of reservations can be displayed at the four corners of the rectangular display area in the effect display device 1600. Specifically, when hold 1 (hold number = 1) is lit, the hold display is displayed at the lower left position of the display area, and when hold 2 (hold number = 2) is lit, the hold is held at the lower right position of the display area. When the hold 3 (hold number = 3) is lit, the hold display is displayed at the upper right position of the display area. When the hold 4 (hold number = 4) is lit, the hold is held at the upper left position of the display area. The display is displayed. Also, as a general rule, when the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) is started (the start condition is satisfied), the suspension display of the suspension 1 displayed at the lower left position of the display area is deleted. As a result, the other hold indications of hold 2 to 4 are moved clockwise while being displayed in the display area.

  First, in the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 1) in which the hold change effect is not executed, when the hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 moves, it moves from the position before the move. It moves to the position of the straight line at the shortest distance.

  Further, in the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 2) for executing the hold movement change effect as the hold change effect, when the hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 moves, before the move Unlike the case where the hold change effect is not executed from the position to the position after the movement, the movement is performed in a non-linear manner, and during the movement (before reaching the position after the movement), the hold display is performed. The display mode can be changed. Also, when executing the hold movement change effect, compared to the case where the hold display moves linearly (when the hold change effect is not executed), the period until the hold display reaches the position after the movement, The possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes is high. Also, in the hold movement change effect, there are provided a plurality of types of effect patterns in which the hold display moves differently from the case where the hold change effect is not executed, and the hold display moves linearly (the hold change effect is displayed). The possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes is higher as the moving distance is longer than in the case of not executing. In the present embodiment, the longer the distance that the hold display moves, the higher the possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes, but as an example, at first glance, regardless of the distance that the hold display moves. As the manner in which the hold display moves is more complicated (for example, the number of times of crossing as the moving path of the hold display is increased), the possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes may be increased. Further, as another example of the hold movement change effect, the longer the distance that the hold display moves, the higher the possibility that the display mode of the hold display will change to a display mode (for example, rainbow color) with a high expectation degree of jackpot. It may be set.

  Further, in the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 3) for executing the hold change effect as the hold change effect, when the hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 moves, When the hold display moves from the position to the outside of the display area, it is erased once. After a predetermined time has elapsed, the hold display returns to the display area and reaches the moved position. Thus, the display mode of the hold display can be changed. In addition, when executing the hold change effect, the position after the hold display is moved as compared with the case where the hold change effect is not executed (the hold display is not erased outside the display area and moves linearly). There is a high possibility that the display mode of the hold display will change during the period until it reaches. In addition, in the hold-off change effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns are provided outside the display area where the hold display is erased, and the display mode of the hold display can change as the erase time increases. The nature is getting higher. In addition, as another example of the muffled hold change effect, the longer the time for which the hold display is erased outside the display area, the more likely the change of the display mode of the hold display to a display mode (for example, rainbow color) with a high expectation level of jackpot May be set to be higher.

  Further, in the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 4) for executing the billiard hold change effect as the hold change effect, when the hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 moves, If a similar sphere display appears in a predetermined display mode, and the sphere display bounces multiple times within the display area, then the sphere display collides with the hold display at the position after the movement, the sphere display Is a new hold display, and the display mode of the hold display can be changed to the display mode of the sphere display depending on whether or not the sphere display collides. That is, when the billiard hold change effect is not executed, the ball display does not appear and the display mode of the hold display does not change after the hold display reaches the position after the movement, whereas the billiard hold change effect is not displayed. When executed, a sphere display appears, and the display mode of the hold display can be changed after the hold display reaches the position after the movement. In addition, when the billiard hold change effect is executed, the hold display is moved as a result of moving the hold display as compared to the case where the hold change effect is not executed (the hold display moves linearly and the sphere display does not appear). The possibility that the display mode of the display changes is high. In the present embodiment, even when an effect display (effect display accompanied by a variation display of decorative symbols based on the variation pattern) is changed from the hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, An effect equivalent to the billiard hold change effect can be executed. Specifically, when a sphere display resembling a billiard sphere appears in a predetermined display mode, and the sphere display bounces multiple times within the display area, the sphere display collides with the effect display. The production display changes. For this reason, even when the ball display does not collide with the hold display, it can be noted with expectation whether or not the effect display changes due to the collision with the effect display.

  In the present embodiment, the hold notice effect and the hold change effect are performed in a non-time-short state. In the non-short-time state, the second special symbol side holding memory based on the game ball entering the second start port 2004 hardly occurs, and the game ball enters the first start port 2002. In addition, since the first special symbol side hold memory can occur, only the hold display based on the first special symbol side hold memory is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Further, in the non-time-short state, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is provided around the symbol display area where the effect display accompanied by the variation display of the decorative symbols based on the variation pattern is performed, It is divided into a hold display area in which a hold display corresponding to the number of reserved memories on the special symbol side is performed. Specifically, the symbol display area is reduced to about 80% of the display area of the effect display device 1600. In this way, in the non-time-saving state, the hold display area is divided and provided so that the hold display displayed in the hold display area can be made conspicuous, and the display mode of the hold display changes by the execution of the hold notice effect. It is easy to pay attention to whether or not to do. In the non-time-short state, the probability of winning a big hit or a small win is low, and it is difficult to expect the variation display and effect display of the decorative symbols performed in the symbol display area. Since the on-hold display to be displayed is conspicuous, it can be expected that the display mode of the on-hold display will change, and a decrease in the gaming interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the hold notice effect and the hold change effect are performed during normal fluctuation, which is a stage of whether or not a reach state is formed at the time of decorative symbol fluctuation display. Further, when the hold change effect is not executed, the symbol display area remains reduced to about 80% of the display area, whereas when the hold change effect is executed, 60% of the display area is further increased. The symbol display area is reduced to a certain extent. As described above, since the symbol display area changes from about 80% to about 60% of the display area, the hold change effect is performed on the hold display displayed in the hold display area. In the case of decrease, it can be noted with expectation that the hold change effect is performed on the hold display. In addition, when executing the hold change effect, the hold display area is widened so that the contents of the hold change effect with respect to the hold display displayed in the hold display area can be made conspicuous. It makes it easier to focus on the process of change. Note that the hold display area is provided as an area where the hold display is moved regardless of whether the hold display is on standby or the hold change effect is performed on the hold display. It is allowed that the hold display moves across the symbol display area in a part of the execution of.

  In the present embodiment, when the reach state is formed as the decorative symbol variation display during the normal variation, the symbol display region is returned to 100% of the display region as the reserved display region is erased. . That is, after the reach state is formed, the reach effect is performed using the symbol display area returned to 100%. As described above, when the reach effect is executed, the symbol display area is expanded to change from a state where attention can be paid to the hold display during the normal state, and the reach effect as the effect display displayed in the symbol display area It can be noticed.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol display area is reduced to about 60% of the display area when any one of the hold movement change effect, the turn-off hold change effect, and the billiard hold change effect is executed as the hold change effect. The rate at which the symbol display area decreases may be varied according to the expected degree of the hold change effect to be executed (the possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes). For example, in the case of executing a hold change effect with a high possibility that the display mode of the hold display will change, the rate of reduction of the symbol display area is increased, whereas the display mode of the hold display is unlikely to change. When executing the hold change effect, the rate at which the symbol display area decreases may be reduced. According to this, it is not always necessary to grasp the possibility that the display mode of the on-hold display changes by executing the on-hold change effect, and it can be grasped also by the rate at which the symbol display area decreases.

  Next, a specific effect example in the effect display device 1600 during execution of the hold change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 149. FIG. 147 shows a specific effect example in the effect display device 1600 when executing the hold movement change effect, and FIG. 148 shows a specific effect example in the effect display device 1600 when executing the hold-off change effect. Yes, FIG. 149 shows a specific effect example on the effect display device 1600 when the billiard hold change effect is executed.

  First, a specific example of the effect on the effect display device 1600 when executing the hold movement change effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 147 (A), in the non-time-saving state, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is provided around the symbol display area 1600a that occupies about 80% of the display area, and the symbol display area 1600a. It is divided into a reserved display area 1600b that occupies about 20% of the display area. In the symbol display area 1600a, an effect display including a variation display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c and a symbol background display (symbol background image) around the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c is performed based on the variation pattern. On the other hand, in the hold display area 1600b, hold display corresponding to the number of hold memories on the first special symbol side and hold background display (hold background image) around these hold displays are performed. A hold display 1601a for hold 1 at the lower left position of the display area, a hold display 1601b for hold 2 at the lower right position of the display area, a hold display 1601c of hold 3 at the upper right position of the display area, and an upper left position of the display area A hold display 1601d of hold 4 is displayed at the position of, and a hold background display is displayed in other portions. The reserved background display is displayed in a different form (for example, different background color) from the symbol background display, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a symbol display area 1600a and a reserved display area 1600b. This can be easily recognized. The display modes of the hold displays 1601a to 1601d for the hold 1 to 4 are white. For the hold 4 hold display 1601d, when the hold 4 hold display 1601d is lit, the hold notice pattern changes from white → blue → red → rainbow color (the hold notice pattern when hold 4 is lit). Number 18) has been determined.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 147 (B), at the point of starting the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c based on the hold display 1601a of the hold 1, execution of the hold movement change effect on the hold display 1601d of the hold 4 Is determined, the symbol display area 1600a is reduced to about 60%, and the hold display area 1600b is increased to about 40%. Further, as the hold display 1601a for hold 1 is deleted, the other hold displays 1601b to 1601d for hold 2 to 4 start moving in the clockwise direction while being displayed in the display area. In addition, the hold indications 1601b and 1601c of the hold 2 and 3 are determined not to execute the hold change effect on the hold indications 1601b and 1601c of the hold 2 and 3, until the position after the movement, On the other hand, the hold display 1601d of the hold 4 moves to the position after the movement based on the execution of the hold movement change effect with respect to the hold display 1601d of the hold 4 while moving in the shortest distance linearly. Move while meandering. In this production example, the display mode is changed from white to blue while the hold display 1601d of hold 4 is moving. In addition, as a change of the display mode during the movement of the hold display, for example, the color at the start of movement (white in this production example) is maintained and does not change until the intermediate point of the movement route is reached, but the intermediate point The gradation change that gradually approaches the color after moving (blue in this production example) from when it reaches the point, and when the movement is completed, the change to the color after movement (blue in this production example) is completed Etc. can be illustrated.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 147 (C), after the predetermined time has elapsed, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a variation display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c. Have moved to the hold displays 1601b to 1601d. At this time, the new hold 1 and 2 hold displays 1601a and 1601b have a white display mode, while the new hold 3 hold display 1601c has a blue display mode.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 147 (D), at the time when the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c is started again based on the hold display 1601a of the hold 1, as the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 is erased, The hold indications 1601b and 1601c of the hold 2 and 3 other than are started to move clockwise while being displayed in the display area. Also, the hold 2 hold display 1601b moves linearly at the shortest distance to the position after the movement based on the determination that the hold change effect is not performed on the hold 2 hold display 1601b. On the other hand, the hold display 1601c of the hold 3 moves while meandering to the position after the movement based on the execution of the hold movement change effect for the hold display 1601c of the hold 3 being determined. In this production example, the display mode is changed from blue to red while the hold display 1601c of hold 3 is moving.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 147 (E), after the predetermined time has elapsed, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a variation display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c. Have moved the hold displays 1601b and 1601c. At this point, the new hold 1 hold display 1601a has a white display mode, while the new hold 2 hold display 1601b has a red display mode.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 147 (F), at the time when the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c is started again based on the hold display 1601a of the hold 1, as the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 is erased, The hold display 1601b of the hold 2 other than is started to move clockwise while being displayed in the display area. On the other hand, the hold 2 hold display 1601b moves while meandering to the post-movement position based on the execution of the hold movement change effect for the hold 2 hold display 1601b. In this production example, it is recognized that the display mode of the hold display is longer than the distance the hold display has moved when the display mode of the hold display changes from white to blue and blue to red, and the display mode of the hold display is likely to change. it can. Further, when the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 moves, since it crosses the front side of the symbol display area 1600a, it is easy to pay attention to whether or not the display mode changes. Further, in this effect example, the display mode is changed from blue to red while the hold display 1601b of hold 2 is moving.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 147 (G), after the predetermined time has elapsed, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a variation display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c. The movement of the display 1601b is completed. At this point, the new hold 1 hold display 1601a is displayed in rainbow color. If the display mode is displayed in rainbow color, the lottery result is a big hit when the hold display 1601a for hold 1 is used up. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the big hit game.

  Next, a specific example of the effect on the effect display device 1600 at the time of execution of the turn-off change effect is described. As shown in FIG. 148 (A), in the hold display area 1600b, the hold display corresponding to the number of the hold memories on the first special symbol side is performed. A hold display 1601a of 1 and a hold display 1601b of hold 2 are displayed at the lower right position of the display area. Moreover, the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 and the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 are displayed in white. Further, for the hold 2 hold display 1601b, a hold notice pattern (the hold notice pattern number 6 when hold 2 is turned on) whose display mode changes from white to red when the hold 2 hold display 1601b is lit is determined. Has been.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 148 (B), at the time when the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c is started based on the hold display 1601a of the hold 1, execution of the hold change effect for the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 is executed. Is determined, the symbol display area 1600a is reduced to about 60%, and the hold display area 1600b is increased to about 40%. As the hold display 1601a for hold 1 is erased, the hold display 1601b for hold 2 is moved out of the display area and is once erased.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 148 (C) and 148 (D), after the hold 2 hold display 1601b moves out of the display area, the hold 2 hold display 1601b moves out of the display area toward the moved position. Is moved within the display area as if the light emitted from the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 is moving. Further, “3”, “2”, “1”, and “0” countdowns are displayed as the light moves in the display area. This countdown corresponds to the time when the hold 2 display 1601b is erased, and the countdown approaches “0” as the erase time becomes longer. That is, when the erase time is long, the countdown can reach “0”, whereas when the erase time is short, the countdown ends without reaching “0”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 148 (E), after the elapse of the time during which the hold 2 hold display 1601b is erased, the hold 2 hold display 1601b returns to the hold display area 1600b. The display mode is changed to red. Then, as shown in FIG. 148 (F), the movement of the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 is finished before the change display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c is stopped. At this time, the new hold 1 hold display 1601a has a red display mode, but if the display mode is displayed in red, the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 is at least reached and reached. Since the execution of the production is determined, the player's expectation for the big hit game or the small hit game can be increased.

  Next, a specific example of the effect on the effect display device 1600 when the billiard hold change effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 149 (A), in the hold display area 1600b, hold display corresponding to the number of hold memories on the first special symbol side is performed, but in this effect example, the hold display area is held at the lower left position of the display area. A hold display 1601a of 1 and a hold display 1601b of hold 2 are displayed at the lower right position of the display area. Moreover, the hold display of the hold 1, 2 has a white display mode. Further, for the hold 2 hold display 1601b, a hold notice pattern (the hold notice pattern number 6 when hold 2 is turned on) whose display mode changes from white to red when the hold 2 hold display 1601b is lit is determined. Has been.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149 (B), at the point of starting the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c based on the hold display 1601a of the hold 1, execution of the billiard hold change effect on the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 Is determined, the symbol display area 1600a is reduced to about 60%, and the hold display area 1600b is increased to about 40%. In addition, as the hold display 1601a for hold 1 is erased, the hold display 1601b for hold 2 is based on the execution of billiard hold change effect for the hold display 1601b for hold 2 being determined. To the position after the movement, the display mode is linearly moved with the shortest distance while being maintained in white. Further, when the hold display 1601b of the hold 2 moves, a ball display 1602 resembling a billiard ball appears in a red display mode in the hold display area 1600b. At this time, if the ball display 1602 appears in a red display mode, the new hold 1 hold display 1601a may change to a red display mode by executing the billiard hold change effect. The expectation of the player can be raised.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 149 (C), when a sphere display 1602 appears in the hold display area 1600b, an image replicating the central pressing operation part 303a in the pressing operation part 303 is displayed in the display area. The player is prompted to operate the operation unit 303a. Then, as shown in FIG. 149 (D), when the player operates the central pressing operation portion 303a within a predetermined time, the ball display 1602 is fired, and the ball display 1602 is bounced a plurality of times within the display area. Let On the other hand, even if the player does not operate the center pressing operation portion 303a within a predetermined time, the ball display 1602 is forcibly fired after the predetermined time has elapsed. Further, in this effect example, an operation effect is performed as to whether or not the player operates the central pressing operation unit 303a. However, at this time, the decorative time periods 1605a to 1605c are being displayed in a variable manner (in accordance with the fluctuation pattern). If the set variation time) is 4 seconds or less (when it is not possible to provide a waiting time as to whether or not the player operates the central pressing operation portion 303a), the ball is operated without performing the operation effect. The display 1602 is fired. Note that when the sphere display 1602 bounces a plurality of times, the sphere display 1602 crosses the front side of the symbol display area 1600a, so that the sphere display 1602 is easily noticed.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 149 (E) and (F), after the ball display 1602 bounces a plurality of times, the ball display 1602 collides with the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 and the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 is pushed out. As a result, the sphere display 1602 becomes a new hold 1 hold display 1601a. As a result, the display mode of the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 changes to red, which is the display mode of the sphere display 1602, before the variable display of the decorative symbols 1605a to 1605c is stopped. At this time, the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 has a red display mode. However, if the display mode is displayed in red, the hold display 1601a of the hold 1 is at least reached when the hold display 1601a is digested and a reach effect is provided. Since the execution is determined, the player's expectation for the big hit game or the small hit game can be increased. In this production example, when the ball display 1602 bounces a plurality of times, only the hold 1 hold display 1601a is displayed, and the hold 1 hold display 1601a changes to a red display mode due to a collision with the ball display 1602. Although there is only a possibility of change, when two or more hold displays are displayed in the hold display area, the ball display 1602 collides with which hold display, that is, which hold display has a red display mode. Cannot be determined. For this reason, when two or more hold displays are displayed in the hold display area, one of the hold displays changes to a red display form (display form of the sphere display 1602) due to the collision of the sphere display 1602. With this expectation, attention can be paid to the direction in which the sphere display 1602 travels.

  In the present embodiment, even when the effect display displayed in the symbol display area 1600a changes, an effect equivalent to the billiard hold change effect can be executed. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 149 (E ′), after the ball display 1602 bounces a plurality of times, the ball display 1602 collides with the effect display displayed in the symbol display area 1600a. Then, as shown in FIG. 149 (F ′), the effect display displayed in the symbol display area 1600a changes, and an effect display informing that the “special mode” has been entered appears as a new effect display. It is supposed to be. For this reason, even when the ball display 1602 does not collide with the hold display, it can be expected to pay attention to whether or not the effect display changes due to the collision with the effect display.

  In this embodiment, when executing the hold change effect, the color is changed as the display mode of the hold display. However, the display mode of the hold display is not limited to the color change at the timing when the display mode can be changed. “A predetermined additional decoration display (such as a character) may be added to the hold display”. In such a case, the big hit expectation is made different depending on the type of additional decoration display added to the hold display.

  In addition to the configuration of the hold notice effect described above, when the hold movement change effect is executed as the hold change effect, not only the color change but also the “predetermined additional decoration display on the hold display” in the process of moving the hold display. (Such as a character) may be added. For example, when the hold display moves by executing the hold movement change effect, the additional decoration display appears in the display area in the middle of the movement, the additional decoration display approaches the hold display, and is added to the hold display at the position after the movement. You may make it perform the production | presentation of whether it is performed.

  In addition to the configuration of the hold notice effect described above, when executing the hold change effect as the hold change effect, not only the color change but also the hold display is displayed after the hold display moves out of the display area. When returning to the area, “a predetermined additional decoration display (such as a character) may be added to the hold display” may be used. For example, after the hold display is moved out of the display area due to the execution of the turn-off change effect, the additional decoration display appears in the display area, and the additional decoration display moves out of the display area in the same manner as the hold display, and the hold display is displayed. You may make it perform the effect of whether the additional decoration display is added when returning to a display area.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol display area 1600a is reduced from about 80% to about 60% of the display area with the start of the hold change effect, whereas the hold display area 1600b is reduced from about 20% of the display area. It is increased to about 40%. As described above, in the hold change effect, the hold display area 1600b is enlarged, and the hold background display effect that excites the hold change effect is also executed using the enlarged hold display area 1600b. When the background movement change effect is executed as the hold change effect, for example, the hold background display displayed in the hold display area 1600b is replaced with a character set of “chance!” During movement of the hold display. May be. In addition, when executing the hold change effect as the hold change effect, for example, as the hold background display displayed in the hold display area 1600b, the “display” is displayed while the hold display is moving (erasing) outside the display area. It may be replaced with an explanatory message such as “An opportunity when the color changes!”. Further, when the billiard hold change effect is executed as the hold change effect, for example, as a hold background display displayed in the hold display area 1600b, during the period when the ball display 1602 bounces a plurality of times, “Chance if hitting a ball! It may be replaced with a message composed of an explanatory message such as “

  In the present embodiment, the effect display device 1600 is used as a display region in which the symbol display region 1600a and the hold display region 1600b are provided. However, two display devices are provided, and a display region including the two display devices is provided. However, the symbol display area 1600a and the hold display area 1600b are divided, and the start of the hold change effect is used as an opportunity to decrease the symbol display area 1600a while increasing the hold display area 1600b. Good. For example, in the case where the symbol display area 1600a is provided in a display apparatus having a large display area, and the hold display area 1600b is provided in a display apparatus having a small display area, of the two display apparatuses, The display device provided with the symbol display area 1600a and the hold display area 1600b may be replaced.

[12. Directed over winning in the big hit game]
In the present embodiment, when the big hit game is executed, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is limited to a predetermined number of rounds (a maximum of 14 rounds in the present embodiment) predetermined according to the big hit type. Is opened (the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are in a state where the game ball B can be received), and a round game is performed. One round game is until the first grand prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are opened and closed a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, once), and the first grand prize is won during one round game. Until a specified number (the upper limit number of winnings: 10 balls in this example) of game balls B wins in the mouth 2005 or the second major winning opening 2006, or a specified time (round game time: 28.5 seconds in this example) ) Until it elapses.

  In the above-described one round game, when a specified number (the upper limit number of winnings: 10 balls in this example) of gaming balls B wins the first grand prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006, the game is being opened. A certain first grand prize opening 2005 or a second big prize opening 2006 is closed. That is, when the first big prize opening 2005 is being opened, the first attacker can close the first big prize opening 2005 when a predetermined number of game balls B are detected by the first count sensor 2512. The solenoid 2515 is driven and controlled. At that time, there may be cases where the game ball B has already entered the first big prize opening 2005 in excess of the specified number (over winning). In such a case, After the first big prize opening 2005 is closed, the first count sensor 2512 detects the game balls B that exceed the specified number. Similarly, when the second big prize opening 2006 is being opened, the second attacker solenoid so as to close the second big prize opening 2006 when the prescribed number of game balls B are detected by the second count sensor 2513. 2516 is driven and controlled. At that time, there are cases where the game ball B has already entered the second grand prize opening 2006 in excess of the specified number (over winning). After closing the two major winning openings 2006, the second count sensor 2513 detects the game balls B exceeding the specified number. When an over-winning occurs, an effect using the effect display device 1600 is provided separately from the round effect performed in the round game as a privilege for the player having acquired payout of the game ball B exceeding the assumption. As an over-winning production.

  Specifically, every time a round game in the big hit game is started, a round start command for instructing the number of rounds of the round game is transmitted from the main control board 1310. Further, when the game ball B wins the first grand prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 and the game ball B is detected by the first count sensor 2512 or the second count sensor 2513, the main control board 1310 A command at the time of winning to notify the effect is transmitted. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, when the round start command and the winning command are received, the number of round games being executed, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning in the big hit effect processing in step S714. An effect based on the number of game balls B won in the mouth 2006 is executed as a round effect in the effect display device 1600. Also, during each round game in the jackpot game, after a predetermined number of game balls B have won the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006, the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening It is determined whether or not the game ball B has won in 2006, that is, whether or not an over win has occurred. If an over win has occurred, the number of times that the over win has occurred is counted over the execution of the jackpot game. To do. However, even if two or more over winnings occur during one round game, the number of over winnings is one count.

  When over-winning occurs, an over-winning effect is executed as an effect using the effect display device 1600, but the type of over-winning effect differs depending on the number of times the over-winning has occurred. Have Specifically, when the number of over-winnings is an odd count of 1, 3, 5, 7 times, a lottery effect for determining one of the characters A to E and causing the determined character to appear. In contrast, when the number of times of over-winning is an even count of 2, 4, or 6, the fixed effect of executing the character corresponding to the number of times of over-winning is executed. . In addition, when the number of over winnings is the count after the eighth, a premier fixed effect that is not caused to appear in the count up to the seventh is executed.

  First, when the number of over-winnings is an odd number of 1, 3, 5, and 7 times, the character A is used for the over-winning effect using the over-winning effect determination table shown in FIG. Decide which of ~ E will appear. Specifically, the character type set in the over-winning effect determination table is determined by comparing the determination value set in the over-winning effect determination table with the read random number for determining the over-winning effect. To do. As described above, when the number of over-winnings is an odd number of 1, 3, 5, or 7 times, any one of the characters A to E is determined. In addition, it can be noticed which character appears as an over-winning effect.

  The over-winning effect determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. Further, in the over-winning effect determination table, the distribution of the determination values for the patterns in which the characters A to E appear is the same, and the appearance rate of each character is the same. The distribution may be made different so that the appearance rate of each character is different.

  If the number of over-winnings is an even count of 2 times, it is decided to cause the character F to appear in the over-winning effect using the over-winning effect determination table shown in FIG. To do. Similarly, when the number of times of over-winning is an even count of four, the character G appears in the over-winning effect using the over-winning effect determination table shown in FIG. 150 (C). When the number of times of over-winning is an even count of 6 times, the character H is caused to appear in the over-winning effect using the over-winning effect determination table shown in FIG. decide. As described above, when the number of times of over-winning is an even number of 2, 4, or 6, the predetermined character is determined corresponding to the number of times of over-winning. When this occurs, it is possible to recognize how many times the number of over-winning has occurred due to the appearance of the character.

  When the number of over-winnings is the eighth or later count, all characters A to H appear in the over-winning stage production using the over-winning stage production determination table shown in FIG. 150 (E). Decide what to do. In this way, when the number of over-winnings is the count up to the seventh time, the character appears only in the over-winning effect, whereas when the number is over the eighth time, the over-winning is over Since all of the characters A to H appear in the winning effect, it is possible to obtain a sense of accomplishment that the number of over-winning has exceeded the eighth time while paying attention to the premier effect.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of over-winnings is an odd count of 1, 3, 5, 7 times, a lottery effect for determining one of the characters A to E and causing the determined character to appear. In contrast, when the number of times of over-winning is an even count of 2, 4, or 6, the fixed effect of executing the character corresponding to the number of times of over-winning is executed. . As a result, depending on whether the number of times of over-winning is an odd count of 1, 3, 5, 7 times or an even-number of 2, 4, 6 times, different pleasures can be given to the effect at the time of over winning. it can. That is, when the number of over-winnings is an even count of 2, 4, 6 times, while recognizing the number of times of over-winning due to the appearance of the character, 1, 3, 5 When the odd count is 7 times, it can be enjoyed that attention is given to which of the characters A to E appears.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even when two or more over winnings occur during one round game, the number of over winnings is set to 1 count. As a result, the over-winning effect is not executed twice during one round game, and the over-winning effect is easily recognized for each round game in which the over-winning occurs. Further, for example, when two over winnings are generated and the number of over winnings is 2 counts, the lottery effect and the fixed effect are not executed in order (for example, overrun during the round game after the lottery effect). Even if a prize is won, the lottery effect is executed and the lottery effect is continued), so the effect that the player was looking forward to may not be executed, but in this embodiment, such a situation can be prevented. it can.

  Next, a specific example of the effect on the effect display device 1600 when the jackpot game is executed will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (A), during the performance of the jackpot game, as the round effect using the effect display device 1600, the number of rounds of the currently executed round game, the first grand prize opening 2005 or the second big prize An effect is displayed to display the total number of winning balls (total number of payouts) for winning in the mouth 2006. The display of the total number of wins is based on the fact that the game ball B has won a prize in the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize prize opening 2006, and the number of acquisitions (the number of payouts) according to the number of winning prizes is updated (addition display) Unlike the over-winning effects described above, even if two or more over-winnings occur during one round game, the number of winnings according to each winning number ( It is added to reflect all of the number of payouts). In other words, when two or more over winnings occur during one round game, the number of executions of the over winning effect is limited, but the update of the total number of winnings display is not limited.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 151 (B), when an over winning is generated during each round game, an over winning effect is started as an effect using the effect display device 1600. First, the effect display device 1600 The effect display as if light gathers is performed from the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 provided at the lower right of the direction toward the center of the effect display device 1600. As a result, when the number of game balls B exceeding the specified number wins at the first grand prize opening 2005 or the second major prize opening 2006, that is, when an over prize is generated, the player can easily notice that, The character appearing in can be noted.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (C), in the over-winning effect, characters corresponding to the number of times the over-winning has occurred are caused to appear. Specifically, when the number of over-winnings is an odd number of 1, 3, 5, or 7 times, a lottery effect that causes any of characters A to E to appear is executed, whereas over-winning is performed. When the number of times the winning has occurred is an even count of 2, 4, 6 times, a fixed effect is executed in which a character corresponding to the number of times that the over winning has occurred appears. In addition, when the number of over-winnings is the eighth or later count, a premier fixed effect that causes all the characters A to H to appear is executed.

  Also, in the above-described over-winning effect, a character corresponding to the number of times that an over-winning has occurred is displayed using the effect display device 1600. At the time of starting, the over-winning effect is finished and the appearing character is erased. Then, at the start of the round game, the round production corresponding to the number of rounds of the round game is resumed, so that the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are not overlooked. . In this production example, the over-winning production is finished at the time of starting the next round game when an over-winning occurs during the round game, but for a predetermined time (for example, from the over-winning occurrence) 4-5 seconds), the over-winning effect is executed, and even if the next round game is started after the occurrence of the over-winning, the over-winning effect is continued until a predetermined time elapses. It may be. In such a case, the over-winning effect is always executed for a predetermined time due to the occurrence of the over-winning, so that the over-winning effect can be enjoyed leisurely.

  In addition, the above-described effect at the time of over-winning is performed when the number of game balls B (over-winning) exceeding the specified number occurs in the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006. However, when an over prize is generated at the first big prize opening 2005 having a specific area inside, there is no effect at the time of over winning, and an over prize is only given when an over prize is produced at the second big prize opening 2006. You may make it perform a time production. In the present embodiment, when the first big winning opening 2005 passes through the specific area, the big hit finalizing effect indicating that the execution of the big hit game is finalized is performed. However, according to the above configuration, the specific area passing through the specific area is specified. It is possible to prevent the execution of the jackpot finalizing effect from being hindered due to an accidental overwinning at the game timing.

  Further, in addition to configuring the above-described effect at the time of over winning, the lower right flock winning opening provided in the vicinity of the second big winning opening 2006 (for example, lower right of the effect display device 1600) during the big hit game When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 2001), a bonus effect indicating that a bonus ball different from the winning ball for the winning of the gaming ball at the second big winning opening 2006 is given is performed. May be. In such a case, it can be exemplified that control is performed so as to suppress one of the executions so as to prevent the over-winning effect and the bonus effect from overlapping. For example, if a game ball wins the lower right flock winning opening during the performance at the time of over winning, the execution of the bonus effect is suppressed, whereas if the over winning occurs during the bonus effect execution It can be exemplified that priority is given to an effect that is being executed, such as suppressing execution of an effect when winning an over-winning. However, even if any of the execution conditions of the over-winning effect and the bonus effect is satisfied, there is a payout of the winning ball, and the total number of winning balls (total payout number) in the round effect using the effect display device 1600 It is supposed to be added to the display.

  As described above, when the over-winning effect is not executed while the over-winning has occurred, the number of over-winnings is not counted. As a result, when the over-winning effect is executed next, the lottery effect and the fixed effect are executed in order with respect to the already performed over-winning effect, giving the player a sense of incongruity. Can be prevented.

  In addition, in the above, when over winning occurs during the execution of the bonus effect, execution of the over winning effect is suppressed, but only when the number of occurrences of over winning is the count after the eighth time. You may make it replace with the production | presentation at the time of over winning (premium fixed production). In this way, when the number of over-winnings is the count after the eighth, the premier effect as the over-winning effect is reliably executed, so that the number of over-winnings is the eighth or later. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost such that a premier performance cannot be seen even though the count is.

[13. Modification of light-emitting display of light guide plate]
Next, a modified example of the light emission display of the above-described front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153. In the pachinko machine 1 of the modified example, the plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decoration board 2640 are replaced with the first LED group 2630a and the second LED group 2630b in response to the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 being pressed. The third LED group 2630c and the fourth LED group 2630d are made to emit light in this order, and the first picture 2614a, the second picture 2614b, the third picture 2614c, and the fourth picture 2614d are made to emit light in this order, and the center of the front light guide plate 2610 A light-emitting effect like an animation with a movement that spreads from the outside to the outside.

  Specifically, when the decorative design of the left column and the right column is temporarily stopped and displayed in the same design (in this example, “7”) as a variation display of the decorative design in the effect display device 1600, all reach states are formed. And the first LED group 2630a among the plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 is emitted as a reach effect and the like in the light guide plate main body 2611. By making light incident from one specific light incident portion 2612a, the first design 2614a surrounding the vicinity of the center of the front light guide plate 2610 is caused to emit light, and the effect display device can be viewed through the portion surrounded by the first design 2614a. “Press the button!” Is displayed in 1600 (FIG. 152A).

  When the player presses the pressing operation unit 303 within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds), the left row of decorative symbols is reduced and displayed on the lower left portion of the effect display device 1600 and the right column of decorative symbols is displayed. While displaying in a reduced size in the lower right portion of the device 1600, a middle row of decorative symbols is displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600 so that the device can be seen through the portion surrounded by the first pattern 2614a, and then the middle row of decorative symbols is displayed on the left. The decorative pattern in the column and the right column is temporarily stopped and displayed with a different symbol (in this example, “6”) (FIG. 152 (B)).

  Next, the plurality of LEDs 2630 on the front light guide plate decoration board 2640 are caused to emit light in the order of the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d, and the second specific incident light enters the light guide plate body 2611. The second pattern 2614b (FIG. 152 (B)), the third pattern 2614c (FIG. 152 (C)), by making light incident from the part 2612b, the third specific light incident part 2612c, and the fourth specific light incident part 2612d, The fourth pattern 2614d (FIG. 152 (D)) is emitted in the order of light emission effects such as animation that moves from the center of the front light guide plate 2610 toward the outside.

  In the front effect unit 2600 of this example, a reflector (not shown) attached to a part of the right side of the front light guide plate 2610 and a reflector attached to the upper surface of the reflector toward the right side of the front light guide plate 2610. A front light guide plate decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs 2660 for irradiating light are mounted, and light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 2660 provided in front of the plurality of LEDs 2660 is increased to increase the light intensity. A light collecting member 2670. In addition, on the back surface of the light guide plate main body 2611, a plurality of fine reflection concave portions 2616 that reflect light incident from the plurality of LEDs 2660 forward are formed.

  Then, the plurality of LEDs 2630 on the front light guide plate decoration board 2640 are caused to emit light in the order of the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d, thereby first pattern 2614a. , The second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d are emitted in order, and a light-emitting effect such as an animation having a movement that spreads outward from the center of the front light guide plate 2610 (1 After the plurality of LEDs 2630, the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group. While stopping any of 2630d in the state which made it light-emit, several LED2660 is light-emitted and light-guide plate main body 2 11 by making light incident on the light guide plate main body 2611 from the upper right side of the frame 11 so that a decorative pattern in the middle row that is visible through the center of the pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614a to fourth pattern 2614d) is shot out. The pattern 2615 is caused to emit light, and a pattern in which the decorative pattern in the middle row is cracked by being shot by the shot pattern 2615 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 152D). At this time, in synchronization with the light emission of the plurality of LEDs 2660, an arrow of light is emitted toward the center of the front light guide plate 2610 on the effect display device 1600 located on the back of the light guide plate body 2611, and the center of the pattern 2614 is projected. Such an effect display is performed, and then the image 2615 is eradicated to assist the auxiliary design 2615 (auxiliary display).

  Specifically, the back part of the shot pattern 2615 (including at least a part of the back part of the shot pattern 2615, including the area other than the back part of the shot picture 2615 so that light gradually advances from the vicinity of the plurality of LEDs 2660. The image may be gradually displayed to complete an image overlapping the shot pattern 2615, and then the arrow of light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 2660 is lost by deleting the image 2614 (first pattern 2614a). To the center of the fourth pattern 2614d), thereby moving the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d in order from the center of the front light guide plate 2610 to the outside. It is designed to produce an effect that stops the light-emitting effect such as an animation.

  The shot pattern 2615 includes a portion displayed on the upper layer and a portion displayed on the lower layer with respect to the pattern 2614 (the first pattern 2614a to the fourth pattern 2614d). Specifically, on the surface side of the pattern 2614 (the first pattern 2614a to the fourth pattern 2614d) on the near side of the portion of the shot pattern 2615 that is pierced with the pattern 2614 (the first pattern 2614a to the fourth pattern 2614d). The portion representing the certain part (the right portion of the shot pattern 2615 displayed by being divided into right and left) is displayed on the upper layer with respect to the pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614a to fourth pattern 2614d), and the shot pattern is displayed. 2615, a part (first part 2614a to fourth part 2614d) that is inserted into the picture 2614 (first part 2614a to fourth part 2614d) and represents the back side of the part 2614 (first part 2614a to fourth part 2614d). As for the shot pattern 2615 to be performed, the pattern 2614 (the first pattern 2614a to the fourth pattern 2614d) is used. It is displayed in the lower layer against. Thereby, it is possible to express the perspective based on the pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614a to fourth pattern 2614d), and the arrows of light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 2660 are represented by the pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614a to fourth pattern 2614d). You can realistically express how you hit the center of the

  Further, as described above, a light condensing member 2670 is provided in front of the plurality of LEDs 2660 that emit the emission pattern 2615, and the light is incident on the light guide plate main body 2611 in a state where the light is concentrated to increase the intensity of the light. Let me. On the other hand, the plurality of LEDs 2630 on the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 are not provided with the light collecting member 2670, and these lights are diffused and enter the light guide plate body 2611. Therefore, the punching pattern 2615 can be made to emit light with a stronger light than the pattern 2614 (the first pattern 2614a to the fourth pattern 2614d) emitted by the plurality of LEDs 2630 of the front light guide plate decoration board 2640. However, the light emission pattern 2615 gradually attenuates as it moves away from the plurality of LEDs 2660. By gradually decreasing the ratio of reflecting light forward, the visible light from the front of the light guide plate body 2611 is gradually weakened), and the perspective is also expressed from the emission of the shot pattern 2615.

  If the result of the variable display is a big hit, the light guide plate main body 2611 emits a shot pattern 2615 to display a mode in which the decorative pattern in the middle row is cracked on the effect display device 1600, and then the left row. The decorative pattern in the middle row that is temporarily stopped with a different design from the decorative design in the right column ("6" in this example) is broken (destroyed) and becomes the same design as the decorative symbol in the left and right columns The big hit symbol is changed and displayed in a fixed stop (FIG. 153 (F)). On the other hand, if the variation display results in a loss, the light guide plate body 2611 emits a shot pattern 2615 to display a cracked pattern in the middle decorative pattern on the effect display device 1600, and then the left column. The decorative pattern in the middle row, which is temporarily stopped and displayed in a pattern different from the decorative pattern in the right column (“6” in this example), is not broken (without being destroyed) Is maintained in a different symbol, and the lost symbol is confirmed and stopped (FIG. 153 (E)).

  It should be noted that, not only when the decorative symbols are displayed in a fixed stop state, but when the reach effect is developed into a super reach effect or the like, for example, in FIG. The above-described effects can be executed even when the middle row of decorative symbols is destroyed and then developed into a super reach effect. In addition, when the above-mentioned effects are executed as reach effects, the shot pattern 2615 is emitted to make a big hit or the reach effects are developed into super reach effects or the like. For example, in the case of deriving a losing pattern without developing it, the first light pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d are not emitted in the order of the front light guide plate 2610. After stopping the light emission effect such as an animation that moves from the center to the outside, the losing symbol may be displayed in a fixed stop manner. Moreover, there is a movement that spreads outward from the center of the front light guide plate 2610 in the order of the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d without causing the shot pattern 2615 to emit light. After stopping the light emission effect such as animation, the shot pattern 2615 may be made to emit light to derive a big hit symbol, or a reverse effect that develops the reach effect into a super reach effect or the like may be executed.

  As described above, in the light emitting display of the light guide plate of the modified example, the front light guide plate 2610 has a plurality of patterns 2614 (first pattern 2614a, second pattern 2614b, third pattern 2614c, fourth pattern 2614d) and punched pattern 2615. Although the pattern is made to emit light to the same light guide plate (front light guide plate 2610), the perspective can be realistically expressed, so that the player can be surprised and surprised, and the lowering of the game entertainment can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the central decorative body 3351 in the upper front movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is located at the retracted position where it is raised near the upper edge in the front view game area 5a. In addition, a pair of first projecting decorative part 3352a and second projecting decorative part 3353a of two first projecting decorative bodies 3352 and second projecting decorative body 3353 are two on each of the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351. It is located at the first position that overlaps each other. Here, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a is arranged on the left side of the central decorative body 3351, and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a is arranged on the front side on the right side. For this reason, the central decorative body 3351 can be seen near the upper edge in the front view game area 5a, and the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a are respectively provided on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351. And the game area 5a is decorated with the central decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative portions 3352a, and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. In a normal state, the two first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a that are located at the first position overlap in the front-rear direction. Since only the decorative portion 3353a can be seen from the front (player side), it is difficult to notice the presence of the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the rear side. It can be recognized that there are only a number of the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a that are currently visible. When the LEDs mounted on the upper front central decorative board, the first protruding decorative part decorative board, and the second protruding decorative part decorative board are caused to emit light in a normal state, the central decorative body 3351, the first protruding decorative part 3352a, and the first Since the two projecting decorative parts 3353a can be decorated with light emission, the central decorative body 3351, the first projecting decorative part 3352a, and the second projecting decorative part 3353a can be used as the central decorative body 3351, the first projecting decorative part 3352a, and the second projecting decorative part. The portion 3353a can be made conspicuous, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the upper front movable decorative body 3350 such as the central decorative body 3351. Further, in the normal state, the central decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352, and the second protruding decorative body 3353 are in the retracted position near the upper edge of the front viewing game area 5a. The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 arranged at the center in the area 5a is not blocked by the upper front movable decorative body 3350 such as the central decorative body 3351, and is in a good state from the player side. The effect image can be visually recognized, and the player can entertain the effect image.

  In this normal state, the upper front drive motor 3302 is driven according to the game state that changes as a game is played in the game area 5a, and the central decorative body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position toward the lower appearance position. Then, the central decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352, and the second protruding decorative body 3353 are lowered together. At this time, on the left side of the central decorative body 3351, the second protruding decorative portion 3353a of the second protruding decorative body 3353, and on the right side of the central decorative body 3351, on the first protruding decorative portion 3352a of the remaining first protruding decorative body 3352, The lower end portions of the second link rods 3304 arranged on the left and right are respectively attached, and the upper end portions of the left and right second link rods 3304 are respectively attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable within a predetermined range. Are attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the same vertical direction as the moving direction of the central decorative body 3351, and are thus lowered together with the central decorative body 3351. Two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and second protruding decorative bodies 3353 (first protruding decorative portions 3352a and second protruding decorative portions 3353a) More left and right second link rod 3304 is pulled to the same downward as the moving direction of the respective central decorative body 3351, an upper end portion of the second link rod 3304 is able to slide downwardly relative to the unit base 3301. Since the upper ends of the left and right second link bars 3304 are slidable in the vertical direction within a range shorter than the moving distance (lifting distance) of the central decorative body 3351 by the first link bar 3303, the central decorative body Before 3351 reaches the appearance position of the descending end, the upper ends of the left and right second link rods 3304 reach the lower ends of the sliding direction. Then, after the upper end of the second link bar 3304 reaches the lower end in the sliding direction, when the central decorative body 3351 further moves in the direction of the lower appearance position, the lower end of the second link bar 3304 no longer appears. The right and left sides of the first projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 which are about to descend together with the central decorative body 3351 by the left and right second link rods 3304 are not allowed. The first projecting decorative part 3352a and the left second projecting decorative part 3353a are pulled toward the upper unit base 3301. By this force, the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 become the central decoration. The first connecting rod 3352b and the second connecting rod 3353b attached to the rear side of the body 3351 are arranged in the center of the central decorative body 3351. Rotating in different directions with respect to the axis extending in the front-rear direction as the center, the first projecting decorative part 3352a and the second projecting decorative part 3353a on both the left and right sides are eliminated from the first position where the front and rear overlap each other Will move to the second position. As a result, the first projecting decorative part 3352a and the second projecting decorative part 3353a, which were seen as one on both the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351, are rotated so that the fan spreads in two, and the central decorative body 3351 and The four first projecting decorative portions 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a extending radially from the central decorative body 3351 can form a single large decoration and show to the player. Accordingly, since all the number of the first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a appear around the central decorative body 3351 moved to the center of the game area 5a, the first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3352a and second An increase in the number of projecting decorative portions 3353a makes it possible to strike the player's intentions, and the four first projecting decorative portions 3352a and second projecting decorative portions 3353a around the central decorative body 3351 spread to increase the overall decoration. Can be increased, and a strong impact can be given to the player to prevent a decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position of the ascending end to the appearing position of the descending end by the upper front drive motor 3302, the upper end portions of the left and right second link rods 3304 become the lower end portions in the sliding direction. Until reaching the lower end of the first link rod 3303, the two first projecting decorative portions 3352a and 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 overlap each other. After the lower position of the second link bar 3304 reaches the lower end in the sliding direction, the central ornament 3351 is moved in the direction of the appearance position (downward). ) To move to the second position where the overlap has been eliminated from the first position where the two left and right first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a overlap each other. The center decorative body 3351 is radially spread around the central decorative body 3351, and the player can be shown a movable effect that moves in two stages by the central decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352, and the second protruding decorative body 3353. Therefore, by appropriately controlling the upper front drive motor 3302, it is possible to stop the movement (production) in the first stage or move (production) to the second stage. The variation of the movable performance using the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 can be increased, the player can be entertained by various performances, and the player is less likely to get bored. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, since the central decorative body 3351 can be moved from the retracted position of the ascending end to the appearing position of the descending end by the upper front drive motor 3302 according to the gaming state, in the normal state where the central decorative body 3351 is in the retracted position, When the game state changes, the player can be thrilled by whether or not the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position, and the player can be entertained. Then, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position to the appearance position side by the upper front drive motor 3302 and moved to the first stage where the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 do not rotate, Since the decoration body 3351, the two first protrusion decoration bodies 3352, and the second protrusion decoration body 3353 move downward in a normal state, there seems to be something good for the player. And can give a sense of expectation to the game. Further, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position of the descending end until the second stage, that is, the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a radially spread around the central decorative body 3351. The central decorative body 3351, the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can show a large decoration to the player, and the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and Since the second projecting decorative portion 3353a is lowered, it is possible to make the player feel like being posted from the heavens, so that the advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage over the player Can cause the player to think that the game will occur, increase the expectation of the game, and make it difficult for the player to get bored. Against it is possible to suppress the lowering of interest.

  In this way, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position to the appearance position, the movement of the central decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352, and the second protruding decorative body 3353 can be changed in two stages. Therefore, the possibility (expected value) of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous differs between when the player stops at the first stage and when stopped at the second stage. It can be recognized that the expected value is higher in the second stage than in the first stage, and the central decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body With the body 3353, various expected values can be displayed to the player.

  Further, the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position near the center in the front view game area 5a, and the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position to secure a space around the central decorative body 3351. Therefore, the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a can be moved radially from the first position to the second position around the central decorative body 3351 at the appearance position, and can be expanded radially. The body 3351, the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352, and the second projecting decorative body 3353 can form a decoration as large as possible. Therefore, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position by the upper front drive motor 3302 in accordance with the gaming state, the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protrusions radially extending around the central decorative body 3351 in the vicinity of the center of the game area 5a. Since the player can be shown a large decoration by the decoration part 3352a and the second projecting decoration part 3353a, the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the center of the game area 5a. In addition, a large decoration by the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, when the central decorative body 3351 is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the upper front drive motor 3302, the two first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 are moved to the first position. Since the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 are moved by one upper front drive motor 3302, When performing an effect (movable effect) using the central decorative body 3351, the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352, and the second projecting decorative body 3353, only one upper front drive motor 3302 needs to be controlled. Such a load can be reduced. Therefore, when performing an effect using the central decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352, and the second protruding decorative body 3353, an effect using other movable decorative bodies, light emitting decorative bodies, etc. is performed simultaneously. However, since it is possible to suppress an increase in the load related to the control of the production, the control of the production becomes unstable due to overload, so that the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 are driven by the upper front drive motor 3302 And the movement of the second projecting decorative body 3353 can be prevented from being jerky, and the production effect using the central decorative body 3351, the two first projecting decorative bodies 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 can be surely exhibited. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, as described above, from the middle when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position, the two first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 are moved to the second position. Since it is made to move, the speed which the 1st protrusion decoration part 3352a and the 2nd protrusion decoration part 3353a move (rotate) to a 2nd position becomes relatively faster with respect to the moving speed of the center decoration body 3351. Therefore, the four first projecting decorative parts 3352a and the second projecting decorative part 3353a can be moved so as to suddenly spread around the central decorative body 3351. An effect using the one projecting decorative body 3352 and the second projecting decorative body 3353 can be enjoyed.

  Furthermore, as described above, after the central decorative body 3351 has moved to some extent from the retracted position to the appearance position, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 are moved to the first. The position is moved from the position to the second position. That is, the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a are moved from the vicinity of the upper edge of the front view game area 5a to the center side to some extent, and then the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a are radially spread around the central decorative body 3351. Since the first projecting decorative part 3352a and the second projecting decorative part 3353a are moved to the second position, the first projecting decorative part 3352a and the second projecting decorative part are moved from the position to the second position. The part 3353a can be prevented from coming into contact with other members, and the first projecting decorative part 3352a, the second projecting decorative part 3353a, and other members can be prevented from being damaged.

  Further, when a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front central decorative board, the first protruding decorative part decorative board, and the second protruding decorative part decorative board are caused to emit light, the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative parts 3352a and Since the second projecting decorative portion 3353a can be independently decorated with light emission, the central decorative body 3351 and the first projecting decorative portion 3353a, and the first projecting decorative portion 3352a and the second projecting decorative portion 3353a can be illuminated. The decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be made conspicuous, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the upper front movable decorative body 3350 such as the central decorative body 3351. Therefore, before the upper front drive motor 3302 lowers the central decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352, and the second protruding decorative body 3353 from the retracted position to the appearance position, the upper front central decorative board, the first protruding decorative body The player can decorate the central decorative body 3351 and the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on both the left and right sides with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative board and the second protruding decorative part. Therefore, the player can be thrilled and excited by whether or not the central decorative body 3351 or the like is moved to the appearance position by the upper front drive motor 3302. I can do it. Then, the upper front drive motor 3302 causes the central decorative body 3351 to descend to the appearance position on the center side of the game area 5a, and four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and second protruding decorative portions 3353a are radially formed around the central decorative body 3351. If it spreads over, it can surprise the player and think that there is something good, and can raise the player's expectation for the game. When the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position, the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the first protruding decorative portion decorative substrate are formed by the upper front central decorative substrate, the first protruding decorative portion decorative substrate, and the second protruding decorative portion decorative substrate. When the two-projection decoration portion 3353a is light-decorated, it is possible to show the player a decoration that greatly shines in the center of the game area 5a. Therefore, an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage over the player (for example, “big hit game” ")" Can be generated, and the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state can be enhanced, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged at the center in the front-view game area 5a, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the center of appearance in the game area 5a by the upper front drive motor 3302, the center Since the effect image (a part) is blocked by the decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352, and the second protruding decorative body 3353, the player may notice the lowering of the central decorative body 3351 or the like to be noticed. The first projecting decoration part 3352a and the second projecting decoration part 3353a can be shown which move from the first position to the second position and spread radially around the central decoration body 3351. Therefore, in the center of the game area 5a, a large decoration by the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be surely shown to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be reliably played.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is arranged in the center of the front view game area 5a, and the game ball B is not included in the area except for the frame of the center accessory 2500. You can play games that are distributed. A front effect unit 2600 having a transparent front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame, and an effect arranged rearward through the front light guide plate 2610. The effect images displayed on the display device 1600 can be enjoyed. In this state, a predetermined LED 2630 among a plurality of LEDs 2630 attached to the upper peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 via the reflector 2620 in accordance with a game state that changes as a game is performed in the game area 5a. When one of the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d is caused to emit light, the identification on the peripheral surface of the front light guide plate 2610 corresponding to the LED 2630 Light is irradiated to the light incident part 2612 (any one of the first specific light incident part 2612a, the second specific light incident part 2612b, the third specific light incident part 2612c, and the fourth specific light incident part 2612d), and the specific light incident The pattern 2614 (first pattern 2614a, second pattern 2614b, third picture) corresponding to the light incident on the front light guide plate 2610 from the light portion 2612 2614C, so that the fourth picture 2614D, one) is the luminous display. More specifically, the periphery of the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted in the fixed recess 2621 of the reflector 2620, and from the plurality of through holes 2622 passing through the fixed recess 2621 to the specific light incident portion 2612 side. Since the plurality of LEDs are attached to the reflector 2620 via the front light guide plate decoration substrate 2640 so as to face the LED 2630, the LED 2630 can be brought as close as possible to the peripheral surface (specific light incident portion 2612) of the light guide plate body 2611. In addition, it is possible to reliably irradiate the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612 with the light from the LED 2630, and it is possible to prevent the light from the LED 2630 from diffusing through the through hole 2622. The portion 2612 can be prevented from being irradiated with light.

  And the light which entered into the light-guide plate main body 2611 from the specific light-incidence part 2612 corresponds to the corresponding reflective recessed part 2613 (1st reflective recessed part 2613a, 2nd reflective recessed part 2613b, 3rd reflective recessed part 2613c, 4th reflective recessed part 2613d. ), The light emitted from the reflective recess 2613 is reflected or refracted in a predetermined direction. At this time, since the reflective concave portion 2613 extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612, the reflective concave portion 2613 is reflected or refracted in a predetermined direction. Since the direction perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 is included, the light guide plate main body 2611 is reflected by the reflective recess 2613 to the eyes of the player sitting in front of the game area 5a (light guide plate main body 2611). Reflected or refracted light reaches in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the surface, the reflective concave portion 2613 appears to shine, and the pattern 2614 formed of the reflective concave portion 2613 appears to emit light. On the other hand, the light that has entered the light guide plate body 2611 from the specific light incident portion 2612 reaches the reflective concave portion 2613 that does not correspond to the specific light incident portion 2612, but the reflective concave portion 2613 that does not correspond to the specific concave portion 2613 Since the light extends in a direction different from the direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the specific light incident portion 2612 on which light is incident, the direction of light reflected or refracted by the reflective recess 2613 is on the surface of the light guide plate body 2611. The direction is inclined with respect to the vertical direction, and does not reach the eyes of the player sitting in front of the game area 5a, and the non-corresponding reflective recess 2613 does not appear to shine. In this way, when the LED 2630 irradiates the specific light incident portion 2612 with light, only the reflective concave portion 2613 corresponding to the specific light incident portion 2612 reflects or refracts light in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate body 2611. Thus, it reaches the eyes of the player seated in front of the game area 5a, and it can be shown to the player as if only the pattern 2614 formed of the corresponding reflective recess 2613 is lit and displayed. .

  Therefore, by appropriately selecting the LED 2630 to emit light and changing the specific light incident portion 2612 irradiated with light, the pattern 2614 displayed and emitted on the front light guide plate 2610 can be changed variously. By displaying 2614 in a light-emitting manner, the player can be surprised and entertained, and it is difficult to get tired of the player, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed. Since the plurality of patterns 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 are formed so as to be sequentially related to each other, a plurality of LEDs 2630 (a first LED group 2630a, a second LED group 2630b, a third LED group) 2630c, the fourth LED group 2630d) sequentially emit light, a plurality of patterns (first pattern 2614a, second pattern 2614b, third pattern 2614c, fourth pattern 2614d) are sequentially emitted and displayed on the front light guide plate 2610. As shown, the player can show a light-emitting display with movement.

  Specifically, the first design 2614a, the second design 2614b, the third design 2614c, and the fourth design 2614d are displayed in the order of light emission, and after the last fourth design 2614d, the first design 2614a is returned to the beginning and again. When the light emitting display is repeated in order, the player can show the light emitting display that continues to move from the outside toward the center by the plurality of patterns 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610. It is possible to make the illusion that the momentum is concentrated on the person, and to raise the sense of expectation for the game by thinking that there is something good. On the other hand, contrary to the above, the fourth design 2614d, the third design 2614c, the second design 2614b, and the first design 2614a are displayed in the order of light emission. When the light emission display is repeated in order from the four patterns 2614d, the player can show the player the light emission display that continues to move from the center toward the outside by the plurality of patterns on the light guide plate. The player can have an illusion of spreading from the center or an illusion of moving forward, so that the player can foresee a change in the gaming state. In this way, since the player can show a moving light-emitting display like an animation, the player is strong by the moving light-emitting display by the front light guide plate 2610 that has never been seen in the pachinko machine 1 so far. It can give an impact, attract the player's interest strongly, and can make the player think that an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage will occur. The expectation can be raised and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in which the center accessory 2500 is attached in the center of the front view game area 5a, even if the pattern 2614 is displayed by the LED 2630, the light emission is performed. The displayed pattern 2614 does not hinder the game in the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually played can be viewed in a good state from the player side, making it difficult to see the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust and entertain the game in a good state.

  Further, since the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixed concave portion 2621 of the reflector 2620, the front light guide plate 2610 and the reflector 2620 are compared with the case where the light guide plate main body 2611 is attached by two members as in the prior art. Can be eliminated, and a plurality of LEDs 2630 can be reliably positioned at desired positions with respect to the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, since the LED 2630 can be reliably positioned with respect to the specific light incident portion 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610, the corresponding specific light incident portion 2612 can be reliably irradiated with light from the LED 2630, and only the intended pattern 2614 can be irradiated. It is possible to reliably display the light emission.

  Furthermore, since the pattern 2614 is configured by a plurality of reflective recesses 2613 extending in a direction perpendicular to a straight line connected to the specific light incident portion 2612, the plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 are arranged on the light guide plate body 2611. The front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) can be guided by arranging a plurality of specific light incident portions 2612 on the upper side of the light guide plate body 2611. It can be disposed only on the upper side of the optical plate body 2611. Accordingly, the front cover 2650 (the reflector 2620 and the plurality of LEDs 2630) is not surrounded by the outer periphery of the light guide plate main body 2611, and compared with the case where the front cover (frame body) is provided over the entire periphery of the light guide plate main body 2611. Thus, since it is possible to avoid partitioning the effect image and the decorative body of the effect display device 1600 arranged at the rear, it is possible to make the effect image and the like easier to see from the player side. It is possible to entertain the production image in a good state and suppress a decrease in interest, and to make the pachinko machine 1 with a feeling of opening because there is no frame-shaped partition in the game area 5a in front view, The pachinko machine 1 having appealing power that can attract the player's interest by improving the appearance in the game area 5a can be obtained.

  In addition, as described above, a plurality of (in this case, four) patterns 2614 can be displayed by light emission with one front light guide plate 2610, so that it is not necessary to use a plurality of light guide plates as in the prior art. The size in the front-rear direction of the light-emitting display of the pattern 2614 can be made as small (thin) as possible, and the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, so the front light guide plate 2610 is moved to the player side. The position can be as close as possible, and a large space can be easily secured on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610. Accordingly, since a large space can be secured on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like are provided on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610. The pachinko machine 1 with a high appeal to the player by improving the appearance in the game area 5a can be arranged, and in addition to the effect by the light-emitting display of the pattern 2614, the lower movable effect Various effects can be provided to the player by performing the movable effects by the unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc., and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest. be able to.

  Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 (reflector 2620) is made by matching the peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center accessory 2500. Or a plurality of LEDs 2630) from the player side, making it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front light guide plate 2610. It is possible to give a strong impact to a player who thought that 2610 did not exist and to surprise the player with light emission display of a plurality of patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 and to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, since the front cover 2650 prevents the plurality of LEDs 2630 and the reflector 2620 from being seen from the player side, it is possible to prevent the appearance in the game area 5a from being deteriorated by seeing the reflector 2620 and the like. The appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the plurality of LEDs 2630 are not seen from the player side by the front cover 2650, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the front light guide plate 2610 using the plurality of LEDs 2630, and thus the LED 2630. By light-emitting and displaying the pattern 2614 on the front light guide plate 2610, the player can be greatly surprised by the light-emitting display that the player did not expect, and the light-emitting display of the pattern 2614 can be enjoyed and It is possible to make the person think that there is something good, and to raise the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in the interest.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image behind the front light guide plate 2610 is provided, a light emission display of a plurality of different patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610, and an effect image by the effect display device 1600 Since it is possible to show the player a combined effect, various effects can be performed by appropriately combining them, and it is possible to make the player hard to get tired, and the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600 It is possible to entertain the player by directing and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the front light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front light guide plate 2610, the distance to the effect display device 1600, Therefore, by displaying the effect image related to the plurality of patterns 2614 displayed and emitted on the front light guide plate 2610, it is possible to add a sense of depth and a three-dimensional appearance to the displayed pattern 2614. An effect (display effect) that can strongly attract the player's interest can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game board 5 having the game area 5a has an upper rear left decorative body 3220 in which decorations are formed on the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 that move in the vertical direction, and The upper rear left decorative body 3240, the upper rear left decorative body 3220, and the upper rear left decorative board and the upper rear right decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs for light-decorating the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are mounted are attached. Therefore, the weight applied to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 is heavy, and a force for moving the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 downward by gravity is exerted greatly. In this state, when the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is transported or the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the pachinko machine 1 is tilted or vibrated by the pachinko machine 1. Or when a force to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 is further applied, the upper rear left drive motor 3214, the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212, Since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between the right slider 3232 (the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240), the clutch mechanism 3250 is caused by the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 being lowered. Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the output member 3253 tries to rotate, the roller 3254 is accommodated by the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253. The roller 3254 is pressed between the inner surface of the storage case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b by being pressed against the inner surface of the storage case 3251, and a force to rotate the storage case 3251 is applied by the plurality of rollers 3254. It becomes. At this time, since the outer peripheral side of the storage case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, frictional resistance is generated between the storage case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and the storage case 3254 is interposed via the plurality of rollers 3254. The force to rotate 3251 resists the frictional resistance generated between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, so that the housing case 3251 does not rotate and the rotation of the output member 3253 is locked. It becomes a state. As described above, output is performed according to the rotation load from the output member 3253 side (upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and upper rear right decorative body 3240 side) to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. Since the rotation of the member 3253 is locked, it is possible to restrict the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from being arbitrarily lowered. Accordingly, since the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be locked by the clutch mechanism 3250, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are arbitrarily used during transportation and installation. By moving to the left, it is possible to prevent the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from colliding with other members at the moving end, and the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 and other members from being damaged. In addition, it is possible to surely enjoy the movable effects by the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, when the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is shipped at the manufacturing plant, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are shipped in the state of the origin even when the upper rear left decorative body 3240 is shipped. Since it is possible to prevent the decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from moving without permission, the origin adjustment of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 is performed when installed in the island facility of the game hall. There is no need to perform the operation, the labor for installing the pachinko machine 1 can be saved, and the burden on the installation can be reduced.

  Further, when the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is installed or maintained, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are moved from their normal positions (origin positions) for some reason. In this case, when the operator tries to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 to the proper positions by hand, the clutch mechanism 3250 uses the tightening spring as the torque limiter on the outer peripheral side of the housing case 3251 The upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are prevented from moving by locking the rotation on the output side according to the rotational load by tightening with 3255, so that the operator can move the upper rear left decorative body. Further force is applied to the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 in order to move the 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. When the force to rotate the housing case 3251 via the plurality of rollers 3254 is greater than the frictional resistance generated between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, the housing case resists the frictional resistance. Slip occurs between the spring 3255 and the tightening spring 3255, the housing case 3251 rotates, the output member 3253 rotates together with the housing case 3251, and the output member 3253 rotates. Is transmitted to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side via the input member 3252, so that a strong force acting on the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 is generated. The upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side can be escaped, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and upper It is possible to rear right decorative body 3240 and the clutch mechanism 3250 and the like can be prevented from being damaged.

  Also, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right unit 3230 of the upper rear left unit 3210 in the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 according to the gaming state that changes as a game is performed in the game area 5a. When the upper rear right drive motor 3234 is driven, the rotation is transmitted through the clutch mechanism 3250 so that the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 attached to the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 are in front view game area 5a. Since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 attached to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are respectively lowered, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and The player is surprised by the lowering (appearance) of the upper rear right decoration 3240 The player can focus on the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 to enjoy the movement and decoration of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and Lowering the rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can make the player think that there is something good, and raise the sense of expectation for the game and reduce the interest. Can be suppressed.

  At this time, a clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 and the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 (upper rear left decorative body 3220 and upper rear right decorative body 3240). Therefore, the vibration from the production operation unit 301 and other movable ornaments that can be operated by the player, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, the upper rear left ornament 3220, the upper rear right ornament 3240, the upper portion Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250 attempts to rotate due to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 going down due to gravity acting on the rear left decorative substrate and the upper rear right decorative substrate, the output member 3253. The roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the storage case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the storage case 3251b. A state where the roller 3254 has been bitten between 3251 inner surface and the cam surface 3253B, force to rotate the accommodating case 3251 by a plurality of rollers 3254 is to act. At this time, since the outer peripheral side of the storage case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, frictional resistance is generated between the storage case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and the storage case 3254 is interposed via the plurality of rollers 3254. The force to rotate 3251 resists the frictional resistance generated between the housing case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, so that the housing case 3251 does not rotate and the rotation of the output member 3253 is locked. It becomes a state. As described above, output is performed according to the rotation load from the output member 3253 side (upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and upper rear right decorative body 3240 side) to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. Since the rotation of the member 3253 is locked, it is possible to restrict the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from dropping freely, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 can be controlled. The upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be prevented from unexpectedly moving (falling), and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be moved unintentionally, thereby distrusting the player. Giving the player the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. The decrease in the flavor can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side are going to descend, the rotation of the output member 3253 can be restricted and locked by the clutch mechanism 3250. Since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at an arbitrary height position via the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are various. A variety of performance patterns that stop moving up and down at the position can be shown to the player, and it is difficult for the player to get bored with the movable effects of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. Can be made.

  Since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at any position in the vertical direction via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 even if the upper rear left decorative body 3240 is stopped. The drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be prevented from being loaded, and early damage to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 due to overload can be prevented, and the upper It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by avoiding interruption of the game due to breakage of the rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. be able to.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 114 (d), two rollers 3254 are inserted between the protruding portions 3252 a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253 b, and the two rollers 3254 are respectively moved by lock springs 3260. When urging to the projecting portion 3252a side close to each of them, a roller 3254 is immediately applied when a force is applied to rotate the output member 3253 from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side. Can be engaged between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251, and the lock is applied after the rotation from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side acts. The rotation of the output member 3253 until this can be reduced as much as possible. Thus, when the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are moved downward by the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are smoothly lowered without being jerky. Therefore, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and enjoys the movable performance by the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Since the clutch mechanism 3250 has a relatively simple configuration using the housing case 3251, the input member 3252, the output member 3253, a plurality of rollers 3254, etc., the clutch mechanism 3250 has two planetary gear mechanisms as the clutch mechanism. Since the overall size can be easily reduced, the space for arranging the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 (or other members) can be reduced by downsizing the clutch mechanism 3250. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be made relatively large and conspicuous, and the large upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be made more conspicuous. The pachinko machine 1 having high appeal to the player can be obtained by attracting the player's interest strongly.

  Further, since the upper rear left unit 3210 and the upper rear right unit 3230 having the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, respectively, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 are provided according to the gaming state. The upper rear right decoration body 3240 is appropriately lifted and lowered through the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, respectively, so that the two upper rear left decoration bodies 3220 and the upper rear right decoration body 3240 can be operated in various patterns. Can be shown to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. At this time, since each of the upper rear left unit 3210 and the upper rear right unit 3230 includes the clutch mechanism 3250, as described above, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are provided. Therefore, the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be enjoyed by the player, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, when the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 of the upper rear left unit 3210 and the upper rear right unit 3230 are moved downward according to the gaming state, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper By bringing the rear right decorative bodies 3240 into contact with each other, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be combined to form a large decorative body. This can give a strong impact to the player, entertain the player, and an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage over the player due to the appearance of a large decorative body (for example, “ It can be thought that a big hit game ") will occur, and the expectation for the game can be increased and the decrease in interest can be suppressed. When the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are brought into contact with each other and joined together, the upper upper right decorative body 3240 or the upper rear left decorative body 3220 on the other side is moved by contacting each other. However, since each has the clutch mechanism 3250, as described above, the force (from the output side) to move the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. The roller 3254 is caught between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the housing case 3251 even if a force to rotate) is applied, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 The movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be prevented from moving, and the contact recoil It is also possible to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from returning, and the player can reliably perform a movable effect in which the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 come into contact with each other. You can entertain and suppress the decline of interest.

  In addition, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be illuminated and decorated by causing a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper rear left decorative board and the upper rear right decorative board to emit light according to the gaming state. Therefore, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be conspicuous to attract the player's attention, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be decorated and moved. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are illuminated and decorated, and it can be thought that there is something good for the player. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation and to suppress the decrease in interest. Further, by providing the upper rear left decorative board and the upper rear right decorative board, the weights related to the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 increase, and the gravity and inertial force acting on the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 become larger. Since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided as described above, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be reliably stopped via the left base 3211 and the right base 3231. It is possible to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 that can emit light by the upper rear left decorative board and the upper rear right decorative board from moving unintentionally. It is possible to cause the upper rear right decoration body 3240 to perform a desired movement with a high production effect, and to delight the player and suppress the decrease in interest. Rukoto can.

  Further, in the clutch mechanism 3250, the housing case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, and the tightening spring 3255 and the housing case 3251 are housed in the housing recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256. 3253 is rotated, and the roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the housing case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253, so that the roller 3254 is engaged between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253. Thus, when a force for rotating the housing case 3251 is applied via the plurality of rollers 3254, a force (torque) for rotating the housing case 3251 is a frictional resistance due to the tightening force of the tightening spring 3255. Is larger between the housing case 3251 and the clamping spring 3255. Rigashoji, the accommodating case 3251 is able to rotate. Then, by rotating the housing case 3251, the output member 3253 rotates through the plurality of rollers 3254, the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253 a of the output member 3253 abuts on the protruding portion 3252 a of the input member 3252, The rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is rotated with a strong force from the output side, a slip occurs between the tightening spring 3255 tightening the storage case 3251 and the storage case 3251, and the rotational force is applied to the upper rear left. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side to be released, the roller 3254 can be strongly bitten and cannot be unlocked, or the upper rear left decoration body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration The body 3240, the output member 3253, and the housing case 3251 can be prevented from being damaged, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-described effects can be realized.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side on the left and right sides of the lower center lifting base 3121 and the lower center lifting base 3121 in the front view game area 5a. After the elevating base 3171 is lowered, the left side rotating decorative body 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body are moved by a slider or the like (sliding mechanism) attached to the lower left side elevating base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171, respectively. 3173 is slid to the outside in the left-right direction, and the pressing operation portion 303 of the effect operation portion 301 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 below the game area 5a is set in a state of being retracted downward. In this normal state, the effect image displayed by the effect display device 1600 can be seen in the center of the front-view game area 5a, and the lower front center decoration 3111 (lower rear center decoration) The four rotating decorative bodies 3126 arranged in the left-right direction of the body 3122) and the central movable unit 3125 attached to the top of the body 3122) can be seen, and separated from the left and right ends of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 in the left-right direction. The left side rotation decoration body 3153 and the right side rotation decoration body 3173 of the lower left side production unit 3150 and the lower right side production unit 3170 are seen at the positions, and the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155 and the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175 are seen thereabove. Furthermore, an effect operation unit that can be operated by the player on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 below the game area 5a. A pressing portion 303 is visible, which is arranged in an annular rotary operation unit 302 in the ring as 01.

  In this state, when a game state is changed by playing a game in the game area 5a (the first special lottery result or the first lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004) Two rotating lots 3126 arranged side by side on the upper side of the lower front center decorative body 3111 or four rotary ornaments arranged side by side by the lower central lifting base 3121) 3126 is lifted together with the lower rear center decorative body 3122, the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 raised by the lower central lifting base 3121 are rotated, the lower left slide drive motor and the lower right side of the lower left side rendering unit 3150 A pair of left side rotating decorative bodies 3153 and a right support are provided by a lower right slide drive motor or the like (slide mechanism) of the effect unit 3170. The left rotating decorative body 3173 slides in the left-right direction, the left side rotating decorative body 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body 3173 rotate, and the slide mechanism and the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171 move left. The side rotating decorative body 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body 3173 are lined up with the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155, and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 in the left-right direction, or the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155. Or the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 can be shown to the player so that the player can move. Thus, the player can see the central movable unit 3125 (four rotating decorative bodies 3126), the left side rotating decorative body 3153, and the like. Right side rotating decorative body 3173 and left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 It is possible to focus on the right Sabusaido rotating decorative body 3175 and the like, it is possible to entertain the movable effects by them.

  Further, when the lower center elevating base 3121 is located at the lower end, the lower rear center ornament 3122 emits light and the lower front center ornament 3111 emits light to display a downward arrow, or lower center elevating By raising the base 3121 and causing the plurality of LEDs on the lower central decorative board to emit light from the lower rear central decorative body 3122 and the lower front central decorative body 3111, a large downward arrow is displayed by light emission, or a pair of lower left side up and down By raising the base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171 and causing the lower left side decorative body 3152 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 to emit light, a larger downward arrow can be emitted and displayed. It is possible to entertain the player even by directing, and the downward-facing lighting display It is possible to guide the viewpoint of the player's downward staging operation unit 301 by the mark, it is possible to urge the operation of staging operation unit 301 to the player. Then, in the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, or the press operation unit 303 is pressed, so that the player participates in the player participation type effect. And can entertain.

  Therefore, since it is possible to perform various movable effects, light-emitting effects, and player-participation-type effects as described above, various combinations of effects can be presented to the player by combining them appropriately. Since it can make the player hard to get bored and make it difficult for the player to predict the production pattern, the player can be surprised by the unexpected production. Can be used to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  In addition, the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the pair of left side rotating decorative bodies 3153 and the right side rotating decorative body 3173, and the pair of left sub-side rotating decorative bodies 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 extend in the left-right direction, respectively. Since each of the four decorative parts 3127, 3154, and 3156, which are different from each other in the circumferential direction, is provided so as to rotate independently around the axis, the player side can be controlled by rotating them. The facing surface (decoration part 3127, decoration part 3154, decoration part 3156) can be changed, and the player can be entertained by changing the appearance (decoration) in the game area 5a in various ways. In addition, when the four rotation decoration bodies 3126, the pair of left side rotation decoration bodies 3153 and the right side rotation decoration body 3173, and the pair of left sub-side rotation decoration bodies 3155 and the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175, the rotation is stopped. Various messages are given to the player as decorations by stopping their rotation so that the combination of the decoration part 3127, the decoration part 3154, and the decoration part 3156 facing the player is a predetermined combination. Since it can be presented, there is a possibility that an advantageous gaming state (for example, “hit game”) that is advantageous to the player is generated by the combination of the decorative part 3127, the decorative part 3154, and the decorative part 3156 that have stopped rotating. By representing (expected value), each of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 and the pair of left side rotating decorative bodies 3153 according to the gaming state. And the right side rotating decorative body 3173 and the pair of left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 and right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 are rotated by a combination of the decorative part 3127, the decorative part 3154, and the decorative part 3156 having higher expected values. Depending on whether or not to stop, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the lower rear center decorative body 3122 has a plurality of light emitting regions 3122a arranged in the vertical direction and capable of independently emitting light, if the plurality of light emitting regions 3122a emit light simultaneously, A downward arrow can be displayed in a light-emitting manner, and if the plurality of light-emitting regions 3122a are repeatedly light-emitted in order from the top, the player's line of sight is directed to the effect operation unit 301 below by light emission that flows from top to bottom. The guidance operation unit 301 can be more easily guided, and the player can be more urged to operate the production operation unit 301 to reliably operate the production operation unit 301.

  Further, since the production operation unit 301 includes an annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated by the player. Since the player can perform the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, various combinations of the operations of the rotating operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be used to make a variety of player participation type patterns. It is difficult to get tired of, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring of the annular rotation operation unit 302 and the rotation operation unit 302 surrounds the pressing operation unit 303, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is increased. It is possible to attract the player's interest with the large rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, as described above, when the player's line of sight is guided downward by the downward arrow light emitting display by the lower rear center decorative body 3122 or the lower front central decorative body 3111, the rotation operation unit 302 (press operation unit 303). ) Can be easily noticed, so that the player can be strongly encouraged to operate the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be enjoyed. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the pressing operation unit 303 is disposed in the ring of the annular rotation operation unit 302, as described above, the lower rear center decorative body 3122 and the lower front central decorative body 3111 emit light by displaying a downward arrow. When the player looks below the arrow, the rotating operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 that are rotating can be seen, so that the player may have an advantageous gaming state depending on the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302. Can be recognized at the same time, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be strongly urged, the pressing operation unit 303 can be surely pressed, and the expectation for the game can be enhanced. Can suppress a decrease in the interest of the person.

  In addition, since the pressing operation unit 303 can be in a lowered state and a protruding state, the pressing operation unit 303 can be seen conspicuously when the pressing operation unit 303 is protruding. It is possible to make the player think that there is a high possibility that an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous will occur. On the other hand, since the pressing operation unit 303 is not easily noticeable when the pressing operation unit 303 is lowered, it is possible to make the player think that the possibility of the advantageous gaming state is low, and the pressing operation unit 303. The advance / retreat position of the player can suggest the possibility (expected value) of the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state to the player.

  Further, since the advance / retreat position of the pressing operation unit 303 can indicate the possibility (expected value) of the advantageous gaming state to the player, as described above, the lower rear center decorative body 3122 and the lower front decoration body 3122 When a downward arrow is emitted and displayed by the central decorative body 3111 or the like, the player can be throbbing and thrilled by whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes. The pressing operation of the part 303 can be enjoyed, and it is difficult to get tired of the player, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image in the center of the front view game area 5a is provided, in addition to the game performed in the game area 5a, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 However, it is possible to entertain the player, and to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the front view game area 5a behind the lower movable effect unit 3100, the lower center elevating base 3121 and the lower rear center decorative body 3122 according to the game state. The four rotating decorative bodies 3126 are raised, and the lower left side decorative body 3153 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 and the left side rotational decorative body 3153 and the right side rotational decoration are lowered by the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171. When the body 3173 is raised, a part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is blocked by the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the left side rotating decorative body 3153, the right side rotating decorative body 3173, and the like. Four rotation decorations 3126 and left side rotation decoration for the player Since it is possible to notice the rise of 3153, the right side rotating decorative body 3173, etc., it is possible to surely show the player the effects using them, and to make the player entertained and suppress the decrease in interest. .

  Further, since the effect image can be displayed in the center in the front view game area 5a, as described above, the lower front center decorative body 3111, the lower rear central decorative body 3122, the lower left side decorative body 3152, the lower right side When a down arrow is emitted and displayed by the decorative body 3172 or the like and the player is prompted to operate the effect operation unit 301 below, an effect image that prompts the effect display unit 1600 to operate the effect operation unit 301 or an effect operation unit The effect operation unit 301 is displayed to the player by displaying an effect image explaining the operation 301, an effect image showing the relationship between the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous and the effect operation unit 301, and the like. Can be strongly encouraged to participate in the player-participation-type production, and the production operation unit 301 can be easily operated, and the player-participation-type production can be enjoyed. The reduction of interest can be suppressed Te.

  Further, as described above, since various combinations of effects can be shown to the player, for example, the lower center lifting base 3121, the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171 are lowered. From the state, when the left and right left side rotation decoration bodies 3153 and the right side rotation decoration body 3173 are moved to the center side in the left and right direction by slide mechanisms such as the lower left slide drive motor and the lower right slide drive motor, the four side by side The left side rotation decoration body 3153 and the right side rotation decoration body 3173 are positioned on the left and right sides of the row of the three rotation decoration bodies 3126, and the four rotation decoration bodies 3126, the pair of the left side rotation decoration body 3153, and the right side rotation decoration body. Since the body 3173 is aligned side by side, the player can be surprised and the player can enjoy It can be. In this state, the lower center elevating base 3121, the lower left side elevating base 3151, and the lower right side elevating base 3171 raise the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the pair of left side rotating decorative bodies 3153, and the right side rotating decorative body 3173. And four rotation decoration bodies 3126, a pair of left side rotation decoration bodies 3153 and right side rotation decoration bodies 3173, and a pair of left sub-side rotation decoration bodies 3155 and right sub-side rotation decoration bodies 3175 are arranged in a line in the left-right direction. The player can show the player a large oblong decoration that crosses the game area 5a, so that it can have a strong impact on the player and there may be something good. Can increase the expectation of the game. And four rotation decoration bodies 3126, a pair of left side rotation decoration bodies 3153 and right side rotation decoration bodies 3173, and a pair of left sub-side rotation decoration bodies 3155 and right sub-side rotation decoration bodies 3175 are left and right in an appropriate combination. When the rotation is stopped after rotating them in a state where they are in line, the combination of each decoration part 3127, decoration part 3154, and decoration part 3156 is determined by whether or not the combination stops rotation in a desired combination. It is possible to enjoy the rotation (movable effect) of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 and the like, and when the decorative portions 3127 and the like are stopped in a desired combination, a gaming state advantageous to the player Occurrence can be convinced, and a sense of expectation for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state can be enhanced to prevent a decrease in interest. Thereafter, the lower rear center decorative body 3122 (lower front central decorative body 3111), the lower left side decorative body 3152, and the lower right side decorative body 3172 are caused to emit a downward arrow to display the player's line of sight. The player can be guided to the unit 301, and the player can be prompted to operate the effect operation unit 301. At this time, the possibility of an advantageous gaming state (expected value) can be suggested by the size of the downward-pointing arrow that is lit and displayed. Therefore, if the lit and displayed arrow is small, it continues to the player. It can be thought that it can be recovered by the operation of the production operation unit 301, and when the light-emitting arrow is small, it can be convinced that an advantageous gaming state is generated, so that in any case, the expectation for the game is increased. It is possible to entertain the subsequent operation of the production operation unit 301 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Moreover, in said embodiment, the rotation decoration body 3126 in which the multiple (four) decoration part 3127 which can be rotated around the axis | shaft extended in the left-right direction and is mutually different in the circumferential direction is formed as a movable production | presentation unit. Although four of them are provided on the same axis, the present invention is not limited to this. A rotating decorative body that is rotatable around a vertically extending axis and has a plurality of decorative portions that are different from each other in the circumferential direction is provided. It may be provided with at least one, provided with at least one rotating decorative body that can be rotated around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, provided with at least one movable decorative body that slides in the left-right direction, etc. .

  In the above-described embodiment, the clutch mechanism 3250 is used for the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 that are moved up and down via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The clutch mechanism 3250 may be provided between the drive motor and a movable decorative body that moves in the left-right direction, a movable decorative body that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the like.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided with the housing case 3251, the input member 3252, the output member 3253, and the roller 3254. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and rotation from the drive motor is performed. The first sun gear, the first planetary gear, and the rotation connected to the drive motor side are provided with a speed reduction unit that temporarily decelerates the speed and a speed conversion unit that shifts the decelerated rotation and transmits it to the output side. A first planetary gear mechanism having an immovable fixed ring gear, and a second planetary gear mechanism having a second sun gear, a second planetary gear and a rotatable rotating ring gear coupled to the first sun gear. In addition, a carrier provided with support shafts on both sides is arranged between the first planetary gear mechanism and the second planetary gear mechanism, and the first planetary gear mechanism and the second planetary gear mechanism There are may be those adapted to be transmitted at a reduced speed rotation from the drive motor provided the difference in the number of teeth on the rotating ring gear between at least one gear of the ring gear and the sun gear.

[14. Stocktime production]
Hereinafter, the stock time effect implemented in this embodiment will be described.
[14-1. Pachinko machine specifications]
First, the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 in this chapter will be described. FIG. 154 is a table showing an example of the big hit probability and the small hit probability.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol is also referred to as special figure 1, and the second special symbol is also referred to as special figure 2. The first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are collectively referred to as a special symbol variation or simply a variation. The special lottery results in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 include big hits and small wins. The jackpot of Special Figure 1 includes “2R Short Short Design 1” and “6R Short Short Design 1”.

  In addition, the small hit in Special Figure 1 includes “7R time short symbol 1” and “7R time short symbol 2”. Although details will be described later, during the small hit game won by the first special symbol lottery, the first big prize opening 2005 is opened, and when the player hits the game ball B into the first big prize opening 2005 by making a right hit, In the small hit game, the game ball B enters the specific area in the first big prize opening 2005 with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3). In other words, winning a small win in the first special symbol lottery is substantially equivalent to obtaining an opportunity to win a 1/3 probability of a big win with a short time.

  When the game ball B enters the specific area and the small hit ends, the six-round big hit game (types are “7R short short symbol 1” and “7R short short symbol 2” Since the opening of the first big winning opening 2005 is counted as one round, the big hit game is 6 rounds), and when the big hit game is finished, the short-time state is started. When the game ball B does not enter the specific area during the small hit game, the big hit game is not started and no time is given.

  In the example of FIG. 154, the jackpot probability of “6R short-time symbol 1” in the first special symbol lottery is very low (205/65536 × 4/200). Also, in the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot winning rate via small hits (600/65536 × 1/3) is much higher than the jackpot probability of “6R short-running symbol 1”, and all jackpots via small hits are short in time A state is granted.

  In addition, during the non-time-short state, the game ball B does not enter the second start port 2004 or only enters the ball with a very low probability, so that the second special symbol lottery is not executed in principle. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 154, most of the entry triggers to the short-time state from the non-short-time state (excluding a predetermined number of second special symbol fluctuations immediately after the completion of the short-time state. Details will be described later) are based on the first special symbol lottery. It is a big hit via a small hit.

  The jackpot of Special Figure 2 includes “4R short-circuited symbol 1” and “15R short-circuited symbol 1”. In addition, the small hits in the special figure 2 include “5R short symbol 1”, “16R short symbol 1”, and “16R short symbol 2”. Although details will be described later, during the small hit game won by the second special symbol lottery, the first big prize opening 2005 is opened, and when the so-called right hit is made and the game ball B is driven into the first big prize opening 2005, In the small hit game, the game ball B enters a specific area in the first big prize opening 2005 with a very high probability (for example, 1/1).

  When the game ball B enters the specific area and the small hit is completed, if the small hit type is “5R short-time symbol 1”, the four round big hit game is determined as the small hit type is In the case of “16R hourly symbol 1” or “16R hourly symbol 2”, a 15-round jackpot game starts, and when the jackpot game ends, the hourly state starts. That is, winning in the second special symbol lottery is substantially equivalent to winning in the big win with a short time. When the game ball B does not enter the specific area during the small hit game, the big hit game is not started and no time is given.

  In this chapter, the end of the short-time state is the end of the second special symbol variation for the fourth time after the start of the short-time state, and the special symbol variation for the eighth time after the short-time state has started (ie, the first special symbol). This is the earliest among the end of the total fluctuation number of the fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation is 8) or the start of the jackpot game. Needless to say, even if the short-time state ends due to the start of the big hit game, if the big hit is a big hit with a short time, it goes without saying that a new short time state is entered again after the big hit game ends.

  Although details will be described later, during the fourth special symbol variation for the fourth time during the short-running state, by inserting the game ball B into the second starting port 2004, a maximum of four times Two special symbol variations can be suspended. That is, the second special symbol variation can be executed a maximum of 8 times after entering the time-short state. According to the big hit probability in the example of FIG. 154, the probability of winning the big hit or the small hit in the second special symbol lottery executed four times during the short time state is about 54.9%. The probability of winning a big hit or a small win in the second special symbol lottery that is held eight times after the completion rises to about 79.7%.

  In other words, the variation time during the second special symbol variation of the fourth time during the short time (the last variation of the short time) is long enough to allow the game ball B to enter the second start port 2004 (specific variation). Since the second special symbol variation is executed in the 5th to 8th non-short-time state by performing the time described later), the yield rate is increased without increasing the so-called retraction probability during the short-time state. Can do.

  In addition, the condition that “the end of the 8th special symbol change after the time-short state starts (that is, the total number of changes of the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change is 8)” Is included for the following reasons. Although not shown in the drawing, the time is given after the jackpot game ends even if the winning of “2R hourly no symbol 1” is won in the first special symbol lottery.

  Assuming that the condition is not included in the trigger for the completion of the short-time state, if the second special symbol variation is executed only three times during the time-shortening and the big hit or small hit is not won, the second special symbol variation If you continue to run the first special symbol variation, you will experience a situation where the payout rate increases. Therefore, in order to prevent such a capture, the condition is included in the end timing of the short-time state.

  In addition, the number of times “8 times” is adopted in the above condition (the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation is 8) for the following reason. In order to prevent the above-described capture, the number of times needs to be set as small as possible.

  On the other hand, assuming that the number of times is 7, for example, when the condition for giving time reduction is satisfied in a state where four suspensions of the first special symbol variation are accumulated in the normal time of non-time reduction state, A person may be satisfied that the time is given and may stop the game, such as taking a rest on the toilet or reporting to a friend. In this way, when the game is stopped and the time-short state is started, the holding of the first special symbol variation 4 is consumed, so the second special symbol variation can be executed only a maximum of three times in the time-short state. However, it will be disadvantageous for the player. Further, if the player is afraid of the occurrence of such a situation and plays the game so as not to hold the first special symbol variation, the progress of the game may be delayed. Similarly, in the case where the number of times is 6 or less, depending on the number of the first special symbol variation held at the time of the big hit, a situation in which the second special symbol variation can be executed only 3 times or less at maximum occurs. Therefore, it is desirable that the number of times in this condition is eight.

  As described above, the condition (the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation is 8 times) is included in the termination of the short-time state in order to prevent the above-described capture. . In addition, if such a condition is not included in the condition for termination of the short-time state, such a capture is possible only during the short-time state in the first special symbol lottery “2R short-time no symbol 1 Even if the big win is won, the short-time state is given after the big hit game ends. Therefore, even if you win the big hit of “2R No-Time Short Pattern 1” during the short-time state, if you do not get the short-time after the big hit game, you ca n’t take such a strategy in the first place. The condition may not be included in the end of the short-time state.

  FIG. 155 is a table showing an example of patterns of opening time and closing time of the big prize opening selected in each round of the big hit game or the small hit game. Patterns A and B are patterns of the opening time and closing time of the second big prize opening 2006 in which an opening / closing operation is performed during the big hit game, and both are patterns in which the operation of closing after a long opening is executed once. .

  Pattern C is a pattern of the opening time and closing time of the first big prize opening 2005 in which the opening / closing operation is performed during the small hit game won in the first special symbol lottery. The pattern to execute. During the small hit game, the game ball B that has entered the first big prize opening 2005 reaches a sorting member (a combination) that enters a specific area with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3). A route through which the game ball B passes through the sorting member is also referred to as an accessory route.

  Pattern D is a pattern of the opening time and closing time of the first big prize opening 2005 in which the opening / closing operation is performed during the small hit game won in the second special symbol lottery. The pattern to execute. The game ball B that has entered the first big prize opening 2005 does not reach the above-described sorting member and enters the specific area with an extremely high probability (for example, 1/1). A route that enters a specific area without going through a member is also called a straight V route.

  In each pattern, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B enter the open big winning opening during the opening time, even if the opening time has not ended, the pattern Transition to the closing period shown. Specifically, for example, in pattern A, when 10 game balls B enter the second big prize opening 2006 before 29.000 seconds have passed since the second big prize opening 2006 opened. , The closing period of 2.000 seconds begins, and the round ends with the closing period.

  FIG. 156 (A) is a table showing an example of the time of a hit start effect (also called an opening effect), and (B) is a table showing an example of the time of a final hit effect (also called an ending effect). The opening effect is an effect that is performed from the start of the big hit game or the small hit game until the first round of the big hit game or the small hit game starts. The ending effect is an effect that is performed between the end of the final round of the big hit game or the small hit game and the end of the big hit game or the small hit game. In the example of FIG. 156, for each pattern, the opening effect time and the ending effect time for each winning in the time-short state and the non-time-short state are defined.

  FIG. 157 is a table showing an example of the operation schedule of the big prize opening during the big hit game. In the table of FIG. 157, the time of the opening effect, the opening pattern of the big winning opening for each round, and the time of the ending effect are defined for each jackpot type.

  In the start j column, the opening effect time is defined by the identifier shown in FIG. In the column indicating each round, an opening pattern in the round is defined by an identifier shown in FIG. In addition, “below” in the column indicates that the second big prize opening 2006 is opened during the opening time in the round. In the final y column, the ending effect time is defined by the identifier of FIG. 156 (B).

  It should be noted that a big hit via a small hit (ie, “Special Figure 1_7R Short Shorted Symbol 1”, “Special Figure 1_7R Short Shorted Symbol 2”, “Special Figure 2_5R Short Shorted Symbol 1”, “Special Figure 2_16R Short Shorted Symbol 1”, And “Special Figure 2, 16R Time Short Chart 2”), the opening time of the first round is not defined because there is an opening of one big winning opening during the small hit game, which is one round This is because it is treated as an eye. In the jackpot game, when the opening effect ends, the game proceeds to the second round.

  Note that the pattern in the fifth round of “Special Figure 2 — 16R Time Shorted Symbol 2” is B. Pattern B has a longer closing time for the special winning opening than pattern A selected in the other rounds (pattern A is 2.000 seconds and pattern B is 9.000 seconds). For example, at the end of the second special symbol change won for “Special Figure 2_16R Time Shorted Symbol 2”, a notification as if “Special Figure 2_5R Time Shorted Symbol 1” was won is executed (for example, “Special The effect display device 1600 stops the decorative symbol corresponding to FIG. 2_5R short-time symbol 1 ”), and in the long closing time (9.00 seconds) in the fifth round, the big hit is“ Special Fig. 2_16R Short-time symbol 2 ”. You may perform the promotion production which announces that there was.

  As a result, even if a notification of winning a 5-round jackpot at the end of the change is executed, the player can obtain a sense of expectation that he / she has won a 16-round jackpot. In addition, for a player who is not conscious of the promotion effect, the player can obtain a sense of excitement at once by the promotion effect.

  FIG. 158 is a table showing an example of the operation schedule of the big winning opening during the small hit game. In the table of FIG. 158, the time of the opening effect, the opening pattern of the big winning opening for each round, and the time of the ending effect are defined for each small hit type. In the example of FIG. 158, all the small hits are composed of an opening effect, one round, and an ending effect.

  Similarly to FIG. 157, the opening j time is defined by the identifier of FIG. 156 (A) in the start j column. In the column indicating each round, an opening pattern in the round is defined by an identifier shown in FIG. Further, “right” in the column indicates that the first big prize opening 2005 is opened during the opening time in the round. In the final y column, the ending effect time is defined by the identifier of FIG. 156 (B). In addition, the pattern of the small hit round won by the 1st special symbol lottery is C (object route), and the pattern of the small hit round won by the second special symbol lottery is D (straight V route).

[14-2. Small hit game]
The small hit game executed in this chapter will be described below. First, the operation of each part in the first big prize opening 2005 during the small hit game will be described. FIG. 159 is an enlarged front view showing an example of a schematic configuration in the first grand prize winning opening 2005. Note that the shape, size, and the like of each component in FIG. 159 are sometimes exaggerated for convenience of description and do not necessarily match those of other drawings. Further, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 159 does not show all the members provided in and around the first big prize opening 2005.

  In the first big prize opening 2005, for example, a first structure 2061, a second structure 2062, a specific region 2063, a side wall portion 2064, a side wall portion 2065, and a sorting member 2070 are provided. For example, the first structure 2061 is disposed immediately below the first big prize opening 2005 in a front view. The first structure 2061 is, for example, a sphere having a recess that can hold only one game ball B. It should be noted that even if the game ball B newly entered in the first grand prize opening 2005 collides with the game ball B already held in the recess, the game ball B does not jump out of the recess. In addition, it is desirable that the recess has.

  In addition, the first structure 2061 is a movable body in which the dent faces the direction of the second structure 2062 at the initial position. During the operation, the first structure 2061 rotates to the left in the front view around the center of the sphere so that the hollow faces in the front view.

  Accordingly, when the game ball B enters the second grand prize opening 2006 when the first big prize opening 2005 is opened and the depression of the first structure 2061 faces in the front view direction, the game ball B is Only one is held in the recess of the first structure 2061. Even if one game ball B is held in the depression of the first structure 2061 and the game ball B enters the first big prize opening 2005, the game ball B is held in the depression. Without being discharged to the lower left area of the first structure 2061, it does not go to the specific area 2063. Similarly, even if the game ball B enters the first big prize opening 2005 in the state where the first structure 2061 is in the initial position, the game ball B is not held in the depression and the first structure 2061 It is discharged to the lower left area and does not go to the specific area 2063.

  In addition, when only one game ball B is held in the recess of the first structure 2061, when the first structure 2061 rotates rightward in the front view and returns to the initial position, the game ball B is Head to the structure 2062. The second structure 2062 is a member that can be opened and closed. When the game ball B reaches the second structure 2062 while the second structure 2062 is opened, the game ball B falls in the downward direction of the front view of the second structure 2062 and finally enters the specific area 2063. . In addition, when the game ball B reaches the second structure 2062 while the second structure 2062 is closed, the game ball B passes over the second structure 2062 and the second structure 2062 is viewed in the lower right direction when viewed from the front. Heading to the sorting member 2070 arranged in

  The sorting member 2070 includes, for example, a bottom portion 2071, a front wall portion 2072, a front wall portion 2073, and a rotating portion 2074. The bottom portion 2071 is surrounded by the side wall portion 2064 and the side wall portion 2065 at both ends in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the shape thereof is, for example, a disk shape.

  The front wall portion 2072 and the front wall portion 2073 are disposed to be separated from each other at the end of the bottom portion 2071 on the front side when viewed from the front. Further, for example, a first opening formed between the side wall 2064 and the front wall 2072, a second opening formed between the front wall 2072 and the front wall 2073, the front wall 2073, The positions of the front wall portion 2072 and the front wall portion 2073 in the left-right direction in front view are determined at positions where the sizes of the third openings formed between the side wall portion 2065 and the side wall portion 2065 are substantially the same.

  The rotating unit 2074 has, for example, a rotating shaft part and a bullet ball part attached to the side surface of the rotating shaft part. The rotating unit 2074 repels the game ball B that has collided with the ball unit by rotating at a high speed around the rotating shaft unit.

  The game ball B that has reached the sorting member 2070 collides with the front wall portion 2072, the front wall portion 2073, the side wall portion 2064, the side wall portion 2065, the bullet ball portion of the rotating portion 2074, and the inner wall of the game area 5a, and finally Passes through the first opening, the second opening, or the third opening. The game ball B that has passed through the first opening enters the specific area 2063. The game ball B that has passed through the second opening and the third opening is discharged to the area below the sorting member 2070 and does not go to the specific area 2063.

  In addition, it distributes so that the probability that the game balls B that have reached the distributing member 2070 will reach the first opening, the second opening, and the third opening are substantially the same (to be 1/3). The position, shape, and size of each part in the member 2070, the rotation speed and rotation direction of the rotation unit 2074, and the like are determined.

  FIG. 160 is a timing chart showing an operation schedule of the movable body in the first big winning opening 2005 during the small hit game. The horizontal axis of the timing chart of FIG. 160 shows the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game. In the timing chart of FIG. 160, the ON and OFF states of the first big prize opening 2005 indicate the open state and the closed state, respectively. The ON and OFF states of the first structure 2061 indicate the post-operation state (first The state in which the hollow of the structure 2061 faces the front view), the initial position state (the state in which the hollow of the first structure 2061 faces the second structure 2062), and the ON / OFF of the second structure 2062 The state indicates an open state and a closed state, respectively.

  First, the operation schedule of the movable body in the small hit won in the first special symbol lottery will be described. In the small wins won in the first special symbol lottery, the first big prize opening 2005 is the schedule ("Special figure 1_7R short-time symbol 1 in FIG. 158) indicated by the" first big prize opening (object route) "in FIG. ”And“ same as the schedule indicated by “Special Figure 1_7R Time Shorted Symbol 1”).

  When the small hit game is started, an opening effect of 3000 ms is executed, and then the first big prize opening 2005 is opened according to the schedule indicated by the pattern C in FIG. During the period in which the first grand prize opening 2005 is open (except for the first opening), the first structure 2061 is in the ON state. Thereby, when the game ball B enters the first grand prize opening 2005 during the period, the game ball B is held in the recess of the first structure 2061.

  The first structure 2061 is turned off after a predetermined time has elapsed since the last opening of the first big winning opening 2005 in the small hit game has ended. Further, at the timing when the first structure 2061 is switched to the OFF state, the second structure 2062 is in the OFF state. Thereby, the game ball B in which the game ball B is held in the depression of the first structure 2061 moves toward the sorting member 2070. Therefore, when a game ball B is entered into the first big prize opening 2005 during the small hit game, one game ball B is entered into the specific area 2063 with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3). be able to.

  Since the closing period (19.364 seconds (pattern C1 in FIG. 155)) between the first opening and the second opening of the first grand prize opening 2005 is long, the first opening is also the same as the end of the first opening. One structure 2061 is once turned off.

  Next, the operation schedule of the movable body in the small hit game won in the second special symbol lottery will be described. In the small hit game won in the second special symbol lottery, the first big prize opening 2005 is the schedule ("Special figure 2_5R short-time symbol design in FIG. 158)" shown in the "first big prize opening (straight V route)" in FIG. 1 ”,“ same figure 2_16R short-time symbol 1 ”, and“ special figure 2_16R short-time symbol 2 ”. Note that both the first structure 2061 and the second structure 2062 operate in the small hit game won in the second special symbol lottery.

  When the small hit game is started, an opening effect of 3000 ms is executed, and then the first big prize opening 2005 is opened according to the schedule indicated by the pattern D in FIG. During the period in which the first grand prize opening 2005 is open (except for the first opening), the first structure 2061 is in the ON state. Thereby, when the game ball B enters the first grand prize opening 2005 during the period, the game ball B is held in the recess of the first structure 2061. The first structure 2061 is turned off after a predetermined time has elapsed since the last opening of the first big winning opening 2005 in the small hit game has ended. Further, the second structure is turned on for a predetermined time from the timing when the first structure 2061 is turned off, and the second structure 2062 is turned off after the predetermined time has elapsed.

  Thereby, the game ball B in which the game ball B is held in the depression of the first structure 2061 reaches the second structure 2062 while the second structure 2062 is opened, and enters the specific area 2063. Therefore, when a game ball B is entered into the first big prize opening 2005 during the small hit game, one game ball B is entered into the specific area 2063 with an extremely high probability (for example, 1/1). be able to. That is, the schedule of the first structure 2061 and the game ball B in which the game ball B is held in the depression of the first structure 2061 reaches the second structure 2062 while the second structure 2062 is opened. The second structure 2062 operates.

  Since the closing period (5.420 seconds (pattern D1 in FIG. 155)) between the first opening and the second opening of the first grand prize opening 2005 is long, the first opening is also the same as the end of the first opening. One structure 2061 is once turned off.

  For example, in both the small hit game won in the first special symbol lottery and the small hit game won in the second special symbol lottery, the last opening of the first big winning opening 2005 is started after the start of the small hit game. Until the end of the game, an effect that encourages the player to enter the game ball B into the first big prize opening 2005 by performing a so-called right turn is executed using the effect display device 1600 or the like.

  In the example of FIG. 160, the time from the start of the small hit game until the time when the first big prize opening 2005 is continuously opened in a short period (the second and subsequent opening periods) is used. The direct V route is shorter than the physical route. This is due to the following reason.

  The direct V route is selected only when winning a small hit by the second special lottery, and when winning a small hit by the second special lottery, all direct V routes that can be won by the big win are selected with a very high probability. The In addition, the second special lottery is basically performed only during the time-short state or immediately after the time-short state ends. In other words, winning a small hit when the straight V route is selected is substantially equivalent to consecutive hits of big hits. Therefore, in order to make the player feel the speed of the jackpot ream, the period in which the first big prize opening 2005 is continuously opened in a short period after the small hit game in which the direct V route is selected is started. The time until the (second and subsequent opening periods) arrives is set short.

  In addition, for the small win game won by the second special symbol lottery, if the ratio of selecting the accessory route instead of the direct V route is high, the first big prize will be awarded after the small hit game is started. The time until the mouth 2005 is continuously opened in a short period (second and subsequent opening periods) is preferably longer for the direct V route than for the accessory route. In this case, the ratio of selecting the direct V route is low, and if the direct V route is selected, the jackpot can be won with a very high probability, so the time in the direct V route is lengthened. Thus, it is possible to give the player a feeling of rarity and uplifting. In other words, whether the goal is to make the player feel the speed of the jackpot reaming, or whether the goal is to entertain by the movement of the game ball whether or not a substantial jackpot can be obtained by the role route The time may be set appropriately according to the purpose.

  Hereinafter, an example of a detailed effect during the small hit game when the small hit game is won in the first special symbol lottery in the non-time-short state will be described. For example, during the first special symbol variation that wins the small hit game, a battle effect using the effect display device 1600 is executed, and the teammate character is defeated in the battle effect. Next, there will be a resurgence performance in which new characters will participate. In the revival production, the new ally character utters a line such as “Let's fight with me!”, And when the symbol of the first special symbol variation is determined, the battle display by the new ally character of the ally is displayed on the production display device 1600. The decorative symbol (that is, the small hit fixed symbol) indicating that it is determined that is executed is stopped. In addition, for example, it is not always necessary to display the defeat, such as when the teammate wins and displays a line such as “Believe in your power!” On the effect display device 1600 or the like. Needless to say.

  Subsequently, for example, simultaneously with the start of the opening effect of the small hit game, a small, so-called right-handed display is performed on the upper right of the effect display device 1600. Simultaneously with the end of the opening effect, a battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character is started on the effect display device 1600, and the battle between the ally character and the enemy character is performed.

  Subsequently, for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, after 15 seconds) after the first first big prize opening 2005 has been closed, a display that greatly urges the player to make a right turn is performed. At this time, the fighting and defense of friendly characters and enemy characters continues. In addition, a large right-handed display may be performed and a small right-handed display may be deleted simultaneously, or these two right-handed displays may be displayed simultaneously. Note that a timer indicating the remaining time until a large right-handed display is displayed may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 simultaneously with the end of the opening effect.

  Since the closing period of the first first prize opening 2005 is 19.364 seconds, if there is a large right-handed display on the effect display device 1600 from the start of the small hit game, the player immediately starts right-handed However, there is a possibility that the game ball B may not be awarded for a long time at the first big prize opening 2005, which may result in a decrease in the payout rate and the player's gaming interest. For this reason, as described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first closing period of the first big prize opening 2005 has started, the effect display device 1600 is urged to make a big right strike. In other words, even if it is right-handed, it is extremely difficult and easy to place a game ball in the big prize opening, and the purpose of “right-handed” is the same, but the display mode is different. ing.

  Subsequently, when it is determined that the game ball B is going to the sorting member 2070 (specifically, for example, the sensor that detects the game ball B entering the first big prize opening 2005 or the first structure 2061) When the detection by the sensor for detecting that the game ball B is held in the depression of the player) is performed, a display in which the ally character is powered up in the battle effect is performed. At this time, the right-handed display on the effect display device 1600 may be deleted, or a display indicating that the right-handed operation may be terminated, such as “right-handed completion!” Is displayed on the effect display device 1600. May be.

  Subsequently, when the game ball B that has reached the sorting member 2070 has reached the specific area 2063, the game ball B that has reached the sorting member 2070 is executed on the effect display device 1600 by executing the effect that the teammate character has won the battle. When the specific area 2063 cannot be reached (that is, when it passes through the second opening or the third opening), the effect that the teammate character has lost the battle is executed on the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, in the small win won by the second special symbol lottery, for example, during the closing period (5.420 seconds) of the first first prize winning opening 2005, if the winning is during the stock time described later, the stock is released. If the winning is during the production, the final Janken production, which will be described later, a display production that greatly encourages the player to make a right turn is performed simultaneously with the start of the closing period.

[14-3. Stocktime production overview]
Hereinafter, an outline of the stock time production will be described. 161 to 163 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the outline of the stock time effect. 162 and 163 show an example of the outline of the effect when the stock can be acquired in the stock time effect.

  FIG. 168 is a table showing an example of the variation times of the second special symbol variations for the first to fifth times after the start of the time reduction state. The fluctuation times when the first to fifth fluctuations are loss fluctuations are 205 seconds, 1 second, 1 second, 15 seconds, and 1 second, respectively. In addition, when the first to fifth fluctuations are hit fluctuations (that is, big hit or small hit fluctuations), the fluctuation times are 215 seconds, 10 seconds, 10 seconds, 10 seconds, and 10 seconds, respectively. In this way, regardless of whether the special symbol variation is true or not, a long variation time is selected for the first variation compared to the other variations.

  Stock time effects are effects that are executed after a bonus game with a short time. FIG. 161 (A) shows a state where the ending effect of the jackpot game with a short time is being performed. In the example of FIG. 161, it is assumed that the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are not held at the end of the jackpot game. In addition, the jackpot is not the jackpot won in the special symbol lottery during the stock time production and the final Janken production described later (that is, the condition that the time is given in the first special symbol lottery in the non-time-short state) Is satisfied).

  In (B), when the ending effect of the big hit game is finished and the short-time state is started, a display (“right-handed!”) Prompting the player to hit the right and hit the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. (Hereinafter also referred to as “right-handed display”) is displayed on the lower and upper right portions of the effect display device 1600. Note that, for example, the right-handed display at the bottom of the effect display device 1600 is larger in size than the right-handed display at the upper right (not limited to this, for example, a display with a different number of right-handed displays, for example, a color different from the surrounding Or a mode that can be easily recognized by the player, such as a blinking display).

  (C) is a state in which one game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 in the state of (B), and the second special symbol variation is started as the first special symbol variation after the big hit. Simultaneously with the start of the second special symbol variation, the effect display device 1600 displays that the stock time effect has started. In addition, the player makes a right-handed and accumulates a hold for the second special symbol variation.

  (D) is a state after 5 seconds from the start of fluctuation. After 5 seconds from the start of the second special symbol variation, a timer indicating the remaining 200 seconds is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the remaining time of the timer decreases as time elapses. At the same time as the timer display, the display indicating that the stock time effect in (C) has started is deleted. After the display indicating that the stock time effect has started is deleted, a display indicating that the stock time effect is being performed is displayed on the effect display device 1600, for example, at the lower left. Note that the timing at which the display indicating that the stock time effect has started in (C) may be erased after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, after 5 seconds) from the timer display. In addition, the player makes a right-handed and accumulates a hold for the second special symbol variation.

  (E) is a state in which the remaining time of the timer is 185 seconds (that is, after 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change), and four second special symbol change holds have been accumulated. When four pending special symbol variations are accumulated, the right-handed display at the bottom of the effect display device 1600 is erased. Note that the right-handed display in the upper right part is always displayed during the time-shortening state, for example.

  In addition, the decorative symbol fluctuates simultaneously with the start of the second special symbol variation, and the decorative symbol dummy variation is performed for 20 seconds after the timer value starts decreasing. The dummy variation of the decorative design is, for example, as if the decorative design seemed to stop with the combination of losing like the state of (E) (specifically, for example, the combination of losing is not stopped completely) And the effect of the contents such as starting the variation of the decorative design again is repeated one or more times. It should be noted that, in the dummy variation, a predetermined image for dummy variation may be made to appear to be stopped instead of the combination of the decorative pattern loss.

  (F) is a state in which the remaining time of the timer is 180 seconds (that is, 25 seconds after the start of fluctuation). The dummy variation of the decorative design ends, and the Janken game production starts. After the dummy variation ends, the decorative symbol continues to vary until the symbol is determined.

  As will be described in detail later, when the remaining time of the timer is 180 seconds (that is, after 25 seconds have elapsed since the start of the change), the peripheral control MPU is responsible for the suspended special symbol change transmitted from the main control MPU. With reference to the special symbol prior determination command, it is determined in advance whether or not each of the reserved special symbol variations is a hit variation (that is, a big hit variation or a small hit variation).

  The peripheral control MPU is included in the second special symbol variation held at the time when the remaining time of the timer is 180 seconds (that is, 25 seconds after the variation starts) and the second special symbol variation being executed ( That is, based on the total number of fluctuations per unit (not referred to as the first special symbol fluctuation) (hereinafter also referred to as the number of stocks), the effects after 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuations are determined.

  In addition, the remaining time of the timer is 180 seconds at the time of (F), and the peripheral control MPU has won the remaining 180 seconds of the effects of the multiple Janken game effects and the Janken game effects of 15 seconds or 30 seconds. And a 15-second stock appeal effect that is subsequently executed. Every time you win the Janken game, you will be informed that there is one hit variation (stock). Although details will be described later, the number of executions of a combined effect (also referred to as a stock effect) of a Janken victory effect (also referred to as a stock success effect) and a stock appeal effect is less than or equal to the number of unreported stocks.

  162 and 163 illustrate an example in which the number of stocks is two. In addition, the second special symbol variation being executed is a loss variation (that is, the variation time of the second special symbol variation is 205 seconds), and one of the hit variations is the next to the second special symbol variation being executed. Two special symbol variations shall be assumed.

  (G) is a state where the first Janken game production is being performed. (H) is the state where the first Janken game was won. In the following description, it is assumed that the hand displayed on the left side of the effect display device 1600 is the hand of the teammate character and the hand displayed on the right side is the hand of the enemy character. The first Janken game effect is executed using the remaining time of the timer of 15 seconds from 180 seconds to 165 seconds.

  (I) is a state in which a stock appeal effect is performed after the victory effect of the Janken game effect. The effect display device 1600 is informed that the first stock has been acquired (display “stock GET × 1!” In the figure). The first stock appeal effect is executed using the remaining time of the timer of 15 seconds from 165 seconds to 150 seconds.

  (J) is a state in which the stock appeal effect ends and the second Janken game effect starts. A display (ST in the figure, hereinafter also referred to as stock display) indicating that there is a stock that has been notified in the stock appeal effect is displayed on the upper left of the effect display device 1600, for example. In addition, the stock display is, for example, until the end of the special symbol variation corresponding to the stock, or until the start or end of the hit game corresponding to the stock (if the hit corresponding to the stock is a small hit, It may be the start or end of the big hit game that enters with the small hit as an opportunity.

  For example, in stock appeal production, when notifying the big hit of “15R time short symbol 1”, “small hit of“ 16R short time symbol 1 ”, etc. A premium effect may be executed (for example, notification by a character dedicated to the premium effect). In this case, the stock display at the upper left of the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the stock appeal effect may be in a premium mode (for example, a character dedicated to the premium effect is displayed).

  (K) is a state in which the stock time has ended, that is, a state in which 205 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change and the second special symbol change, which is a loss change, has ended. The effect display device 1600 displays a combination of decorative symbols that are lost. Since the number of stocks is two as described above, one more stock is notified before the end of the stock time, and two stock displays are displayed on the upper left of the effect display device 1600 when the change ends.

  In the example of (K), the left decorative symbol is “5”, the middle decorative symbol is “2”, and the right decorative symbol is “4” as a combination of the lost decorative symbols, but the stock is notified. In the case of losing fluctuations, the combination of decorative symbols that reminds you of hits (for example, the left decorative symbol and the right are the same number and the central decorative symbol is “V”) stops. Good. Further, even when the stock is not notified at the stock time, but there is a hold corresponding to the fluctuation within the hold, the dedicated combination may be stopped at a predetermined rate.

  FIG. 163 (L) shows a state in which the second special symbol variation (variation time is 10 seconds, see FIG. 168), which is a small hit variation, has started. In (M), the combination of the decorative symbols indicating the small hits is stopped, and an effect indicating that one stock has been released (displayed as “stock released!”) Is executed on the effect display device 1600. In the example of (M), the stock display corresponding to the first stock is deleted at the end of the second special symbol change. When the stock display is in a premium mode, the stock release effect may also be in a premium mode (for example, notification of stock release by a premium effect dedicated character).

  (N) is the state where the small hit game has started. In order to allow the game ball B to enter the specific area 2063 in the first grand prize opening 2005, a large right-handed display at the lower part of the effect display device 1600 and the first big prize mouth such as "Aim for V !!" A display prompting the user to aim at a specific area in 2005 is displayed. (O) is a state where the big hit game is started by the game ball B entering the specific area 2063 during the small hit game. Even if the big hit game starts, the stock display corresponding to the unreleased stock is not erased.

  In the example of FIG. 162, one stock is reported in one stock appeal effect, but when there are a plurality of unreported stocks, a plurality of stocks are reported in one stock appeal effect. May be. In the stock appeal effect, when notifying a plurality of stocks, an effect different from the case of notifying one stock may be executed. For example, a plurality of stocks may be notified by notification by a plurality of characters dedicated to stock notification, dedicated sound effects, dedicated lighting patterns by various lamps, and the like.

  Further, when notifying a plurality of stocks, a Janken production different from the normal Janken production may be executed. For example, if a special teammate or enemy character appears and wins the Janken production, or if you win the Janken with a given combination of hands (for example, if your allies are “par” and the enemy character is “goo”) ), Or when the teammate puts out a special hand (for example, a hand with the little finger and ring finger folded and other fingers extended), the production pattern is determined so that multiple stocks are determined. It may be.

  In the examples of FIGS. 162 and 163, the second special symbol variation of the first variation is the loss variation, but the second special symbol variation of the first variation is a hit variation (variation time is 215 seconds). In some cases, stock discharge is reported using 10 seconds after the end of the stock time.

  FIG. 164, FIG. 165, FIG. 166, and FIG. 167 are the cases where no stock was acquired in the stock time effect, that is, in the second special symbol variation that is reserved and the second special symbol variation that is being executed. An example of the outline of the stock time effect when the total number of hit fluctuations (stock) is 0 is shown. Even when the stock could not be acquired, the effects in FIGS. 161 (A) to 161 (F) are the same. Subsequent to FIG. 161 (F), the state transits to the state of FIG. 164 (G ′).

  (G ′) is a state where the first Janken game effect is being performed. (H ') is a state in which the player lost the first Janken game. The first Janken game effect is executed using the remaining time of the timer of 15 seconds from 180 seconds to 165 seconds. Because it was defeated by the Janken game production, the stock appeal production is not performed.

  (I ') is the state where the second Janken game production has started. (J ') is a state in which the stock time has ended, that is, a state in which 205 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change and the second special symbol change, which is a loss change, has ended. On the effect display device 1600, a combination of the lost patterns is displayed. In addition, since the number of stocks is 0 as described above, the stock display is not displayed on the upper left of the effect display device 1600 at the end of the change.

  (K ′) is a state in which the second special symbol variation of the second variation, which is a loss variation, is completed. In the effect display device 1600, the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss is stopped. In addition, the display of the end of the stock time of the effect display device 1600 remains.

  (L ′) in FIG. 165 shows a state in which the second special symbol variation of the third variation, which is a loss variation, is completed. In the effect display device 1600, the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss is stopped. In addition, the display of the end of the stock time of the effect display device 1600 remains.

  (M ′) is a state in which the second special symbol variation of the fourth variation, which is a loss variation, has started. As described above, the variation time of the second special symbol variation of the second variation and the third variation that is the loss variation is short (1 second), but the variation time of the second special symbol variation of the fourth variation that is the loss variation. Is longer than these (15 seconds). A hold charge effect is performed using this variation time.

  For example, the reserved charge effect starts simultaneously with the start of the second special symbol variation. At the start of the hold charge effect, for example, a right-handed display similar to FIG. 161 (B) is displayed at the bottom of the effect display device 1600, and a hold charge start display indicating that the hold charge effect has started is displayed at the center. The player is prompted to enter the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. The hold charge start display is, for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the hold charge effect, or when a predetermined number of game balls B enter the second start port 2004 (for example, one or four with the maximum hold number). It will be erased.

  (N ′) is a state in which the second special symbol variation of the fourth variation, which is a loss variation, is completed. When all four suspensions of the second special symbol variation have been accumulated, a display (“charge full!” In the figure) indicating that all the suspensions have been accumulated is displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600, and the effect display. The right-handed display displayed at the bottom of device 1600 is erased. Since the variation is a loss variation, a combination of decorative patterns of the loss is displayed.

  (O ′) is a state in which the fifth variation (variation time is 1 second), which is a loss variation, is completed. In the effect display device 1600, the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss is stopped. The loss variation is a variation in a non-time-short state, and the production before the final Janken production described later is composed of four fluctuations in the short-time and one fluctuation in the short-time.

  In the example of FIG. 164, the example in which the fifth variation is the loss variation is described. However, when the first to fourth variations are the loss variation and the fifth variation is the hit variation, the fourth variation is the fourth variation. No hold charge effect is executed. In this case, a dedicated effect spanning from the second change to the fifth change is executed, and the hit is notified at the fifth change.

  Therefore, in principle, when all of the first to fifth fluctuations are loss fluctuations, the hold charge effect and the final Janken effect described later are executed. However, if the winning corresponding to the fifth variation is made after the start of the second variation, or if it is made after the timing of the pre-reading determination in the first variation, the fifth variation is a hit variation. The hold charge effect is also executed. Note that the winning corresponding to the fifth variation is performed after the start of the second variation or after the timing of the prefetch determination in the first variation, the first to fourth variation is a loss variation, and the fifth variation When the hit is fluctuation, the dedicated effect is not executed and the hit is suddenly notified at the fifth change.

  When this special effect is performed, the second variation time is 1 second, the third variation time is 1 second, the fourth variation time is 15 seconds, and the fifth variation time is 10 seconds. (See FIG. 168). Among the fluctuations in which the dedicated effect is performed, the total fluctuation time of the second to fourth fluctuations that are the loss fluctuations is longer than the fluctuation time of the fifth fluctuation that is the hit fluctuations. As described above, since the variation time of the fifth variation, which is a hit variation, is short, the dedicated production using the second to fifth variations can secure a long time for performing the production and execute an interesting production. Can do.

  Although details will be described later, when there is a variation from the first variation to the fourth variation, a stock effect is always generated during the 180-second Janken effect of the first variation. Further, as described above, when the first to fourth changes are lost and the fifth change is a hit, a dedicated effect is performed from the second change. Therefore, when the stock effect does not appear at the first change and the dedicated effect does not start from the second change, the change up to the fifth change is determined to be lost. If the 2nd, 3rd and 5th changes other than the 4th change for which the hold charge effect is performed is a loss change, a short change time (1 second) is selected, and the second special symbol change is held at the 4th change. It is set as a long time (time longer than the 2nd, 3rd, and 5th fluctuations) in which the time for storing the maximum value is secured.

  In addition, although the example which alert | reports the presence or absence of a stock by Janken production was demonstrated, it cannot be overemphasized that you may make it alert | report the presence or absence of stock also by production different from Janken production, for example, background change production, dialogue production, etc. . Even in such a case, it is needless to say that the setting may be made so that the expectation is different for each type of production such that the dialogue production has a higher expectation as the stock production than the background change production.

  Hereinafter, the effects of the sixth to eighth changes will be described. The final Janken effect is executed using the sixth to eighth variation, which is the variation reserved at the fourth variation. If the peripheral control MPU determines that there is a hit variation from the sixth change to the eighth change based on the special symbol prior determination command, the final control effect that spans from the sixth change to the earliest hit change of the sixth change, It is executed as a continuous effect (however, when the sixth change is a hit change, a final Janken effect using only the sixth change is executed).

  In addition, if the peripheral control MPU determines that there is no variation from the sixth variation to the eighth variation based on the special symbol pre-determination command, the final Janken production spanning from the sixth variation to the eighth variation is continuously produced. Run as.

  It should be noted that the timing at which the peripheral control MPU determines the effect contents with reference to the special symbol prior determination command may be during execution of the fourth and fifth changes or at the start of the sixth change. For example, the peripheral control MPU refers to a special symbol pre-determination command at a predetermined timing (for example, 10 seconds after the start of the change) at the fourth change for performing the hold charge effect. Or the like can be displayed in a highly expected manner (for example, red characters). Moreover, if the predetermined time has elapsed, there is a high possibility that the 6th to 8th change hold has been accumulated. Further, since the variation time of the fourth variation is longer than the variation time of the fifth variation, it is easy to execute such a prefetch effect.

  In each variation where the final Janken production is performed, for example, a Janken game is performed. In the final Janken production, in the variation that announces the win, you win the Janken game, and in the variation that announces the loss, you win or lose in the Janken game.

  However, if the 7th or 8th change is the earliest hit change, the ratio of the change that is selected before the hit change in the final Janken production is the loss change from the 6th to 8th change. It is assumed that the ratio is higher than the ratio at which the sixth or seventh variation is selected. That is, Aiko in the final Janken production is a chance pattern. For example, only when the eighth variation is the earliest hit variation, both the sixth variation and the seventh variation may be selected, that is, both the sixth variation and the seventh variation are selected. If this is the case, the eighth change may be determined as a hit.

  In the examples of FIGS. 165, 166, and 167, the 6th and 7th fluctuations are loss fluctuations, and the 8th fluctuation is a hit fluctuation. That is, the final balance spans from the 6th to 8th fluctuations. The effect is executed as a continuous effect, and the winning is notified at the eighth variation.

  FIG. 169 is a table showing an example of the variation times of the second special symbol variations for the sixth to eighth times after the start of the time reduction state. When the sixth to eighth fluctuations are loss fluctuations, the fluctuation times are 225 seconds, 160 seconds, and 375 seconds, respectively. In addition, when the sixth to eighth fluctuations are small hit fluctuations, the fluctuation times are 370 seconds, 305 seconds, and 380 seconds, respectively. Further, when the sixth to eighth fluctuations are big hit fluctuations, the fluctuation times are 425 seconds, 360 seconds, and 440 seconds, respectively.

  Returning to the description of FIG. (P ′) is a state in which the sixth variation (variation time is 225 seconds), which is a loss variation, has started. On the effect display device 1600, a display indicating that the final Janken effect has started is displayed.

  (Q ′) is a continuation state of (P ′) at the sixth variation that is a loss variation. A display indicating that the first Janken game of the final Janken production starts (“First game!” In the figure) is displayed on the production display device 1600. The effect display device 1600 displays a gauge indicating the physical strength of the enemy character. When the hit is notified, the value of the gauge becomes 0, and the value of the gauge decreases at the chance pattern (for example, at this time).

  FIG. 166 (R ′) is a continuation state of (Q ′) at the sixth variation that is the loss variation. There is a performance that defeats the Janken game. The gauge value has not decreased due to the loss of the Janken game. (S ′) is the state at the end of the sixth variation, which is a loss variation. A display indicating that the final Janken production will continue (“Still More!” In the figure) is displayed, and the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss is stopped.

  (T ′) is a state in which the seventh change (change time is 160 seconds), which is a loss change, has started. A display (“2nd game!” In the figure) indicating that the second Janken game of the final Janken production starts is displayed on the production display device 1600. (U ′) is a continuation state of (T ′) in the seventh variation that is a loss variation. A dramatic production is being executed in the Janken game. As mentioned above, Aiko in the Janken game is a chance pattern. As shown in (U '), for example, when a gap occurs, the gauge value is decreased.

  (V ′) is a state at the end of the seventh change, which is a loss change. A message indicating that the final Janken production still continues and the expectation of winning in the Janken game in the next variation is high because Aiko, a chance pattern, was executed at the 7th variation. "!") Is displayed. In addition, a combination of decorative pattern loss is displayed.

  (W ′) is a state in which the 8th fluctuation (the fluctuation time is 440 seconds for the big hit and the fluctuation time is 370 seconds or 385 seconds for the small hit) is started. A display indicating that the final Janken game, that is, the final Janken game starts (“Final Battle !!” in the figure) is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  FIG. 167 (X ′) shows a continuation state of (W ′) at the eighth variation which is a hit variation. On the effect display device 1600, a display that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the center pressing operation unit 303a is performed. At this time, a display suggesting that the victory effect is approached by repeated hits, such as “I can't see the enemy's hand !!” may be displayed. Such repeated hitting effects may be executed at the sixth change and / or the seventh change, for example, when the hit expectation is higher than a predetermined value. In addition, for the eighth variation, for example, a continuous striking effect may always be executed regardless of the degree of expectation for winning.

  (Y ′) is a continuation state of (X ′) in the eighth variation that is a variation of hit. One of the predetermined number of times of pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the elapse of a predetermined time after the central pressing operation unit 303a is urged repeatedly (that is, after the central pressing operation unit 303a becomes effective) is satisfied. At this point, the state transitions to the state (Y ′). The predetermined number of times may be set to be smaller as the hit expectation level is higher and as the hit expectation degree is lower. In (Y '), an effect of winning the Janken game is executed. Further, the value indicated by the gauge displayed on the effect display device 1600 is 0.

  (Z ') is the state at the end of the eighth variation, which is a hit variation. On the effect display device 1600, the winning combination of the decorative symbols is stopped, and a message (“Congratulations !!” in the drawing) indicating that it is a winning is displayed.

  As described above, a series of effects consisting of stock time and hold charge effects are executed using the fluctuation of the short-time state and the first fluctuation of the start of the non-short-time state (in the above example, from the first to the fifth fluctuation from the start of the short-time state). The final Janken production is performed using the second to fourth fluctuations in the non-short-time state (in the above example, from the start of the short-time state to the sixth to eighth fluctuations, that is, the last three second special symbol fluctuations). Has been. In addition, as described above, even if the average fluctuation time of each fluctuation in which the final Janken production is executed is a loss fluctuation, the fluctuation in which the series of production is executed (from the start of the short-time state to the first to fifth fluctuations). (Variation) longer than the average variation time (see FIGS. 168 and 169). After entering the non-short-time state, the second special symbol variation, which has a more favorable hit probability, can only be executed up to four times, so this variation is made to maintain the player's expectation. Time is set. Note that, by setting the variation time in the loss variation of the seventh variation in FIG. 169 to be more than 215 seconds, all the variation times in which the final Janken effect is executed are all the variation times in which the series of effects are executed (short time) (Variation time from the start of the state to the first to fifth fluctuations) may be set longer.

  Also, the reason why the branch point (at the start of the second change in the non-time-short state) between the series of effects and the final Janken effect arrives during the non-time-short state is as follows. Immediately after falling into the non-short-time state, the second special symbol variation having a higher hit probability is performed up to four times. If the second special symbol variation in the first half (first time in the above-described example) is a loss variation, in the second special symbol variation in the second half, if an effect in the production mode similar to the loss variation is executed, The player may not be able to get a sense of expectation for winning. Therefore, the interest of the player can be maintained by changing the effect mode during the non-time saving state.

  In addition, from the viewpoint of maintaining the interest of the player in this way, it is preferable that the end timing of the series of productions is as early as possible after the start of non-short time. That is, the end timing is the end of the second change after the start of the non-short-time state from the end of the third change after the start of the non-short-time state (that is, the final Janken effect is performed with the fourth change after the start of the non-time-short state). Time (that is, the final Janken performance is performed with the third to fourth fluctuations after the start of the non-temporary state), and further after the start of the second fluctuation after the start of the non-temporary state, the first time after the start of the non-temporary state It is more preferable at the end of the change (that is, the final Janken production is performed in the second to fourth changes after the start of the non-time-saving state).

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU, for example, refers to the special symbol prior determination command at the predetermined timing of the fourth change for performing the hold charge effect, and suggests the result of the final Janken effect after the sixth change. The judgment effect may be executed at the fourth variation. For example, it is performed according to the distribution indicated by the judgment effect table.

  FIG. 174 is an example of a judgment effect table. The judgment effect table defines the distribution of the hand image selected in the judgment effect depending on whether or not there is a variation for the number of suspensions at the predetermined timing and the variation held by the predetermined timing. . Sorting is determined so that the degree of expectation increases in the order of a hand wearing a red aura, a hand wearing a white aura, and a hand not wearing an aura.

  A specific example of the judgment effect will be described. For example, before the predetermined timing during the hold charge effect, when the number of hold is 0 or 1, no hand image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and when there are two hold, the effect display device 1600 is displayed. An image of a hand not wearing an aura is displayed. When there are three holds, an image of a hand not wearing an aura and a hand wearing a white aura is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and when there are four holds. On the effect display device 1600, images of a hand not wearing an aura, a hand wearing a white aura, and a hand wearing a red aura are displayed.

  That is, an image of a hand that does not wear an aura is added to the effect display device 1600 when the number of hold is two, and a hand that wears a white aura on the effect display device 1600 when the number of hold is two to three. When the number of hold is changed from 3 to 4, an image of a hand wearing a red aura is added on the effect display device 1600. Even if a hold is added after the predetermined timing, the hand image is not added.

  At the predetermined timing, the peripheral control MPU selects a hand with reference to the judgment effect table. After the predetermined timing, the judgment effect starts, and the peripheral control MPU displays the image of the selected hand on the effect display device 1600.

  In the example of FIG. 174, when the number of holds is 2, a hand that does not wear an aura is selected in the judgment effect. When the number of holds is 3, a hand that does not wear an aura or a hand that wears a white aura is selected in the judgment effect. When the number of reservations is 4, a hand not wearing an aura, a hand wearing a white aura, or a hand wearing a red aura is selected in the judgment effect.

  Therefore, the judgment effect table is assigned so that the hand that is finally displayed in the judgment effect is included in the hand displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the predetermined timing is reached. In the final Janken production, the teammate character plays the Janken game with the selected hand. For example, when a hand wearing a red aura is selected, the hand of the teammate character wears a red aura in all the janken matches in the final janken production.

  When the number of holds is 0 or 1, the judgment effect is not executed (no display in FIG. 174). This is because, when the variation in which the hold charge effect is performed with the number of holds being 0 or 1 is finished, the final Janken effect is not executed.

  It should be noted that in the hit variation of the number of holdings 2, an extremely small distribution may be set for “white aura” and “red aura”. Similarly, an extremely small distribution may be set for the “red aura” in the variation of the number of holdings 3. Specifically, for example, the distribution in the fluctuation of the number of holds 2 is “no display” is 0, “no aura” is 98, “white aura” is 1, “red aura” is 1, and the number of holds is 3. For the hit variation, “no display” may be 0, “no aura” may be 50, “white aura” may be 49, and “red aura” may be 1.

  By setting the distribution in this way, when a hand that is not included in the hand displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the predetermined timing is reached is selected in the judge effect, there may be a variation in hitting. Confirmed. In addition, a premium effect can be obtained by setting a small distribution for generating such a definite effect. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of excitement by the generation of such effects. In addition, when there are four holds, such a confirmed effect does not appear, so that it is possible to provide the player with fun as a hidden effect.

[14-4. Information for executing stocktime production]
Hereinafter, a table for defining information necessary for executing the above-described stock time effect and final Janken effect will be described. In this chapter, three variation pattern tables (table A, table B, and table C (all not shown)) are stored in the ROM of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU determines the variation pattern. First, one variation pattern table is selected from the three variation pattern tables, and a variation pattern is selected from the selected variation pattern table.

  FIG. 170 is an example of a variation pattern table selection table. The variation pattern table selection table is a table for selecting one variation pattern table from the above-described three variation pattern tables, and is stored in, for example, the ROM in the main control board 1310.

  The variation pattern table selection table includes, for example, the latest big hit (if the big hit via small hit, the small hit) the state at the time of winning (short-time state or non-time-short state), the latest big hit (big hit via small hit) In this case, the type of the small hit), the number of changes from the end of the most recent big hit, the current state (short-time state or non-short-time state), and the fluctuation target selection of the fluctuation pattern table A migration destination table is defined for each type (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2).

  In addition, although the short time of grant time for each hit type is defined in the variation pattern table selection table, it may be managed by another table. As described above, the end of the short-time state is the end of the fluctuation of the fourth special figure 2 after the start of the short-time state, and the special symbol fluctuation of the eighth time after the short-time state starts (that is, the special figure 1 and the special figure). This is the earliest among the end of the total fluctuation number of FIG. 2) or the start of the jackpot game.

  In the example of FIG. 170, the most recent big hit is a big hit via the small bonus of “Special Figure 1_6R Time Shorted Symbol 1”, the small hit is won in a non-time-short state, and the current state is a non-time-short state, The cell corresponding to the fluctuation in FIG. 2 which is the sixth fluctuation from the end of the jackpot is the cell 1651 in the fluctuation pattern table selection table. Therefore, for the variation, a variation pattern is selected from the table A corresponding to the cell 1651.

  In addition, for example, the most recent big hit is a big hit via the small hit of “Special Figure 2_16R Time Shorted Symbol 1”, the short hit is won in the short time state, the current state is the short time state, and when the big hit ends The cell corresponding to the fluctuation of the special figure 2 which is the second fluctuation from 1 is cell 1652 in the fluctuation pattern table selection table. Therefore, for the variation, a variation pattern is selected from the table B corresponding to the cell 1652.

  In the example of FIG. 170, regardless of the latest jackpot type or the type of fluctuation, the variation subject to selection in the variation pattern table (hereinafter also simply referred to as “target variation” in this chapter) is the variation after the ninth variation (so-called normal time). ), Table A is selected. Also, when the most recent big hit is a short-time big hit, the target fluctuation is the fluctuation of Fig. 2 and the target fluctuation is the sixth to eighth fluctuation after the big hit (in this case, it is non-time-short) Table A is selected.

  In addition, when the latest big hit is a short-time big hit, the target fluctuation is the fluctuation of Fig. 1 and the target fluctuation is the first to eighth fluctuations after the big hit (that is, the first to eighth fluctuations in the short-time state), Table A is selected. That is, the table A is always selected in the fluctuation of FIG. Table A is always selected in the fluctuation of FIG. Further, when the most recent big hit is a short-time big hit, the target fluctuation is the fluctuation of Fig. 2, and the target fluctuation is the first fluctuation after the big hit (that is, the first fluctuation in the short-time state), the table A is Selected.

  For example, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 of the first fluctuation in the short-time state in the table A is 205 seconds for the loss fluctuation and 215 seconds for the hit fluctuation. Thereby, the variation time of the first variation (that is, the first variation of the stock time effect) shown in FIG. 168 is realized. In addition, it is desirable that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 of the first fluctuation in the short-time state in the table A is also long as in the special figure 2 (205 seconds in the case of loss fluctuation, and 215 seconds in the case of hit fluctuation). If the variation time of the special figure 1 is short, if the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is executed during the time-short state, a sufficient number of game balls B cannot be entered into the second starting port 2004. This is because there is a risk that the number of times of the second special symbol variation will be less than the scheduled number of times, which is disadvantageous for the player. It should be noted that the stock time effect described above is also performed in the special figure 1 variation having such a long variation time.

  In Table A, the fluctuation time when the sixth fluctuation is FIG. 2 is 225 seconds when it is a loss fluctuation, 370 seconds when it is a small hit fluctuation, and 425 seconds when it is a big hit fluctuation. In Table A, the variation time when the seventh variation is special figure 2 is 160 seconds when it is a loss variation, 305 seconds when it is a small hit variation, and 360 seconds when it is a big hit variation. is there. In Table A, the fluctuation time when the eighth fluctuation is Special Figure 2 is 375 seconds when it is a loss fluctuation, 370 seconds or 385 when it is a small hit fluctuation, and 440 when it is a big hit fluctuation. Seconds. Thereby, the variation time during the final Janken production shown in FIG. 169 is realized.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 170, when the most recent big hit is the short-time big hit, the target fluctuation is the fluctuation of Special Figure 2, and the target fluctuation is the fifth fluctuation after the big hit (in this case, in the non-short-time state) Table B is selected. Also, when the most recent big hit is a short-time hit big hit, the target fluctuation is the fluctuation of Figure 2, and the target fluctuation is the second to third fluctuation after the big hit (that is, the second to third fluctuation in the short-time state) Table B is selected. The variation time of the special figure 2 in the variation pattern in Table B is 1 second in the case of loss variation, and 10 seconds in the case of hit variation. As a result, the fluctuations of the second, third, and fifth changes shown in FIG. 168 (changes after the end of the stock time and before the start of the hold charge effect and changes after the hold charge effect and before the start of the final Janken effect) Time is realized.

  In the example of FIG. 170, the most recent big hit is the short-time big hit, the target fluctuation is the fluctuation of Special Figure 2, and the target fluctuation is the fourth fluctuation after the big hit (that is, the fourth fluctuation in the short-time state). If there is, table C is selected. The variation time of Special Figure 2 in the variation pattern in Table C is 15 seconds in the case of loss variation, and 10 seconds in the case of hit variation. Thereby, the variation time of the fourth variation (that is, the variation of the hold charge effect) shown in FIG. 168 is realized. Note that, as described above, in the example of FIG. 170, in the time-short state, when the big win of “Special Figure 1_2R Time Short No Symbol 1” is won, the time-short state is given. However, the hold charge effect is performed for 15 seconds in the case of a loss variation.

  FIG. 171 is an example of a stock time effect block table. The stock time effect table is stored, for example, in the peripheral control ROM. The stock time effect block table is an effect that is executed from the state of FIG. 161 (F) (when the remaining time of the timer is 180 seconds, that is, when 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation) until the remaining time of the timer reaches 0 seconds. Is a table that defines

  The stock time effect block table holds correspondence between the number of unreported stocks, the effect contents of each effect block, and the distribution. The number of unreported stocks is not reported in the stock time effect before the second special symbol variation being executed, among the winning variations in the second special symbol variation being executed and the special symbol variation being held. The number of hit variations.

  Specifically, for example, a special symbol variation with no hold during non-temporary shortage wins a big hit with a short time, and after the big hit, the variation of special figure 2 is started, and 25 seconds from the start of the variation Assume that the suspension of the fluctuations in the four special figures 2 is accumulated until later (until the above-described prefetch determination is performed). Further, it is assumed that there are three hit fluctuations including the fluctuation of the special figure 2 being changed among the total five special figure 2 fluctuations. In this case, for example, three stocks are notified at the stock time. Further, when the fluctuation in the fluctuation ends, the big hit is made, and after the big hit, the time reduction state is entered again. In this case, the player is informed of the presence of two hit fluctuations excluding the hit hit. Therefore, for example, in the case where one hold of the special figure 2 is newly accumulated within 25 seconds after the start of the fluctuation starting immediately after the big hit ends in this state, if the hold is a hit fluctuation hold, the unreported stock The number is one, and the number of unreported stocks is zero if the suspension is suspension of loss variation.

  The remaining time of the timer, which is 180 seconds from 180 seconds to 0 seconds, is managed by being divided into 12 effect blocks of 15 seconds each. That is, each record of the stock time effect block table defines the effect schedule of 180 seconds by defining the effect contents of each effect block.

  X in each production block column (production 1 to production 12) indicates that a 15-second stock failure production (that is, defeat or Aiko by Janken game) is executed. Also, the black triangle is a 30-second stock failure effect consisting of two adjacent production blocks (for example, even if a defeat or Aiko appears due to a Janken game, instead of performing a Janken production from scratch, the defeat or Aiko After the message is displayed, the character will end in this state! Further, the black circle indicates that a stock success effect (that is, winning by winning the Janken game) for 15 seconds or two adjacent effect blocks is executed. A white circle indicates that a 15-second stock appeal effect is executed immediately after the stock success effect. Hereinafter, a combination of a stock success effect and a stock appeal effect executed immediately after the stock success effect is also referred to as a stock effect.

  In the example of FIG. 171, in all the production schedules, the stock production is not selected in the first and last production blocks (production 1 and production 12). If the stock effect is executed immediately after entering the short-time state, there is a risk of causing the player to feel busy, so the stock failure effect is always selected in the first effect block. In addition, since the stock failure production is always selected in the last production block, the player's feelings are calmed down when no stock is reported in the production schedule up to 165 seconds (up to production 11). be able to. However, the stock appeal in the production 12 is executed when the stock production is executed in the production 11. In all the production schedules, the production 9 is selected as the stock failure production. As a result, the player's feelings for the last three effect blocks (the remaining 45 seconds effect) can be calmed once.

  The stock effect column specifies a stock effect to be executed in the effect schedule. “No stock production” is selected when the number of unreported stocks is zero. “Stock effect 1” and “Stock effect 2” are selected when the number of unreported stocks is one. “Stock effect 3” and “Stock effect 4” are selected when the number of unreported stocks is two. “Stock effect 5” and “Stock effect 6” are selected when the number of unreported stocks is three. “Stock effect 7” and “Stock effect 8” are selected when the number of unreported stocks is four or five.

  This will be specifically described with reference to FIG. For example, when the number of unreported stocks is 1, production numbers 5 to 16 are assigned. In this case, for example, the effect number 5 is selected by 64/256, and the effect number 9 is selected by 16/256. For example, when the production number 5 is selected, the stock success production is performed by the production 2 (the production that starts 40 seconds after the change starts).

  FIG. 172 is an example of a stock effect specifying table. The stock effect specifying table specifies a hit effect lottery table for drawing lots of stock effects executed in each effect schedule. In the peripheral control ROM, for example, an effect lottery table (not shown) per 30 seconds and an effect lottery table (not shown) per 45 seconds are stored.

  Each 30-second production lottery table has one or more stock productions each composed of a 15-second stock success production and a 15-second stock appeal production (total 30 seconds), and the distribution of each of the one or more stock productions. , Store. Each 45-second production lottery table has one or more stock productions each composed of a 30-second stock success production and a 15-second stock appeal production (total 45 seconds), and the distribution of each of the one or more stock productions. , Store.

  In other words, for example, when the peripheral control MPU selects an effect whose value in the stock effect column of the stock time effect block table is “stock effect 4”, with reference to the stock effect specifying table, for the first stock effect, The production contents are selected according to the lottery table allocation per 30 seconds, and the production contents for the second stock production are selected according to the lottery table allocation per 45 seconds.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU refers to the special symbol pre-determination command sent from the main control MPU for the special symbol variation that has been suspended, and the remaining time of the timer is 180 seconds, that is, 25 seconds from the start of the variation. At the elapsed time, it is determined whether or not each of the reserved special symbol fluctuations has a hit fluctuation. The peripheral control MPU determines whether or not each reserved special symbol variation has a variation.

  For example, when the main control MPU has transmitted a pre-determination command for a pending change and a new start prize is received before the start of the change, the change corresponding to the start prize is a hit change. May be configured such that a prior determination command is transmitted and the prior determination command is not transmitted when the variation corresponding to the start prize is a loss variation.

  The peripheral control MPU subtracts the number of already notified stocks from the total number of hit variations included in the special symbol variation that is held when 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation and the special symbol variation being executed. Calculated as the number of unreported stocks. The peripheral control MPU refers to the stock time effect block table, and determines the effect by selecting an effect corresponding to the number of unreported stocks according to the distribution indicated by the distribution field, thereby realizing the stock time effect described above. be able to.

  In addition, when the hit fluctuation is suspended after the remaining time of the timer of 180 seconds, the stock notification is not executed for the hit fluctuation. As for the hit variation that has not been notified as stock, for example, the hit is notified when the hit variation is executed.

  However, the peripheral control MPU has a predetermined timing after the remaining time of the timer of 180 seconds (for example, at the end of each production block, etc. However, since a single stock production requires a minimum of 30 seconds, 11 and the end of production 12.), the number of unreported stocks may be calculated again. In this case, for example, the peripheral control MPU replaces a part of the stock failure production of the selected production schedule with the stock production, or reselects the production schedule capable of notifying the unreported stock. Is changed on the way. In addition, the number of unreported stocks may be calculated again, and the timing for changing the production schedule according to the calculation result may be one time or multiple times.

  Note that, for example, when there is a suspension of hit fluctuation before the initial stock count calculation timing, in principle, a stock effect corresponding to the hit fluctuation is notified in the stock time. In this case, if there is a winning change pending after the first stock count calculation timing and before the second stock count calculation timing, a stock effect corresponding to the hit will be performed at the stock time. The production may be changed, and at the next stock time (in principle, the jackpot corresponding to the hit fluctuation before the initial stock count calculation timing is given a short time and enters the stock time again) Stock production corresponding to hit variation may be performed.

  Also, if there is no suspension of hit fluctuation before the initial stock count calculation timing, and there is a win for win fluctuation after the initial stock count calculation timing and before the second stock count calculation timing The effect may be changed so that the stock effect corresponding to the hit at the stock time is performed, or the effect of the hit may be suddenly executed without changing the effect at the stock time. (For example, notification is made suddenly in the hit variation).

  For a player who does not want to be notified of the number of hits in stock time, the timing may be notified in advance by a timer display or the like. In addition, as described above, the number of unreported stocks is calculated only once (only when the remaining time of the timer is 180 seconds), so that the number of hits for suspensions stored after that timing is notified. It is possible to provide silent game characteristics that are not performed, and it is possible to provide stock time effects including the degree of expectation of the hold for the hold stored before the timing.

  Note that the one-time timing is determined so that sufficient time can be secured for the four game balls B to enter the second start port 2004 from the start of the change to the one-time timing. It is desirable.

  Specifically, for example, the interval time at which the game ball B is fired is X, and the average time until the game ball B that has been fired when the right-hand shot is made is detected by the second start port sensor 2511 is Y, Let Z be the probability that the game ball B fired when the second start opening 2004 is right-handed when the second start opening 2004 is opened will enter the second start opening 2004. In this case, for example, the one-time timing is determined as Y + (4X / Z) + K (seconds) after the start of fluctuation. However, K is a constant, for example, a margin for time until the player holds the handle and fires the game ball B.

  Moreover, it is desirable that the one-time timing is the first half of the fluctuation time. For example, in the above-described example, if X = 0.6, Y = 5, Z = 0.5, and K = 2, the timing of the one time is 5+ (4 × 0.6 / 0 from the start of variation. .5) + 2 = 11.8 seconds later. In other words, it is desirable to select the variation time (that is, 23.6 seconds or more) so that 11.8 seconds is the first half of the variation.

  As for the hold charge effect, it is desirable that the predetermined timing is set in the same manner when prefetching is executed at a predetermined timing of the fluctuation for performing the hold charge effect. However, as described above, as for the reserved charge effect, if the reserve for the second special symbol variation is accumulated in the stock time effect, the second special symbol variation is reserved at the start of the variation for executing the reserved charge effect. In this case, it is only necessary that three game balls B can enter the second starting port 2004 from the start of the change to the predetermined timing. That is, the predetermined timing may be determined as Y + (3X / Z) + K (seconds) after the start of the change. In addition, in the hold charge effect, in order to accumulate four hold of the second special symbol change, the fluctuation time in the change in which the hold charge effect is executed needs to be equal to or longer than the time until the predetermined timing arrives. . The same applies to the case where the pre-reading effect is not executed in the hold charge effect.

  In the example of FIG. 171, when the number of unreported stocks is five, four stock effects are performed, but five stock effects may be performed. When the number of unreported stocks is five and four stock effects are performed and four stocks are reported, the hit variation corresponding to the first to fourth variation is the stock time of the variation being executed. It is assumed that the effect is notified and the hit corresponding to the fifth change is not notified in the stock time effect. As a result, not all hits are always notified in the stock time effect, and the player's interest is maintained after the second change. In addition, at the timing of calculating the stock number of the first variation, some stored winning information (for example, winning information in FIG. 1) is not included in unreported stock (that is, not notified at stock time) It is good.

  In the example of FIG. 171, when the number of unreported stocks is four or less, the same number of stock effects as the number of unreported stocks is performed. That is, in the example of FIG. 171, one stock is notified by one stock effect, but as described above, a plurality of stocks may be notified by one stock effect. Conversely, it is not necessary to notify part or all of the unreported stock until the start of hit fluctuation. In this case, for example, in the hit variation, an effect that wins the Janken game by reversal may be executed.

  In addition, when the 1st to 4th variation is a loss variation and the 5th variation is a winning variation (however, a winning corresponding to the 5th variation is performed before the start of the 2nd variation) The number of unreported stocks is one, but the peripheral control MPU treats the number of unreported stocks as zero when referring to the stock time effect block table. In this case, as described above, a dedicated effect spanning from the second change to the fifth change is executed, and the hit is notified at the fifth change.

  In the above-mentioned example, the Janken production for 180 seconds of the stock time is the production suggesting the 1st to 5th change wins, and the final Janken production was the production suggesting the 6th to 8th change wins. You may change this ratio. Specifically, for example, the Janken production for 180 seconds of the stock time is an effect suggesting a winning of the first to fourth changes, and the final Janken production may be an effect suggesting the winning of the fifth to eighth changes. The ratio of the expectation of winning in the Janken production for 180 seconds of stock time to the expectation of winning in the Janken production is about 4: 3 in the former, but is about 4: 4 in the latter.

  In addition, when there is a notified stock and the total of the number of unreported stock (assumed to be N) and the number of notified stock is five, the peripheral control MPU sets the number of unreported stock to N−1. As such, the production schedule may be selected from the stock time production block table.

[14-5. Winning in the first special symbol variation during the short-running state]
FIG. 173 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a time schedule in the case of winning a small win with the first special symbol variation corresponding to the winning in the short time state, and FIG. 173 (B) corresponds to the winning in the short time state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the time schedule at the time of winning a jackpot by the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation. The winning of the first special symbol lottery won during the short-time state will not be announced in stock time as described above. Therefore, when winning in the first special symbol lottery during the short-time state, for example, an effect different from the above-described effect is executed in the corresponding first special symbol variation.

  Specifically, for example, the variation time of the first special symbol variation corresponding to the winning in the first special symbol lottery during the short-time state is 1000 ms. Therefore, the variation time is defined in the table A in FIG. In other words, the decorative pattern fluctuates for 1000 ms in the hit variation. During this time, other effects are not executed on the effect display device 1600. Subsequently, the combination of the decorative pattern is stopped for 500 ms.

  Subsequently, the hit game starts. It should be noted that the operation schedule of each big prize opening and the structures in the big prize opening in the winning game is as described above. The effect executed during the winning in the first special symbol lottery during the time-saving state is the same as the effect executed during the winning in the first special symbol lottery during the time-shortening state, for example.

[14-6. Multiple types of short-time status]
In the example described above, the time trigger end timing (that is, the number of times assigned) is the same for all symbols with time shortening, but the timing for termination may differ depending on the winning symbol. For example, “Special Figure 1_6R Time Short Symbol 1”, “Special Figure 1_6R Time Short Symbol 1”, “Special Figure 1_7R Time Short Symbol 1”, “Special Figure 2_4R Time Short Symbol 1”, “Special Figure 2_5R Time Short Symbol 1” ”And“ Special Figure 2_16R Time Shorted Symbol 1 ”are referred to as advantageous state imparted symbol 1,“ Special Figure 1_7R Time Shorted Symbol 2 ”,“ Special Figure 2_15R Time Shorted Symbol 1 ”, and“ Special Figure 2_16R Time Shortly Presented Symbol 2 ” "Is referred to as an advantageous state imparting pattern 2.

  Also, for example, as described above, the end timing of the short-time state (hereinafter also referred to as the short-time state 1) provided by the advantageous state giving symbol 1 is the end of the fourth special symbol variation for the fourth time after the short-time state has started. The first special symbol variation (that is, the total number of first special symbol variation and second special symbol variation is 8) after the start of the short-time state, or the jackpot game starts first Shall be. That is, the number of time reductions given by the advantageous state giving symbol 1 is the lesser of four times the second special symbol variation or eight times the total of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation.

  In addition, the time-short state (hereinafter also referred to as time-short state 2) given by the advantageous state giving symbol 2 is, for example, the end of the second special symbol change of the 100th time after the time-short state starts, and the time-short state is It is assumed that the first special symbol variation (that is, the total number of variations of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation is 104) from the start or the jackpot game starts first. . That is, the number of times of the short time state 2 is the lesser of the second special symbol variation of 100 times or the total of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation of 104 times.

  According to the example of FIG. 154, in the second special symbol lottery that can be easily executed during the short-time state, the probability of winning the winning is 11878/65536 (small hit probability 11623/65536 + big hit probability 205/65536). In addition, since the short time state 2 continues until the second special symbol variation is performed a maximum of 100 times, the short time state 2 can be almost surely won in the second special symbol lottery. In other words, rushing into the short-time state 2 (that is, winning the advantageous state giving symbol 2) is substantially equivalent to continuing the jackpot ream.

  Hereinafter, variation patterns in the time-short state 1 and the time-short state 2 will be described. For example, the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the short-time state 1 is determined to be 40 seconds when the hit fluctuation occurs and 35 seconds when the loss fluctuation occurs. However, the change that arrives first among the final changes in the short-time state 1 (that is, the 4th second special symbol change and the 8th change (the sum of the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change)) ) Is determined so that the fluctuation time is 100 seconds in the hit fluctuation and the loss fluctuation.

  The variation time in the variation pattern of the short-time state 1 is determined to be, for example, 40 seconds at the time of hit variation and 35 seconds at the time of loss variation. However, the change that arrives first among the final changes in the short-time state 1 (that is, the 4th second special symbol change and the 8th change (the sum of the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change)) ) Is determined so that the fluctuation time is 100 seconds in the hit fluctuation and the loss fluctuation.

  Further, the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the short-time state 2 is determined to be, for example, 2 seconds or 3 seconds at the time of hit fluctuation, and 2 seconds at the time of loss fluctuation. However, the fluctuation that comes first among the final fluctuation of the short-time state 2 (that is, the second special symbol fluctuation of the 100th time and the 104th fluctuation (the sum of the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation)) ) Is set so that the variation time is 100 seconds in the hit variation and the loss variation as in the short-time state 1.

  That is, when the variation times in the time-short state 1 and the time-short state 2 are compared, the variation time in the time-short state 2 is shorter than that in the time-short state 1 in all variations except the final variation.

  In the short time state 2, since the fluctuation time is set to be extremely short compared to the short time state 1 except for the final fluctuation, a big hit can be generated early. Thereby, it is possible to provide a sense of speed of a jackpot ream. Also, the player understands that entering the short-time state 2 is equivalent to the fact that the big hit continues substantially. If the variation time is long, the player cannot have a sense of expectation, but rather may bore the player. Therefore, in the short-time state 2, such a short variation time is adopted. It is desirable.

  It should be noted that the fluctuation time of 2 seconds or 3 seconds is selected in the hit fluctuation of the short-time state 2, but the selection rate of the fluctuation time of 3 seconds is low and the selection ratio of the fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set high. It is desirable. As a result, even if a variation time of 2 seconds is selected (although a variation time of 2 seconds other than the final variation is always selected for the loss variation in the short-time state 2), even if a variation time of 2 seconds is selected, the player is expected to win the variation. In addition, it is possible to make the player feel uplifted when a variation time of 3 seconds at which the winning is determined is selected.

  In the short time state 2, for example, an early stage effect is executed. For example, the ending effect of the jackpot game that shifts to the short-time state 2 ends, and even if the rush effect enters the short-time state 2, the same background as during the big-hit game is displayed.

  In the early presentation, for example, the decorative design is changed while the background is displayed on the presentation display device 1600. At this time, it is desirable that the decorative symbol is displayed small in an inconspicuous area (for example, the upper right part) on the effect display device 1600. In the time reduction state 2, for example, the remaining number of time reductions is not displayed on the effect display device 1600. For example, in the state where the remaining number of time reductions is a predetermined number of times or less (for example, 4 times or less), the remaining number of time reductions may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 even in the time reduction state 2.

  In addition, this early effect continues, for example, until the next start of the first change in the short time state 1 or the change immediately before the final change in the short time state 2. Also, if you win a big hit or small win that is not given the short time 2 in the short time state 2, during the big hit game, or during the big hit game and during the big hit game won through the small hit game, On the effect display device 1600, the same background as the jackpot game to which the short time state 2 is started is displayed, and the early effect continues. Further, the number of rounds of the big hit game executed during the early stage production may be displayed as the sum of the number of rounds of the big hit game to which the short time state 2 is given when the early stage production is started.

  Therefore, in the short time state 2, it is possible to execute the early performance exceeding the maximum number of fluctuations that can be held. Also, with these effects, it is possible to realize an effect in which the jackpot game is continued from the start of the jackpot game that first entered the time-saving state 2 to the end of the early stage effect. In addition, the early stage production is executed during the jackpot game that triggers the transition to the short-time state 2, the early stage production is continuously displayed during the ending time of the jackpot game, and the early stage production is continued even when the transition to the short-time state 2 occurs. May be displayed.

  Even if the fluctuation is interrupted, the early performance is continuously displayed. When the change is interrupted and the predetermined time has elapsed, the early stage production is ended, and an production different from the early stage production (for example, production that specifically indicates the current state, for example, “is now in an advantageous state”). It may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. Even when such different effects are presented, it is preferable to continue the right-handed display.

  In both the short-time state 1 and the short-time state 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be 100 seconds in the hit fluctuation and the loss fluctuation, but the same effect is obtained in both the short-time state 1 and the short-time state 2. May be executed. For example, the above-described hold charge effect is an example of the same effect.

[14-7. Production at the end of the final Janken production]
In the following, a description will be given of an effect executed at the end of the final Janken effect. FIG. 175 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the final Janken effect. (X ′) is a continuation of FIG. 166 (W ′). That is, (X ′) is a state in the middle of the eighth change (from the start of time reduction to special figure 2). However, the fluctuation in (X ′) is assumed to be a deviation fluctuation. FIG. 175 (X ′) is the same as FIG. 167 (X ′), and thus the description is omitted.

  (Y ″) is a continuation state of (X ′) in FIG. 175 of the eighth variation in FIG. One of the predetermined number of times of pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the elapse of a predetermined time after the central pressing operation unit 303a is urged repeatedly (that is, after the central pressing operation unit 303a becomes effective) is satisfied. At this point, the state transitions to the state (Y ″). In (Y ″), an effect of defeating the Janken game is being executed. Further, the gauge value displayed on the effect display device 1600 remains and is not zero.

  (Z ″) is a state at the end of the fluctuation (continuation of (Y ″)) of the eighth fluctuation in FIG. On the effect display device 1600, a message indicating that the combination of the decorative symbols has stopped and the final janken effect has been completed ("final janken end ..." in the figure) is displayed.

  (A ″ ″) is a state in which the eighth variation in FIG. In the effect display device 1600, a message (“Return to the left-handed” in the figure) prompting the player to launch the game ball B aiming at the first starting port 2002 (“Return to the left-handed” in the figure) and the left-handed execution And an arrow symbol for prompting the user. At the time when the fourth change in FIG. 2 is completed, the time-short state is completed, but the display for prompting the left-handed execution is displayed on the effect display device 1600 for the first time at that time.

  In other words, in the 5th to 8th fluctuations in the special figure 2, the short-time state has already ended and returned to the normal state. In these fluctuations, a display prompting the left-handed execution is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It has not been. Since these fluctuations, which are the fluctuations in the special figure 2, are fluctuations with high expectation, the player stops the launch of the game ball B by not displaying on the effect display device 1600 a display instructing how to hit. It is possible to concentrate on production with high expectations.

  However, when right-handed is executed at the 5th to 8th changes in the special drawing 2, a display that prompts the left-handed execution or a display that prompts the right-handed stop may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. This is because if the player who misunderstood that the short-time state continues continues to be right-handed, the number of balls is reduced, which is disadvantageous for the player. Specifically, for example, when the game ball B passes a predetermined number of times (for example, once), for example, when the game ball B passes the gate portion 2003 (or the general winning port 2001 that can enter the game ball B only when it is right-handed), or the handle 182 When it rotates more than a predetermined angle, it is determined that right-handed has been executed.

  Although details will be described later, when the fourth movement of special figure 2 is completed, the time-saving state is ended, and there are two or three special figure 2 holdings at the time-shorting state end and corresponding to the holding. When all the fluctuations to be made are out of place fluctuations, the final Janken production ends without winning a win at the sixth or seventh fluctuation. In this case as well, a display prompting the left-handed execution is displayed on the effect display device 1600 after the end of the fluctuation in which the final Janken effect ends.

  Also, as will be described in detail later, the time reduction state ends when the 4th variation of Special Figure 2 is completed, and there is no suspension of Special Figure 2 at the end of the 4th variation of Special Figure 2, or the suspension of Special Figure 2 is If there is only one of the deviation fluctuations, the final Janken production is not executed and the stock time production ends. In this case, the stock time effect changes (that is, the fourth change when there is no special figure 2 hold, and the fifth change when the special figure 2 hold is only one of the change fluctuations). A display prompting the left-handed execution after completion is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

[14-8. Production during the big hit game]
176 and 177 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of effects during the big hit game. In (A), the big hit game starts and the big hit opening effect starts. (B) is a state during a big hit opening effect. In (B), a right-handed display that prompts the player to make a so-called right-handed strike and enter the game ball B into the second big prize opening 2006 (a large arrow indicating “right-handed !!” in the figure, (Hereinafter also referred to as “right-handed display (large)”).

  (C) is a state in which the jackpot opening effect has ended and the first round of jackpot has started. The right-handed display (large) is deleted from the effect display device 1600 by the end of the opening effect. In (C), on the lower part of the effect display device 1600, right-handed displays that prompt the player to enter the game ball B into the second big prize opening 2006 are described as “right-handed !!” A plurality of arrows arranged in the horizontal direction, and hereinafter, a display composed of the plurality of arrows is also referred to as “right-handed display (middle)”).

  In (C), a right-handed display that prompts the player to enter the game ball B into the second big prize opening 2006 is displayed in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600 (“right-handed!” In the figure). One indicated arrow, hereinafter also referred to as “right-handed display (small)”). It is assumed that the display area in the effect display device 1600 increases in the order of right-handed display (large), right-handed display (middle), and right-handed display (small).

  Note that the main control MPU always turns on the right-handed notification lamp during a period in which a right-handed game is executed by progressing the game, such as during a big-hit game, during a small-hit game, or during a short-time state. The right-handed notification lamp is provided, for example, in the function display unit 1400 or on a board that can be controlled based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 at a position visible to the player.

  When the period starts, the main control MPU turns on the right-hand notification lamp and transmits a control signal indicating that the period has started to the peripheral control MPU. The peripheral control MPU displays a right-handed display (for example, at least one of right-handed display (large), right-handed display (middle), and right-handed display (small)) on the effect display device 1600 according to the control signal. . Further, when the period ends, the main control MPU ends the lighting of the right-hand notification lamp and transmits a control signal indicating that the period has ended to the peripheral control MPU. The peripheral control MPU erases all right-handed displays from the effect display device 1600 according to the control signal.

  That is, during the period, the right-handed notification lamp is always lit and at least one right-handed display is always displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, for example, the peripheral control MPU may synchronize the right-handed display (small) with the right-handed notification lamp by always displaying the right-handed display (small) on the effect display device 1600 during the period.

  (D) is a state in which the final round of jackpot is being executed. The right-handed display (middle) and the right-handed display (small) remain displayed from the beginning of the first round. Simultaneously with the start of the final round, the Stock Time Challenge Janken production has started, and the opening production of the Stock Time Challenge Janken production has been carried out. If you win the Janken game in the stocktime challenge Janken production, you will enter a short-time state after the big hit, that is, you will be able to execute the stocktime production. On the other hand, when the Janken game is defeated in the stock time challenge Janken production, the game returns to the normal state after the jackpot ends, that is, the stocktime production cannot be executed.

  In other words, the stock time banken effect is an effect of notifying whether the running big hit is a big hit with a short time or a big hit without a short time. In addition, since the big hits via small hits and the big hits won in Special Figure 2 are all big hits with a short time, it is desirable that the stock time banken performance is performed in the big hits not passing through the small hits won in Special Figure 1. .

  (E) is a continuation of (D) during the final round of jackpot. In the effect display device 1600, the janken effect is performed, and the effect that the teammate character is defeated by janken is displayed. (F) is a continuation of (E) during the final round of jackpot. Since the teammate character was defeated in the Janken production, the word “sorry ...” is displayed on the production display device 1600. In other words, it was announced that the running big hit was a big hit without a short time.

  FIG. 177 (G) shows a state where a big hit ending effect is being performed. In the big hit ending effect, the right-handed display (middle) is deleted from the effect display device 1600, but the right-handed display (small) is continuously displayed. (H) is a state in which the big hit ends and returns to the normal state, and the fluctuation of FIG. Left-handed display (two arrows marked “left-handed” and “return to left-handed” in the figure) prompting that the game ball B be shot into the first starting port 2002 after the big hit Is displayed on the effect display device 1600 for a predetermined time.

[14-8. Exceptions in Hold Charge Production and Final Janken Production]
Hereinafter, special cases in the hold charge effect and the final Janken effect will be described. In the hold charge effect as described above, it is urged to enter the game ball B into the second start port 2004 until the number of holds in the special figure 2 reaches the maximum (four). You may not be able to save the maximum number of holds. Hereinafter, the effect performed in such a case will be described.

  FIG. 178 shows that no hold of special figure 2 is accumulated until the end of the fluctuation (the fluctuation of the fourth special figure 2 after the start of the short time state) in which the hold charge effect is executed (that is, at the end of the short time state). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect in the case of. As described above, the fluctuation in which the hold charge effect is executed is a deviation fluctuation. (A) shows a state in which the hold charge effect has started. In this state, there is no special figure 2 hold. Further, a right-handed display (middle) and a right-handed display (small) are displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  (B) shows a state after a predetermined time has elapsed in the fluctuation. During the change, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the hold charge effect, and there is not more than one hold in the special figure 2 (that is, there is no change hold in the special figure 2 for the sixth time from the start of the short-time state, When the final Janken effect cannot be executed), a hold failure display indicating that the hold of the special figure 2 could not be stored is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as "Charge failure ..." in the figure. . Both the right-handed display (middle) and the right-handed display (small) are displayed on the effect display device 1600 because the short-time state is changing and the suspension of the special figure 2 has not been accumulated to the maximum. As described above, in the state where the suspension of the special figure 2 is accumulated to the maximum, the right-handed display (medium) may be erased from the effect display device 1600 even in the short-time state.

  (C) shows the state at the end of the change. A combination of decorative decorative patterns is displayed. As described above, the hold charge effect is executed at the fourth change in the special figure 2 after the start of the time reduction state. Further, when the fluctuation of FIG. Accordingly, all right-handed displays are deleted from the effect display device 1600. (D) shows the state after the end of the change. Since the time-short state is completed and the normal state is restored, the left-handed display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 for a predetermined time.

  FIG. 179 shows that the hold of the second special figure 2 is accumulated immediately before the end of the fluctuation (the fluctuation of the fourth special figure 2 after the start of the time reduction state) in which the hold charge effect is executed (that is, immediately before the completion of the short time state). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect in the case of. (A) shows a state in which the hold charge effect has started. In this state, there is only one hold of special figure 2. Further, a right-handed display (middle) and a right-handed display (small) are displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  (B) shows a state after a predetermined time has elapsed in the fluctuation. During the change, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the hold charge effect, there is only one hold in FIG. 2, so that the hold failure display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as in FIG. 178 (B). The Other displays are the same as those in FIG. 178B.

  (C ′) shows a state in which the game ball B enters the second start port 2004 after the change and the hold failure display are displayed on the effect display device 1600. The said entrance is an entrance corresponding to the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 of the 6th time after a time-short state start. (D ′) indicates a state at the end of the variation. A combination of decorative decorative patterns is displayed. Since the short-time state has ended, all right-handed displays are deleted from the effect display device 1600.

  (E ′) is a state in which the fifth variation in FIG. As described above, when the fifth variation of the special figure 2 is a deviation variation, the variation time is 1 second, no special effect is performed, and the combination of the decorative pattern deviations stops on the effect display device 1600. . In addition, the hold failure display is still displayed on the effect display device 1600 even in the variation.

  (F ′) is a state in which the sixth change in FIG. 2 has started. As described above, when there is a ball corresponding to the sixth change in FIG. 2 after the hold failure display is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the revival effect is executed at the start of the sixth change. In the example of (F ′), the line “It is not over yet!” Is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and then the final Janken effect starts as in FIG. 165 (P ′).

  In addition, for example, when winning in the normal symbol lottery just before the end of the 4th variation of Special Figure 2, the opening of the second starting port 2004 and the entry of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 There is a possibility that it is performed just before the end of the change or immediately after the end of the change (that is, immediately after the end of the short-time state).

  If the game ball B enters the second start port 2004 after the hold failure display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and before the start of the fifth change in FIG. 2, 5 in FIG. The revival effect may be executed at the time of change, and the final Janken effect may be started simultaneously with the start of the sixth change in FIG. In addition, after the hold failure display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and in a state where a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) or more remains until the end of the fourth change in FIG. When B enters the ball, the revival effect is executed by the end of the 4th change in the special figure 2, and the 5th change in the special figure 2 produces the same effect as (E) (however, the hold failure display) Is deleted from the effect display device 1600), the final Janken effect may be started simultaneously with the start of the sixth change in the special figure 2.

  In addition, after the hold failure display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) or more remains until the end of the fourth change in FIG. 4), for example, at the 4th variation in FIG. 2, the hold failure display and the right-handed display (middle) are deleted from the effect display device 1600 to indicate that the hold has been stored to the maximum. A display (for example, a display similar to FIG. 165 (N ′)) may be displayed.

  In the example of FIG. 179, since there is no suspension of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 at the start time of the sixth fluctuation of the special figure 2, the final Janken effect is performed using only the sixth fluctuation of the special figure 2. That is, based on only the winning result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the sixth variation of the special figure 2, the result of the Janken game in the final Janken production is determined. When the final Janken production is performed using only the sixth variation of the special figure 2, the display indicating that the first Janken game of the final Janken production as shown in FIG. 165 (Q ′) starts (“No. 1 battle! ”) May be displayed on the effect display device 1600, but since there is no hold of the special figure 2 already, the display performed by the 8th change of the special 2 when the hold charge effect is successful, that is, As shown in FIG. 166 (W ′), it is preferable that the display (“final game!”) Indicating that the final Janken game of the final Janken production starts is displayed on the production display device 1600.

  In addition, when there are two suspensions of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 at the end of the fifth fluctuation of the special figure 2, the final Janken production as a continuous production using the sixth and seventh fluctuations of the special figure 2 Is done. That is, based on the winning results of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the 6th and 7th fluctuations of Special Figure 2, the winnings, losing, and Aiko of the Janken game in the final Janken production at the 6th and 7th fluctuations are determined. The

  When the final Janken production is performed using the 6th and 7th variation of Special Figure 2, the first Janken game of the final Janken production as shown in Fig. 166 (T ') starts at the 7th variation of Special Figure 2. A display indicating that the game is to be performed (“2nd game!” In the figure) may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The display performed in the eighth fluctuation, that is, as shown in FIG. 166 (W ′), the display indicating that the final Janken game of the final Janken production starts (“Final Battle !!”) is displayed on the production display device 1600. It is preferable to be displayed.

  Note that when the normal symbol lottery is won just before the end of the short-time state, the second start port 2004 starts to be opened just before the end of the short-time state. It is desirable that the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004 and the stop time of the symbol are determined so that the fifth variation starts. When the second start port 2004 is opened after the start of the fifth fluctuation in FIG. 2, the fluctuation of the special figure 2 from the start of the short-time state (as described above, the special figure 2 has a high hit probability). This is because it may be executed nine times or more and the burden on the hall may increase.

  Specifically, the normal symbol lottery is performed in a short time, the normal lottery result is a result of opening the second start port 2004 (winning result), and the state in which the normal lottery result is obtained is not the short time state. In the normal state, it is preferable to use the opening pattern when the result is obtained in the normal state, not the opening pattern that is opened when the result is obtained in the short-time state. .

  Even when the winning probability in the normal state is set to 0 (that is, even if the normal symbol lottery is not performed in the normal state), it is extremely important to prevent an increase in the burden on the hole. An open pattern that is difficult to win is prepared in advance. The normal symbol lottery is performed during the short-time state, the normal lottery result is the result of opening the second starting port 2004 (winning result), and the state in which the normal lottery result is obtained is not the short-time state but the normal state. In such a case, it is preferable to eliminate as much as possible that the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed nine times or more from the start of the short-time state by executing an opening pattern that is extremely difficult to win. An open pattern that is extremely difficult to win is a time shorter than the open pattern when a normal symbol lottery is performed during the short-time state and a winning result is obtained during the short-time state (for example, less than 1 second, 0 .008 seconds).

  In this chapter, the special lottery results up to the 4th variation of Special Figure 2 are in principle announced in the stock time production at the 1st variation of Special Figure 2, but for example each variation of Special Figure 2 The special lottery result corresponding to the change may be announced. Specifically, for example, in each variation (1st to 8th variation) in FIG. 2, a Janken game effect is performed, and the winning of the special lottery result of the variation is notified by the game result.

  In this case, for example, at the start of the Janken game effect in the Nth fluctuation (N is an integer between 1 and 8) in the special figure 2, a display indicating the Nth fluctuation in the special figure 2 (for example, “No. N battle! ”) Is displayed on the effect display device 1600. However, it is a change of special figure 2 after the fifth change, and a change that does not hold special figure 2 at the start of the change, and indicates that it is the final fluctuation of special figure 2 at the start of the Janken game effect. (For example, “Final Battle !!”) may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Further, as described above, since the fluctuation of the special figure 2 can be executed a maximum of eight times in the time-short state, at the start of the Janken game effect in the Nth fluctuation (N is an integer of 1 to 8) of the special figure 2, A display (for example, “the (9-N) battle !!”) indicating that there are remaining (9-N) games of Janken may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, when such a display is made, if the maximum number (4) of suspension of special figure 2 is not saved at the end of the time-saving state, the actual number of remaining fluctuations of special figure 2 until the completion of the time-shortening state and Janken There is a trap between the display of “Remaining (9-N) Battle !!” displayed at the start of the game.

  For example, when the suspension of the special figure 2 is not accumulated to the maximum by the end of the time-saving state, the display at the start of the Janken game effect after the fifth change may be corrected. Specifically, for example, when the Janken game of the 4th variation in Special Figure 2 is started, “5 Remaining Battles !!” is displayed, but when there are two suspensions of Special Figure 2 at the end of the short-time state, At the start of the 5th variation Janken game production of Special Figure 2, "2 Remaining Battles!", At the start of the 6th Variation Janken Game Production of Special Figure 2 "Remaining 1 Battle!" May be displayed) on the effect display device 1600.

  In this case, a vanishing effect in which the remaining number of Janken game effects disappears at the start of the fifth variation Janken game effect in FIG. Specifically, for example, in the above-described example, since the variation of the special figure 2 is executed only twice less than the maximum number, the two hand images of the friend are temporarily displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the disappearance effect. And then erase. Further, in the disappearance effect in the above-described example, an effect may be performed in which the display of “remaining 2 battles !!” is corrected immediately after displaying “remaining 4 battles!” On the effect display device 1600. In this case, for example, the display of “remaining 4 battles !!” may be made translucent or blurred.

  Note that the disappearance effect and the normal Janken game effect may be executed in parallel. Specifically, for example, either the disappearance effect or the normal Janken game effect is displayed translucently, or the display area of the disappearance effect and the normal effect is displayed so as not to overlap. Make both visible. Further, after executing the disappearance effect, the normal Janken game effect may be executed.

  Further, for example, when the suspension of the special figure 2 is not accumulated to the maximum by the end of the short-time state, the display at the start of the Janken game effect of the final fluctuation of the special figure 2 may be corrected. Specifically, for example, when the Janken game performance of the 4th variation in Special Figure 2 is started, “5 Remaining Battles !!” is displayed, but there are two Special Figure 2 holds at the end of the short-time state. At the start of the 5th variation Janken game production of Special Figure 2, "4 Remaining Battles!" ”May be displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this case, the above-described disappearance effect may be executed at the start of the sixth change in FIG.

  Further, for example, even when the suspension of the special figure 2 is not accumulated to the maximum by the end of the time-saving state, the display at the start of the Janken game effect need not be corrected. Specifically, for example, if there are two special figure 2 holds at the end of the short-time state, the remaining four battles !! At the start of the 6th variation Janken game production, “3 remaining games !!” is displayed on the production display device 1600. In this case, the disappearance effect described above may be executed at the end of the sixth change in FIG. 2 and a display indicating that all the Janken game effects have ended may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, when notifying the special lottery result corresponding to the variation in each variation of the special figure 2 in this way, the variation time corresponding to the suspension of the special figure 2 during the short time state and after the completion of the short time state is shown in FIG. As shown, it is only necessary to select a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time regardless of whether it is out of play, small hit or big hit.

[15. Decorative design freeze production]
In this chapter, we will explain the freeze effect of decorative symbols. As described above, the main control MPU transmits a stop display command to the peripheral control board 1510 at the end of the change. Further, until the peripheral control MPU receives a stop display command from the main control MPU, the effect display device 1600 does not stop the decorative symbols in a state that suggests a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped (for example, each decoration). Temporary stop state including shaking fluctuation display displayed in a manner in which the entire symbol is shaken), and the decorative symbol is stopped (determined display) based on receiving the stop display command.

  In the fixed display, if the display position of the decorative pattern as a whole does not move, a part of the decorative pattern changes (for example, the aura worn by the character displayed in the decorative pattern is shaken, and the character's The limb may move slightly, etc.).

  Further, the peripheral control MPU in the finalized display state displays the effect until it receives any of the big hit start command, the small hit start command, or the next fluctuation determination result notification command (fluctuation start command) from the main control MPU. In the apparatus 1600, the decorative symbol is kept in the final display state. However, the peripheral control MPU completely displays the decorative design in the effect display device 1600 until the standby time specified in step S194 elapses in the final display state immediately after the deviation change and there is no next change hold. It may be maintained in a stopped state (a state in which there is no change in the above-mentioned decorative symbol), and thereafter, the decorative symbol may be displayed in such a manner that a part of the decorative symbol changes although the position of the decorative symbol does not move.

  The decorative symbol freeze effect is an effect in which the fixed display time is longer than usual, and is executed as a prefetch effect. In addition, the front light guide plate 2160 emits light according to the selected light emission schedule during the fixed display time during which the decorative symbol freeze effect is executed. It is assumed that the normal fixed display time during which the decorative symbol freeze symbol effect is not executed is 500 ms.

  FIG. 180 is an example of a fixed display time selection table. The fixed display time selection table defines a production schedule for realizing a decorative symbol freeze production. The fixed display time selection table is stored in the ROM of the main control board 1310, for example. The fixed display time selection table includes, for example, a number column, a fixed display time column, a light emission schedule column, and a distribution column. The number field stores a number that uniquely identifies a record in the fixed display time selection table.

  The fixed display time field stores the fixed display time. The fixed display time in the big hit variation is the time from the time when the stop display command is set in step S182 to the time when the big hit start command is set in step S187. The definite display time in the small hit variation is the time from the time when the stop display command is set in step S182 to the time when the small hit start command is set in step S191. Further, the fixed display time in the deviation fluctuation is the time from the setting of the stop display command in step S182 to the end of the standby time in step S194. In the example of FIG. 180, the fixed display time stored in the fixed display time column is longer than 500 ms (that is, a normal fixed display time in which the decorative symbol freeze effect is not executed), and is 1000 ms, 2000 ms, or 5000 ms.

  The light emission schedule column stores the light emission schedule, that is, the light emission mode of the front light guide plate 2160 in each period during the fixed display time. The distribution field stores the fixed display time and the light emission schedule distribution for each type of change to be determined in advance.

For example, the main control MPU executes a lottery using the fixed display time selection table at a predetermined rate in step S62 of the pre-determination process. Specifically, for example, a hold excluding a hold determined to execute a prefetch effect during execution of the prefetch effect (specifically, for example, when it is determined to generate a prefetch effect at the time of a fourth hold prize) Probability that the decorative symbol freeze effect will occur due to the fluctuation corresponding to any of the first, second, and third suspensions (that is, using the fixed display time selection table in step S62 corresponding to the fluctuation) The probability that the lottery will be executed) is 1/5 if the hold determined to execute the pre-reading effect (the fourth hold in the above example) is out of place, 1/2 in the case of winning, etc. It is preferable to increase the expectation of winning when the decorative symbol freeze effect is executed.
In the lottery, the main control MPU selects a fixed display time and a light emission schedule from the fixed display time selection table based on the hit type and the distribution. Further, the main control MPU determines a change in which the decorative symbol freeze effect is executed from the change being executed and the change being held (excluding the change of the prior determination target). Further, the main control MPU determines the timing for setting the big hit start command or the small hit start command or the waiting time in step S194 based on the selected fixed display time.

  Also, the main control MPU notifies the peripheral control MPU by including information indicating the variation in which the decorative symbol freeze effect is executed and the selected light emission schedule in the prior determination command, and the peripheral control MPU notifies the notified light emission schedule. Accordingly, the front light guide plate 2610 is caused to emit light.

  Note that the fixed display time selection table may store only the fixed display time and the distribution of the fixed display time for each category. In this case, for example, the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 stores information indicating the light emission schedule for each fixed display time and the distribution of the light emission schedule. That is, in this case, the main control MPU notifies the peripheral control MPU of the information indicating the variation in which the decorative symbol freeze effect is executed and the selected confirmed display time, and the peripheral control MPU notifies the notified confirmed display time. Based on this, a light emission schedule is selected.

  In the example of FIG. 180, the sorting is determined so that the long fixed display time is easily selected in the order of deviation variation <small hit variation <big hit variation. Further, as the light emission mode of the front light guide plate 2160, the light emission schedule and distribution are determined so that the degree of expectation is blue <green <red, and the degree of expectation is higher as the number of light emission is larger. That is, for example, the selection rate of the light emission mode with low expectation is low so that the selection rate of the light emission mode with high expectation is higher in the small hit variation than in the deviation variation, and in the big hit variation than in the small hit variation. In addition, the light emission schedule and distribution are determined so that the number of times of light emission increases.

  In the example of FIG. 180, it is determined in all the light emission schedules that the front light guide plate 2160 does not emit light (no light emission) in the period of 0 to 500 ms from the start of the fixed display. On the other hand, as described above, the normal fixed display time during which the decorative symbol freeze effect is not executed is 500 ms. Further, in the above-described example, the decorative symbol freeze effect as the pre-reading effect does not affect the effect during the decorative symbol variation, so the player cannot expect the occurrence of the decorative symbol freeze effect. Therefore, the player can know that the decorative symbol freeze effect is being executed for the first time when the fixed display time exceeds 500 ms, and can rapidly increase expectation.

  In addition, the light emission schedule of number N in the fixed display time selection table of FIG. 180 shows that the front light guide plate 2160 emits light with a light emission pattern in the order of blue, green, and red in the first 500 ms, and in the order of 2000 to 2000 ms. There is no light emission at 3500 ms, and the light guide plate 2160 emits light again with the light emission pattern at 3500 ms to 5000 ms. That is, in the light emission schedule of number N, light emission of the front light guide plate 2160 with the same light emission pattern loops with a period of no light emission interposed therebetween. The light emission schedule is selected only for the decorative symbol freeze effect corresponding to the hit variation or the small hit variation. Thereby, when the front light guide plate 2160 emits light according to a specific light emission schedule having regularity, since the hit is fixed, the player can feel an uplifting feeling.

  It should be noted that the player can adjust the amount of light (intensity of light emission) of the front light guide plate 2160 during the period in which the front light guide plate 2160 of the decorative design freeze effect can emit light (that is, after 500 ms from the start of the fixed display). It is desirable. Specifically, for example, during the period, the amount of light increases when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the right direction, and the amount of light decreases when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the left direction. In accordance with this adjustment, a light emitter different from the front light guide plate 2160 (for example, a light emitter provided in a frame such as the door frame 3, a light emitter provided in a movable body on the game panel 1100 side, The light quantity of the light emitting body that emits light on the rolling surface of the sphere B may be changed.

  At this time, an indicator indicating the light amount after adjustment may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. Accordingly, it is possible to select to increase the amount of light if it is desired to appeal to surrounding players that the decorative symbol freeze effect is being performed, and to decrease the amount of light if it is not desired to be appealed. In order to increase the feeling of tension, it is desirable that no sound is output (silence) during the decorative symbol freeze effect.

  In the above-described example, the example in which the decorative symbol freeze effect is executed as the pre-reading effect has been described. However, the decorative symbol is used as a normal effect other than the pre-reading effect (that is, an effect indicating the special lottery result corresponding to the variation being executed). Freeze production may be performed.

  However, in this case, the peripheral control MPU is a decorative symbol (of the three decorative symbols) that reminds the player that even if there is a big hit or small hit variation during the fixed display period of the decorative symbol freeze effect. At least one is different from the other two), and in a predetermined period (for example, for 500 ms) immediately before the end of the fixed display period, for example, a lamp that emits light only at the time of winning (for example, a fixed lamp) A message indicating that there is something is output from various speakers, and the fact that it is a win is announced. On the other hand, in the case of deviation variation, the decorative symbol that reminds the player that the event is a deviation is stopped during the fixed display period, and no hit notification is made. By executing the decorative symbol freeze effect in the normal effect other than the pre-reading effect, it may indicate that the change may be a hit change for a discouraged player who thinks that the change is an outlier change. Can give a sense of uplifting.

  In the case where the decorative symbol freeze effect is executed as a normal effect other than the pre-reading effect (ie, an effect indicating the special lottery result corresponding to the change being executed), The ratio at which the combination of the decorative symbols stops may be set higher than the variation in which the decorative symbol freeze effect is not executed. As a combination of the specific decorative symbols, for example, there are combinations in which all the decorative symbols are odd or even. In addition, a dedicated decorative symbol described as “freeze” may be stopped. In this case, for example, among the three decorative symbols to be stopped, it is desirable that the degree of expectation that the decorative symbol freeze effect is generated increases as the number of the dedicated decorative symbols increases. By stopping the combination of the decorative symbols as described above, the player can expect the generation of the decorative symbol freeze effect afterward, although the decorative symbol of the variation in the deviation is stopped.

  In this case, the main control MPU selects a fixed display time and a light emission schedule from the fixed display time selection table based on the hit type and distribution. The selection process is performed, for example, immediately after step S132 if the jackpot flag is set in step S131, and is performed immediately after step S136, for example, if the jackpot flag is not set in step S131. .

  Further, the main control MPU determines the timing for setting the big hit start command or the small hit start command or the waiting time in step S194 based on the selected fixed display time. Further, the main control MPU notifies the peripheral control MPU of the light emission schedule selected from the fixed display time selection table in the determination result notification command in step S137, and the peripheral control MPU displays the front light guide plate 2610 according to the notified light emission schedule. Make it emit light.

[16. Judge production]
[16-1. Directed direction]
Hereinafter, the prior instruction effect executed during the judge effect will be described. The judgment effect is an effect of notifying a special lottery result corresponding to the change among effects executed during the special symbol change. FIG. 181 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a first instruction effect. In the following description, it is assumed that the first instruction effect is executed in the variation that is won in the win. (A) is a state in which a reach is applied in the big hit fluctuation. (B) is a state in which reach production has started. In addition, during the reach production, the Janken game production, which is the judgment production, is performed.

  (C) is a state during reach production. In the effect display device 1600, a right-handed display that prompts the user to perform a so-called right-handed display is displayed in parallel with the judge effect during the reach effect (“Janken ...” in the figure). During the change, the second big prize opening 2006 is not opened because it is a normal state, but during the big hit game, the second big prize opening 2006 is opened, so that the game is played by making a right turn. Therefore, by displaying a right-handed display as a prior indication in the fluctuation during the normal state in this way, it is possible to remind the player that the big hit game starts after the fluctuation, and the player's sense of expectation for the big hit Will increase.

  It is desirable that the right-handed display in the first instruction effect be different from the right-handed display (such as the right-handed display (large) described above) displayed in the big hit game, the small hit game, and the short-time state. If these are the same mode of display, there is a high possibility that the player will misunderstand the gaming state and actually start right-handed, which will result in a decrease in the number of balls, which is disadvantageous for the player. This is because the possibility increases.

  In the first instruction effect, the image of the second big prize opening 2006 may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 together with the right-handed display in order to make the player strongly associate the big hit with the player. Further, in the first instruction effect, an image of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second start opening 2004 may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 together with the right-handed display. Thereby, a player can be reminded of a small hit or a short time state.

  (D) is a state during reach production following (C). When a predetermined time elapses after the right-handed display is displayed, the right-handed display is highlighted in a manner that is easier to recognize (larger in the drawing) in the effect display device 1600. At the same time that the highlighting is performed, a voice prompting a right strike such as “What are you doing ?? In the example of FIG. 181, the right-handed display changes in two steps, a small right-handed display in (C) and a large right-handed display in (D), but gradually changes through three or more steps. May be highlighted.

  (E) is a state during reach production following (D). The teammate character has won the enemy game against the enemy character. Also in (E), the highlighted right-handed display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Note that, as in (C) to (E), the effect image of the first instruction effect and the judge effect are positions on the effect display device 1600 where both can be visually recognized (for example, the distance between the center positions of both effect images is It is desirable to be displayed at a predetermined value or higher. When the effect image of the first instruction effect and the effect image of the judge effect are displayed at overlapping positions on the effect display device 1600, the effect image of the first instruction effect is displayed with priority over the effect image of the judge effect (for example, on the front side). It is desirable. In (C) to (E), the light emission modes of the various light guide plates and the various lamps are not the light emission modes in the judgment effect, but the light emission modes (for example, the right part of the game board are provided) It is desirable that the lamp is turned on.

  (F) is the state at the end of the change. In the effect display device 1600, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is stopped, and a display indicating that the jackpot has been won ("Big hit! Congratulations!" In the figure) is displayed. As shown in (F), it is desirable that the right-handed display in the first instruction effect is deleted from the effect display device 1600 at the end of the change.

  Even before the end of the change, for example, the game ball B is given a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice) for the gate portion 2003 (or the general winning opening 2001 that can enter the game ball B only when it is right-handed). If the handle 182 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, the maximum rotatable angle of the handle 182) or if the single button 193 of the handle 182 is pressed, the right-handed display in the first indication effect is displayed in the effect display device. It is desirable to erase from 1600.

  In FIG. 181, the example in which the first instruction effect is executed in the hit variation has been described, but the first instruction effect may also be executed in the deviation variation. However, in the case where the preceding instruction effect is executed even in the case of the deviation variation, the prior indication effect in the hit variation and the deviation variation is increased so that the hit expectation degree in the case where the prior instruction effect occurs (for example, 50% or more). It is desirable that the distribution is determined.

  In addition, it is desirable that the first instruction effect in the deviation fluctuation is executed only in the short time state. When right-handed is executed in accordance with the first instruction effect in the normal state deviation fluctuation, it is difficult for the game ball B to enter the first start port 2002, and the fluctuation is a deviation fluctuation. Because it will end up.

  However, if the right strike is continued even during the short-running state, the increase rate of the game ball B is slower than that during the big hit or the game ball B decreases. For example, a right strike display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. When a predetermined time (for example, a time shorter than the time from the display of the right-handed display to the time when the symbol is determined) has elapsed since the start, the right-handed display may be erased from the effect display device 1600. Further, when a predetermined number (for example, 10 shots) of the game balls B are fired after the right-handed display is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or when the maximum number (4 pieces) of special figure 2 has been reserved, The right-handed display may be deleted from the effect display device 1600. As described above, it is desirable that there is a certain restriction on the display time of right-handed display.

  Further, for example, the first instruction effect may be performed when the fluctuation is started or when the reserved number in FIG. If the number of reserves shown in FIG. 2 is not accumulated to the maximum, even if the player hits the player in the right direction according to the right-handed display in the first instruction effect, the game ball B is won by winning the game ball B at the second starting port 2004. This is because the player can receive the special lottery as shown in FIG.

[16-2. Judge production using multiple controls]
Hereinafter, a judgment effect using a plurality of operation units will be described. FIG. 182 (A) is a front view showing an example of a simplified configuration of the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the effect operation lever, and FIG. 182 (B) is a simplification of the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the effect operation lever. It is a left view which shows an example of the structure comprised. For the convenience of explanation, illustrations are omitted except for the configuration necessary for the explanation of the presentation operation lever. In the illustrated configuration, dimensions and shapes are exaggerated and simplified.

  In this chapter, the pachinko machine 1 further includes an effect operation lever 304, an effect operation lever sensor 305, and a confirmation lamp 306. The effect operation lever 304 is attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and to the left of the effect operation unit 300, for example. The effect operation lever 304 can be tilted to the near side as viewed from the player. That is, based on an instruction displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the like, an effect that progresses when the player pulls the effect operation lever 304 toward the near side can be executed.

  The effect operation lever sensor 305 is attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210, for example (it is not necessary to be attached to the effect operation lever 304, that is, is arranged in a different area from the effect operation lever 304). ing). Further, the effect operation lever sensor 305 is positioned on the near side from the initial position of the effect operation lever 304 (a state where the tip of the lever faces the vertical direction), and detects that the effect operation lever 304 is tilted to the near side. The production operation lever sensor 305 is attached at a position where the production operation lever 304 can be detected only when the production operation lever 304 tilts forward by a predetermined angle (for example, 20 degrees) or more.

  The confirmation lamp 306 is attached, for example, above the game board 5. The confirmation lamp 306 is turned on when, for example, the fluctuation is included in the fluctuation being executed or the fluctuation being held, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. In addition, the confirmation lamp 306 is in a state in which, for example, a character indicating that a hit such as “confirmation” has been confirmed can be visually recognized when the lamp is turned on.

  FIG. 183 and FIG. 184 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of a judgment effect using a plurality of operation units. FIG. 183 (A) shows a state where reach is reached in the big hit fluctuation. (B) is the state where the reach effect has started, and the opening effect of the judge effect has started. In the reach production, the Janken game production, which is a judgment production, is performed. If the fluctuation is a win fluctuation, the Janken production is won, and if the fluctuation is a deviation fluctuation, the Janken production is defeated.

  (C) is a state during the reach production, the opening production of the judgment production is finished, and the main production of the judgment production is started. The effect display device 1600 displays a judge effect (“Janken ...” in the figure) during the reach effect. (D) is a state during reach production following (C). The effect display device 1600 displays an image that prompts the center pressing operation unit 303a to press and an image that prompts the effect operation lever 304 to tilt toward the near side (that is, an image that prompts an operation to a different operation unit). .

  (E) is a state in which the reach effect is continued from (D), and is a state after the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed. The effective operation period of the central press operation unit 303a starts when the display for prompting the central press operation unit 303a to be pressed is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The end of the operation effective period is, for example, before the timing at which the winning is announced in the judgment effect (timing at which the hand of the teammate character and the hand of the enemy character are displayed).

  When the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed during the operation valid period, for example, in the effect display device 1600, the image that prompts the center pressing operation unit 303a to be pressed is deleted, and the image of the hand of the teammate character and the “chance” The character "!" Cuts in. In addition, the operation valid period is forcibly terminated. Note that the color of the cut-in image and characters (for example, the level of hit expectation increases in the order of blue, green, and red) differs depending on the expectation of hit (coloring is omitted in FIG. 183). ). That is, in the judgment effect, when the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed during the operation effective period, information indicating the degree of expectation for the change is notified. If the central pressing operation unit 303a is not pressed during the operation effective period, the image prompting the central pressing operation unit 303a to be pressed is deleted from the effect display device 1600 at the end of the operation effective period. .

  (F) is a state during reach production following (E), and is a state after the production operation lever 304 is tilted to the near side by a predetermined angle or more. After the display for prompting the tilt of the effect operation lever 304 toward the near side is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the effect operation lever 304 can detect the tilt of the effect operation lever 304 by a predetermined angle or more (ie, the effect operation lever sensor 305 can detect the tilt of the effect operation lever 304). If it is tilted forward, the display is deleted in the effect display device 1600. Furthermore, the confirmation lamp 306 is lit only when the fluctuation is a hit fluctuation.

  That is, when the effect operating lever 304 is tilted, a complete notification effect of the winning in the change occurs. Further, the complete notification effect is performed by the confirmation lamp 306 and does not affect the failure notification effect in the judge effect. It should be noted that the operation effective period of the production operation lever 304 is not defined (valid until the end of the change), but even if the production operation lever 304 is not tilted forward, by the end of the change, It is desirable that the display that prompts the effect control lever 304 to tilt toward the near side is deleted from the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, since there is a player who wants to enjoy a complete notification without seeing a display indicating the degree of expectation of winning, even when the central pressing operation unit 303a satisfies conditions other than pressing, the operation effective period of the central pressing operation unit 303a May be forcibly terminated and an image prompting the center pressing operation unit 303a to be pressed may be deleted from the effect display device 1600. As the condition, for example, a specific operation on an operation unit other than the center pressing operation unit 303a and the production operation lever 304 (for example, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated twice in the right direction and then rotated in the left direction), the first The winning of the game ball B at the starting port 2002, the winning of the gaming ball B at the second starting port 2004, the special figure 1 hold up to the maximum (four), and the special figure 2 hold maximum (four) There are up to, etc.

  On the other hand, there are some players who want to enjoy the judgment effect until the end of the fluctuation only by the effect indicating the degree of expectation regardless of the complete notification, so conditions other than tilting the effect operation lever 304 to the near side (for example, the same as the above-mentioned conditions) Even if the above is satisfied, the operation of the effect operation lever 304 may be invalidated and the image prompting the tilt of the effect operation lever 304 toward the near side may be deleted from the effect display device 1600.

  Note that, in (D), two images that prompt the operation of the operation unit are displayed at the same time, but the image that prompts the central pressing operation unit 303a for which the operation valid period is determined is displayed on the effect display device 1600 first. For example, when a predetermined time elapses or when the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, an effect display device displays an image that prompts the user to tilt the effect operation lever 304 for which the operation effective period is not determined. 1600 may be displayed.

  On the contrary, an image that prompts the user to tilt the effect operation lever 304 for which the operation valid period is not set may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 first. However, in this case, the effect that prompts the operation for executing the complete notification is displayed before the effect that prompts the operation for the expectation degree notification. Since there are some players who are not very interested in the chance production after confirming the complete notification, an image prompting the tilt of the production operation lever 304 to the near side is displayed, and then an image prompting the central pressing operation portion 303a to be pressed. Is shorter than, for example, the time from the start of the main effect of the judge effect (FIG. 183 (C)) to the time when the image that prompts the effect control lever 304 to lean forward is displayed (for example, Within 3 seconds). For the same reason, it is desirable that the tilting of the effect operation lever 304 to the near side is not a necessary condition for displaying an image that prompts the center pressing operation unit 303a to be pressed.

  It should be noted that the period for displaying the image prompting the operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a does not necessarily coincide with the operation effective period of the center pressing operation unit 303a. However, the start of the period is preferably before the start of the operation effective period, and the end of the period is preferably after the end of the operation effective period. Further, it is desirable to secure, for example, 5 seconds or more as the length of the display period of the image.

  In addition, the display time of the image prompting the tilting operation lever 304 to tilt toward the near side may be longer or shorter than the display time of the image prompting the operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a. The display time may be set such that the longer the expected time is, the higher the expectation degree may be, or it may be fixed (that is, the display time does not depend on the special lottery result). Note that when the fluctuation is a hit fluctuation, a complete notification effect is executed when the effect operation lever 304 is operated without displaying an image prompting the tilt of the effect operation lever 304 toward the near side. The announcement effect itself may be a hidden effect.

  In (D), two images that prompt the operation of the operation unit are displayed at positions that do not overlap in the effect display device 1600, but may be displayed at overlapping positions. In this case, the display priority of the image that prompts the tilting of the effect operation lever 304 that does not have the operation effective period to the front side from the image that prompts the center pressing operation unit 303a to press the operation effective period is set. It is good to make it high (for example, display on the near side).

  In addition, an image that prompts the user to tilt the presentation operation lever 304 whose operation valid period is not set may be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied. As the specific conditions, there is a case where the special figure 1 hold is not stored to the maximum, and a special figure 2 hold is not stored to the maximum. If the special symbol fluctuation has not been accumulated to the maximum, even if the game ball B is struck while operating the effect control lever 304 in accordance with the display, over winning ( Such a condition is set because it takes time until a game ball B enters the starting port corresponding to the special symbol variation in a state where the special symbol variation is retained to the maximum. Thus, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an opportunity for the player to suffer a disadvantage.

  In addition, for example, when a condition that can be achieved based on the operation of the effect operation lever 304 (detection by the effect operation lever sensor 305) is satisfied, the effect operation lever for which the operation effective period is not defined. It is not necessary to display an image that prompts the user to tilt 304 toward the front side. In the hit variation in which the display of the image prompting the tilt of the effect operation lever 304 for which the operation valid period is not set is scheduled, detection by the effect operation lever sensor 305 is performed before the display of the image. In this case, the confirmation lamp 306 may be turned on without displaying the image.

  If the player recognizes that the display of the image prompting the tilting of the effect operation lever 304 to the near side is not executed when the special symbol variation is retained as described above, the player receives an overwinning prize. It is possible to advance the game so as not to generate, and to reduce the chance of suffering a disadvantage.

  Further, the display timing of the image that prompts the presentation operation lever 304 to tilt forward may differ depending on the number of reservations in the special drawings 1 and 2. Specifically, for example, the display start timing of the image may be earlier as the number of reservations is smaller. In addition, the image that prompts the presentation operation lever 304 to tilt toward the front side may be set to be displayed only during the change of the advantageous state (in the probability changing state or in the short time state).

  In the example of FIG. 183, the image of the effect operation lever 304 is displayed. However, as described above, the effect operation lever 304 must be tilted to the near side by an angle that can be detected by the effect operation lever sensor 305. Even if it is a hit fluctuation, the confirmation lamp 306 is not lit. Therefore, in order to make the player understand how far the production operation lever 304 should be tilted, an image of the unit (production operation operation) in which the production operation lever sensor 305 is mounted instead of or in addition to the image of the production operation lever 304. (Including an image of only the lever sensor 305) may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  It should be noted that the operation means (production operation lever 304) that is actually operated by the player is not displayed, but a condition that can be achieved based on the operation means being operated (detection by the production operation lever sensor 305). Needless to say, the display operation lever 304 and its sensor are not limited. For example, a condition that can be achieved based on a predetermined operation performed on an operation medium (for example, the center pressing operation unit 303a or the handle 182) that can be operated by a player different from the effect operation lever 304 (The display indicating how far the center pressing operation unit 303a should be pressed, and if the handle 182 indicates how far it should be turned or where it should be hit) may be displayed.

  FIG. 184 (G) shows a state during reach production following FIG. 183 (F). The teammate character has won the enemy game against the enemy character. Even in (G), the confirmation lamp 306 remains lit. (H) is the state at the end of the change. In the effect display device 1600, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is stopped, and a display indicating that the jackpot has been won ("Big hit! Congratulations!" In the figure) is displayed. Also in (H), the confirmation lamp 306 remains lit. The confirmation lamp 306 is turned off at a predetermined timing after the symbol is confirmed and until the big hit game is started.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a pachislot machine, or a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined, Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1600 Production display device 3000 Back unit 3300 Upper front movable production unit 3301 Unit base 3302 Upper front drive motor (drive motor)
3303 First link bar 3304 Second link bar (link member)
3305 Upper stopper 3306 Lower stopper 3350 Upper front movable decorative body 3351 Central decorative body (main decorative body)
3352 First protruding decorative body (sub decorative body unit)
3352a First protruding decorative part (sub decorative body)
3352b First connecting rod (connecting member)
3352c Link attachment portion 3353 Second projecting decorative body (sub-decorating body unit)
3353a Second protruding decorative part (sub decorative body)
3353b Second connecting rod (connecting member)
3353c Link mounting part

Claims (1)

Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information when a game medium is received at a predetermined start port;
A special symbol variation executing means for executing a special symbol variation based on the lottery information when a special symbol variation start condition is established;
Based on the lottery information, effect execution means for executing an effect during the special symbol change period by the special symbol change execution means,
A holding means for storing and holding the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Gaming state control means for controlling to any one of the gaming state among the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state more advantageous than the normal gaming state;
It has a plurality of operation units that can be operated by the player,
In a special symbol variation period, a first effect that prompts an operation of a first operation unit among the plurality of operation units, and a second that prompts an operation of a second operation unit different from the first operation unit Directing, and
The first effect is displayed while an effective period of operation of the first operation unit is determined,
The second effect is displayed while the effective period of operation of the second operation unit is not defined,
The operation mode of the first operation unit urged by the first effect is different from the operation mode of the second operation unit urged by the second effect,
The second effect is an effect that is allowed to appear in a situation in which the number of memory reserved by the holding means is less than the upper limit value, and the special symbol variation period in the advantageous gaming state A gaming machine characterized in that it is an effect that can appear before the first effect.